JP2019122618A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of contributing to prevention of malfunction of a Pachinko machine and destruction of electronic components.SOLUTION: When persons who can operate a setting key switch 1311a (only limited persons including the manager of a game hall are allowed to carry the setting key switch 1311a and the number of persons is limited to 2 to 3) touch a destaticization part, noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by a static electricity discharge by electrification of the persons themselves is removed by the destaticization part, penetration noise (electromagnetic noise) via the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented even if the persons operate the setting key switch 1311a capable of setting a plurality of kinds of winning probabilities.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a main control board for controlling a game is disposed on the back side in a state housed in a case (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-214975, A (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031], and Drawing 2)

  By the way, although the main control board is accommodated in a case like the game machine described in patent document 1, when it receives the influence of the noise by an electrostatic discharge, for example, control of a game machine like a main control board or There is a problem that an important substrate to be managed malfunctions or an electronic component mounted on the substrate is destroyed.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can contribute to preventing malfunction of the gaming machine and destruction of electronic parts. is there.

  The effective solution for achieving the above-mentioned objective is shown below. The operation and the like will be described as necessary. In addition, although corresponding configurations and the like are appropriately shown in the embodiments of the invention for ease of understanding, the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising: a charge removal unit capable of removing noise generated by electrostatic discharge; and a setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probability to be settable, wherein the charge removal unit and the setting device At least the setting device is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

  This gaming machine is capable of playing a game, and includes a charge removal unit capable of removing noise generated by electrostatic discharge, and a setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities in a settable state. At least the setting device of the charge removal unit and the setting device is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

  As described above, when a person who can operate the setting device touches the charge removal portion, the person is charged by the person and noise generated by electrostatic discharge is removed by the charge removal portion. Even if the setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities can be operated, the noise can be prevented from entering the setting device. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the gaming machine and destruction of electronic parts.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of FIG. 1 corresponds to a game machine, and among various decorative portions provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. The setting key switch 1311 a corresponds to the charge removal unit, and is mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 corresponds to the setting device.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a front frame pivotally supported by a frame so as to be openable and closable, wherein the charge removal unit is provided on the front frame. In this way, a person who can operate the setting device can charge the device itself and remove noise generated by electrostatic discharge by touching the charge removal portion provided on the front frame.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the outer frame 2 in FIG. 4 corresponds to a frame, and the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 in FIG. 4 corresponds to a front frame.

(Solution 3)
The game machine according to Solution 2, wherein the static elimination unit is electrically connected to a frame ground of the game machine or a ground side of an AC power supply supplied to the game machine. Machine. In this way, the charge removal unit can be electrically connected to the frame ground of the gaming machine or to the ground side of the AC power supplied to the gaming machine, so a person who can operate the setting device can himself And noise generated by electrostatic discharge can be removed by escaping to the frame ground of the gaming machine or to the ground side of the AC power supply supplied to the gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the frame ground on the door frame side corresponds to the frame ground of the gaming machine, and the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC corresponds to the “ground side of the AC power supply”.

(Solution 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a reeling-type gaming machine, the effects and effects of the solving means 1 to 3 can be obtained in the reeling-type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of the reeling type gaming machine, after variably displaying a symbol information row (for example, a plurality of reel rows attached with a plurality of symbol information) including a plurality of symbol information, the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed A variable display means is provided, and variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the start lever), and based on the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time Stop the variable display of symbol information. And while being provided with a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, a medal is used as a game medium, and a profit giving state is generated. Sometimes it is configured to pay out a large amount of medals.

(Solution 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of solution means 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a reel-type gaming machine are fused.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a drum-type gaming machine are fused, in a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a drum-type gaming machine are fused, The action and effect of the solution means 1 to 3 can be obtained. As a basic configuration of a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a reel-type gaming machine are fused, symbol information strings (for example, a plurality of reel strings attached with a plurality of symbols) composed of a plurality of symbol information are variably displayed. After that, while being provided with the variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information, the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, start lever), and the stopping operation means (for example, stop) The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button or the elapse of a predetermined time. And while providing a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, a game ball is used as a game medium, and a profit giving state is A lot of game balls are paid out at the time of occurrence.

  The gaming machine of the present invention can contribute to preventing malfunction of the gaming machine and destruction of electronic parts.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center, and was seen from the top. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame lower unit in the left-right direction center, and was seen from the right. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which moved the 1st movable part of the door-frame effect device to the rising edge, (b) is the state which moved the rendering operation part to the rising edge from the state of (a) It is a perspective view shown. (A) is an enlarged front view of lower front speaker unit vicinity, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed a lower front speaker grill, a grill decoration frame, and a lattice decoration part in (a). (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of a door frame, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part in (a). It is a top view of the door frame lower unit which shows the state in which the game ball is stored by the upper plate of the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ambient light area | region in a door frame. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the door frame effect display apparatus and effect operation part in a door frame effect apparatus, (b) is decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of a door frame effect display apparatus It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production by the presentation image of a door-frame effect display apparatus, and the movable presentation of a presentation operation part. It is a front view of a game board which made a game panel etc. opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 18 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 18 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of drawing of the wiring from the function display unit in a main control board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made the game panel etc. transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front panel is cut in parallel with the face of the game panel to make the game panel opaque and the inside of the game area where the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail are shown. It is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group in the upper right corner in FIG. It is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner in FIG. (A) is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center goods different from FIG. 29 etc., (b) is an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center goods different from (a). It is a principal part enlarged view showing. (A) is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of a center character further different from FIG. 31, (b) is a principal part expansion which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of a center character further different. FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of a center product further different from FIG.31 and FIG.32. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st rendering unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st rendering unit of the back unit from the back. It is a front view which shows the relationship of the light-guide plate and decoration board | substrate in a back 1st presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd rendering unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd rendering unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which mainly disassembled the back 2nd rendering unit according to each structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which mainly disassembled the back 2nd rendering unit according to each structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view showing a mechanism of drive in a back second rendering unit. (A)-(d) is an explanatory view showing movement of a plurality of rotation ornaments in a back second production unit. (E)-(g) is an explanatory view showing movement of a plurality of rotation ornaments in a back second rendering unit continued from FIG. It is a front view showing arrangement of LED in a back second production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd rendering unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd rendering unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd rendering unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd rendering unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the mechanism of the drive in a back 3rd rendering unit, and a decoration board | substrate in the state which moved the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration to the appearance position. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state where it has revolved 15 degrees while rotating a plurality of rotary ornaments in the back second rendering unit from a normal state in a clockwise direction. It is a front view which expands and shows the lower part of a game board in the state which moved the special rotation decoration in a back second production unit to a specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration and the lower vertical ring decoration in the back third effect unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the left horizontal ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third rendering unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third rendering unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third rendering unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the effect image in the effect display apparatus when a malfunction generate | occur | produces in a back side 3rd effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the shadow production performed during the light emission production in a back unit. It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in a state where a game board is facing from a door window of a door frame. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure (a) which expanded a part of area | region where the electronic component of SMD type is mounted in the surface (mounting surface) of a main control board, and the figure (b) which looked at this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. It is a schematic view (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate in which lead type electronic components are integrated into a predetermined area of alternative SMD type electronic components, and lead type electronic components are integrated into an alternative SMD type electronic component. It is the schematic (b) which shows the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the board | substrate which were miniaturized. It is a figure which shows the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. It is a perspective view of the main control board box of a main control unit. It is a figure (a) showing the surface (mounting side) of a setting change board, and a figure (b) showing the back (solder side) of a setting change board, and the game in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board It is a figure (c) which shows the lower part one part of the left view of a board. It is the modification 1 (a) which shows the lower part one side of the left side view of the game board in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board, and the game board in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part one part of the left side view of. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power-on of FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is powered on, following FIG. 76; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric motorized item control processing which are executed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for a type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning a prize opening opening-and-closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd inlet-port opening-and-closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and the common_motor_effects control process which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a time chart which shows the modification of behavior of a pachinko machine at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine during setting change of setting value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine during confirmation display of setting value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in confirmation display of setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the wrongdoing while changing the setting of the setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraudulent act while confirming display of setting value. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the command at the time of the power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the game information command at the time of the power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the case where warning information is extended and performed after the end of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows a case where initial operation of a production member is performed after an end of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the monitoring state of the fraudulent activity in the setting change of a setting value, and the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And the game board 5 having the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit. In addition, what is comprised from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called front frame.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 is an outer frame connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20 which are separated left and right and extending vertically and the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20. Outer frame lower portion 40 connecting lower ends of upper portion 30, outer frame left portion 10 and outer frame right portion 20, outer frame upper hinge portion 50 attached to upper surface left end of outer frame upper portion 30, outer An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the frame left portion 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40 is provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 make the main frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4 and the main body frame The lower hinge portion 320 and the lower hinge portion 320 are rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable / closable forward with a left side in a front view as a center.

  The door frame 3 has a game window 201 for closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game ball B is driven in a visible manner from the front side, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 140, and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached by the main frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4 and the lower main frame portion hinge portion 320 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box opened forward. The main body frame 4 is provided with a game board attachment portion 301 for holding the game board 5 detachably from the front, a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 provided at the upper end on the left in front view, and a main body provided at the lower end on the left A frame lower hinge portion 320, a ball emitting device 330 provided on the right below the gaming board mounting portion 301 and for striking the gaming ball B into the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, an upper tray 130 and a lower tray A dispensing device 350 for dispensing the game ball B to 140, an outer frame 2 and a body frame 4, and a locking unit 360 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

  The body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the body frame 4 are attached to the outer frame 2 openably and closably by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60, and a door not shown The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close through the frame upper hinge portion and the door frame lower hinge portion.

  The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main unit frame 4. Although the game board 5 is not shown, a general winning opening for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the gaming balls B, a first start opening , A gate unit, a second starting opening, and a special winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically as illustrated, and the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20. Outer frame upper portion 30, outer frame lower portion 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left portion 10 and outer frame right portion 20, and outer frame upper hinge attached to upper surface left end of outer frame upper portion 30 The outer frame lower hinge portion 60 is provided at the lower portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left portion 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40.

  The outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 can coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[3. Door frame]
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 has a game window 201 closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven so as to be visible from the front, and a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. A plate 130 and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a are provided. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided with various decoration parts. Some of the various decorative parts do not have any decorative plating, but some have decorative plating on the entire surface. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may intrude.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a metal door frame in a door frame base unit of the door frame 3 to be described later via a wiring (not shown), among the various decorative portions, for which decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back. The conductive member is made of metal directly, although some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). Some are attached and electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit. Thus, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered into the various decorative parts can be transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various grounds of the decorative parts provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground.

  In addition, when the electromagnetic wave noise which penetrated into what the decoration plating is given to the front and back whole surface among various decoration parts is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via the wiring which is not illustrated, the door frame metal earth mentioned later It is transmitted to the frame earth substrate 559 through the wire, and transmitted from the frame earth substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island equipment earth wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit is the frame ground on the door frame side.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) having a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically and a portion from the lower end to a height of about 1⁄4 of the total height. A door frame lower unit 100 provided, a door frame upper unit 200 provided on the upper side of the door frame lower unit 100 and on the front surface of the door frame base unit, a body frame upper hinge portion 310 of the body frame 4 A door frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion (not shown) rotatably supported on the main frame lower hinge portion 320 in a rotatable and detachable manner are provided.

  The door frame base unit has a door frame base (not shown) having a game window 201 which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape in front view extends vertically, and the rear side of the door frame base A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the rear end right end of the lower part, a door frame sub relay board (not shown) attached to the left rear view of the door frame main relay board, and a door frame sub relay board Rear door relay board (not shown) attached to the left in the rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) that covers the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side It has a handle back relay board cover (not shown) that covers the substrate from the rear side, and a cable cover (not shown) that covers a wiring cable (not shown).

  Further, the door frame base unit includes a metal frame-like door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base and a metal door frame (not shown) attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. The hinge assembly and the door frame lower hinge member, and the metal cylinder lock 127 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit are provided.

  The door frame reinforcing unit reinforces the door frame base to provide rigidity by being attached to the rear side of the door frame base. The door frame upper hinge assembly and the door frame lower hinge member are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 127 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 360 of the body frame 4.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, and the frame ground board 559 and the electricity are provided via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). Connected. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire (not shown).

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 has a handle 111 which can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 which is bulging forward, and a bulging portion 120. An upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the game area for storing game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a; a lower dish 140 provided below the upper plate 130 for storing game balls B; A door frame effect device 150 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion for presenting a predetermined effect to the player, and a game ball B provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 in the upper plate 130 , The ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and the door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126. Provided on the front of the display unit 185 and the bulging unit 120 It includes a lower front speaker 191, a being.

  The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 is a transparent closed glass in which the inner circumference makes the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 visible from the front, the game window 201 having an inverted U shape and the game window 201 closed. 205, a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided along the inner periphery of the game window 201, a door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210, a door frame A door frame upper outer periphery decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 230 ing.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a ball feeding unit (not shown) for sending the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 one by one to the ball launching device 330 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 18) controlled by the launch control unit 372 of the payout control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13 and the like. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. Fig.12 (a) is a perspective view which shows the state which moved the 1st movable part of the door-frame effect apparatus to the rising end, (b) moved the rendering operation part to the rising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view which shows a state. FIG. 13 (a) is an enlarged front view around the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grill, the grille decoration frame, and the lattice decoration in a removed state. .

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is disposed below the game window 201 which closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided in the lower right corner in front view, and is at the handle unit 110 which can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, and above and to the left of the handle unit 110. And a bulging portion 120 bulging forward with respect to a surface closing the front surface of the main body frame 4.

  In addition, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and the upper tray 130 for storing the game balls B, and the center in the horizontal direction below the upper tray 130 A door frame effect device provided on the lower side for storing game balls B and provided in the device arranging portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, which can be provided further to the left side and can present a predetermined effect to the player And 150, a door frame sub display portion 185 provided in the upper right corner in a front view, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120.

3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 rotatably supports the handle 111, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 which can be gripped and rotated by the player. And the handle base 113. In addition, the handle unit 110 is provided in the handle base 113, and the handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 18) for detecting the turning angle of the handle 111 and the fact that the player is touching the handle 111. A handle touch sensor 115 to be detected, a handle return spring (not shown) urging the handle 111 in a counterclockwise direction, and a one-shot button 116 that can be pressed by the player.

  The handle unit 110 is inclined such that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it goes forward. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 111 of the handle unit 110, and can perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 can be extended and contracted in the direction in which the rotation axis of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired extended and contracted position. Thereby, since the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, the handle 111 can be operated at a position where the player can easily operate.

  The handle 111 is supported by the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angular range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions which are separated in the circumferential direction and project from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 has translucency, and can be decorated with various colors by means of a plurality of full color LEDs disposed behind.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 111. In accordance with the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 which is changed by the rotation operation of the handle 111, the driving force of the launch solenoid 331 in the ball launch device 330 described later changes, and the gaming ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111 or the like. When the player contacts the handle 111 or the like, the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like changes. Therefore, whether or not the player is touching the handle 111 is detected by detecting the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like by the handle touch sensor. Detect In the present embodiment, when the handle 111 is detected while the handle touch sensor 115 detects a player's touch, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. The driving of the shooting solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

  That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 in some way without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 111 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  When the player presses the single-shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 while the handle 111 is being rotated, the launch control section 372 of the payout control board 370 causes the drive of the launch solenoid 331 to be stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 111. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 116, it is possible to hit the gaming ball B into the gaming area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 116 is operated.

[3-1 b. Bulging part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T-like shape with a short axis extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a shape in a plan view has a rear end side in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 It is formed in an equal leg trapezoidal shape in which the width becomes narrower toward the front with a full width length (see FIG. 10 and the like). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward slightly longer than a half length of the full width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so as to be positioned downward as it goes forward.

  In the bulging portion 120, in the left and right direction, the central portion obtained by dividing the full width of the door frame 3 into three halves bulging forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3 Of the part of the door frame 3 bulges forward to about one third of the entire height from the lower end of the door frame 3 to the upper surface. Thus, the shape of the bulging portion 120 in a front view is T-shaped. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker attachment port 120a that is squarely opened at a lower portion at the center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment port 120a.

  Further, the bulging portion 120 is a sound emission slit 120b and a heat radiation slit extending vertically on the left and right side surfaces of a portion extending in the vertical direction in the front view T-shape (a portion where the speaker attachment port 120a is opened). 120c are provided. The sound emission slit 120b is for emitting the sound from the lower front speaker 191 described later to the outside. In addition, the heat release slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first lifting drive motor 175b, the second lifting drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191 and the like in the door frame effect device 150 described later to the outside.

  The bulging portion 120 is a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 provided at the upper end edge in the front surface, a bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 provided at the lower end edge in the front surface, and a rear end at the center in the horizontal direction in the upper surface A device arranging portion 123 provided so as to project forward from the side, an upper plate ball removing button 124 provided on the upper surface and releasing the gaming ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140, and an upper plate ball A ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the removal button 124 are provided.

  The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the bulging part lower decoration part 122 are milky white with translucency, and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 extends along the upper end edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and is provided to decorate the upper front edge of the upper plate 130 described above. The bulging part upper decorative part 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a inside (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121 a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121. The plurality of LEDs 121a are full color LEDs.

  In the bulging part upper decoration part 121, the space between the two rear ends separated in the left and right direction is the upper part separated in the left and right direction in the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door frame upper unit 200 described later. It corresponds to the distance between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is formed to coincide with the upper inner decorative portion 212 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration with the upper inner decorative portion 212. There is. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, together with the upper inner decorative portion 212, constitutes a first circumferential light area LA1 for emitting and decorating the periphery of the game window 201.

  In addition, the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 decorates the upper side of the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper tray 130. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a is irradiated to the inside of the upper plate 130 (the inside of the storage area 131), and the game stored in the storage area 131 Light can be emitted to the sphere B to cause light emission decoration.

  The bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower end edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120. The bulging part lower decoration part 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a inside (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122 a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulge portion lower decorative portion 122. The plurality of LEDs 122a are full color LEDs.

  The device placement portion 123 is formed in a shape in plan view as a combination of a rectangle long in left and right and an isosceles trapezoid whose front side is the base. The width of the device placement portion 123 in the left-right direction on the rear end side is about half the entire width of the door frame 3. The device placement portion 123 is open at the top on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a container shape extending from the top to the inside of the bulging portion 120.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 124 is provided on the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper plate 130. The upper bowl ball extraction button 124 can discharge the gaming ball B stored in the upper tray 130 from the delivery port 136 to the lower tray 140 by pressing downward. The upper ball ball extraction button 124 releases the gaming ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140 only while pressing, and when the pressing is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state. The release to the lower plate 140 is stopped.

  The upper countering ball extraction button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper bowling ball extraction button 124 has a light emitting decorative part 124 a that emits light by an LED disposed below. The light emitting decorative portion 124 a is disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 124. By making the light emitting decorative portion 124 a emit light, it is possible to make the light emitting decoration of the upper-plate flash button 124.

  The ball lending button 125 is disposed on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 behind the upper countersinking button 124. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is disposed to the right of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The return button 126 is formed in an equilateral triangle.

  The ball lending button 125 inserts a cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes a predetermined number of game balls B by pushing it. The game ball B is supplied to the tray 130 and the gaming ball B is lent to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash inserted into the ball lending machine and the prepaid card are deducted and returned from the loaned game ball B. The remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub display unit 185.

[3-1 c. Upper plate]
The upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and has a storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored. The storage area 131 is mutually connected by a front area 131a on the front side of the apparatus arranging section 123 (a part surrounded by a dashed dotted line in FIG. 15) and the front area 131a and side areas 131b on the left and right outside of the apparatus arranging section 123. (A part surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

  The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side area 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower as it goes from the rear end side to the front area 131a in the front. The right side region 131b extends in the left-right direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes wider as going from the front region 131a on the front end side to the middle to the rear, and then in the front-rear direction It extends. The upper tray 130 (storage area 131) is formed so as to surround the front side of the device placement portion 123 and the left and right outer sides.

  The upper plate 130 has a bottom wall 132 forming a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132 134, a supply port 135 opened forward at the rear end of the left side area 131b, a delivery port 136 open frontward at the rear end of the right side area 131b, and a delivery port 136 And an alignment portion 137 for aligning the gaming ball B toward the outlet 136.

  The bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 is inclined so as to be lower from the supply port 135 to the delivery port 136. The front circumferential wall 134 and the rear circumferential wall 133 rise substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear circumferential wall 133, and the front circumferential wall 134 are mirror-like. The upper plate 130 forms a storage area 131 by the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper plate 130 (the height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the gaming ball B even at the shallowest portion (near the supply port 135).

  The supply port 135 is for supplying the gaming ball B paid out from the payout device 350 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for delivering the gaming ball B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 330 or the lower tray 140. The alignment portion 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 becomes lower toward the delivery port 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device placement portion 123 combining the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view ing.

  Further, the upper plate 130 includes a stored light emitting decoration 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138 a capable of emitting light toward the inside of the storage area 131. The plurality of LEDs 138a of the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, at a height above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 and substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. It is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By making the LED 138 a of the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 emit light, it is possible to light emitting decorate the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 or in the storage area 131.

  The upper plate 130 is provided with the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the front end side of the storage area 131 is raised by the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121. The game ball B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the light from the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is also The game ball B in the storage area 131 is decorated with light emission.

  The upper tray 130 has a front area 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is disposed, and side areas 131b on the left and right outer sides, and the door area effect device 150 by the front area 131a. Since the game balls B can be stored on the front side more than the front side, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily viewed from the player. Further, in the upper tray 130, the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a are areas extending in the front and back direction, so in addition to the front area 131a, the game balls B stored in the side area 131b are also , And can be easily viewed from the player side.

  Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen, and the player can be alerted to the storage amount of the game ball B, so that the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is progressed by the progress of the game. The player can easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount even if the storage amount is reduced, and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130, so the player does not notice It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper tray 130 and to prevent sudden discontinuation of the game, prevent discouragement of the player by discontinuation of the game, and reduce the interest for the player's game It can be suppressed.

  Further, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and in the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so the player looks at the door frame effect below the game area 5a. It is possible to immediately recognize the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the front area 131a simply by dropping it to the device 150, and the player need not carefully check the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the upper tray 130. It is possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside of the storage area 131 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the plate 130 is consumed, the game ball B will flow in front of the eyes (the front area 131a) to make it easy for the player to recognize the consumption speed, consumption amount, etc. of the game ball B. Thus, the above-mentioned effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, the upper plate 130 is provided with a stored light emitting decoration 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131, and since light from the stored light emitting decoration 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B, storage is performed. The game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be lighted and decorated by the light from the light emission decoration portion 138, and the light emission decoration of the game ball B can be enjoyed for the player. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the gaming ball B stored in the upper tray 130, and the storage amount of the gaming ball B in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed to exhibit the same function and effect as described above. it can.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear circumferential wall 133, the front circumferential wall 134, etc. are formed into a mirror surface, so that the gaming ball B stored in the upper plate 130 is the upper plate. Since the game ball B is stored in the other side of the peripheral wall to the player because it moves to the peripheral wall of 130, it is possible to make an illusion that the game ball B is stored in the other side of the peripheral wall. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet 136 to align the gaming balls B, so clogging of the gaming ball B in the vicinity of the outlet 136 can be prevented. The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launcher 330 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, the interruption of the game due to the clogging of the game ball B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and can suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the upper tray 130, since the delivery port 136 disposed in the right side area 131b can be viewed from the front, the game ball B can not be viewed from the delivery port 136 which can not be viewed with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to watch the situation of being sent out, to be able to surprise the player, to be able to attract the player's interest strongly, and to achieve the same effects as described above.

[3-1 d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and on the left side of the front bulging central portion of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a shallow plate shape opened upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left portion of the bulging portion 120) so that the player's hand can be inserted. The lower plate 140 has a front surface formed in substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in a plan view.

  The lower plate 140 is formed at the lowermost portion of the bottom wall, and can be opened and closed in the lower plate 140 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 141 (see FIG. 9) and the lower plate ball extraction hole 141. There is a lower ball extraction button 142 for discharging the gaming ball B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 18) for detecting that the lower tray 140 is full with the gaming ball B. doing.

  In the lower tray 140, the game balls B in the upper tray 130 are supplied by the operation of the upper tray ball extraction button 124. The lower plate 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 350 in a state where the game balls B are full in the upper plate 130. When the lower plate 140 is filled with the game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower plate 140 is full, and when the lower plate 140 is full, the game balls B by the payout device 350 are detected. Payout is temporarily suspended. Thereafter, when the full tank in the lower tray 140 is canceled (the full tank detection sensor 143 is not detected), the pause of the payout is canceled.

  The lower ball ball extraction button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower plate 140, and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower ball extraction button 142 is pressed backward, the lower ball extraction hole 141 is opened, and the lower ball extraction button 142 is held in a pressed state. In this state, when the lower ball extraction button 142 is further pushed backward, the lower ball extraction hole 141 is closed, and the lower ball extraction button 142 is moved forward to return to the original state.

  The lower ball ball extraction button 142 has a light emission decoration portion 142 a that emits light by an LED (not shown). The light emitting decorative portion 142 a is disposed so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower ball ball extraction button 142. By making the light emitting decorative portion 142 a emit light, it is possible to make the lower plate flash button 142 emit light and decorate. For example, at the time of a "big hit" game in which a large number of gaming balls B are paid out, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the lower plate 140 by making the lower plate sphere extraction button 142 emit light by the light emission decoration portion 142a. The game ball B in the lower plate 140 can be discharged to the lower dollar box or the like by operating the lower plate ball extraction button 142, the lower plate 140 becomes full, and the payout of the game ball B is suspended. Can be avoided.

[3-1 e. Overall configuration of door frame effect device]
The door frame effect device 150 is disposed in the device placement portion 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 closing the device placement portion 123 opened upward, and a door frame effect display device 152 provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151; A lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152, a first movable part 155 provided in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so that the upper surface thereof can be lifted and lowered above the device cover 151, One movable portion 155 is provided so as to be able to move up and down, and a player can perform a pressing operation on the effect operation portion 160, a first lifting mechanism 170 that moves the first movable portion 155 up and down, and a second lifting mechanism that moves the effect operating portion 160 up and down And a mechanism 180.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The shape of the device cover 151 in plan view is formed in the same shape as the device placement portion 123, in a shape combining a long square in the left and right, and an isosceles trapezoid whose front side is the base. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is largely opened in the equal leg trapezoidal shape at the isosceles trapezoidal site, and an inclined portion that is bent and inclined so that the rear end side is upward near the center in the front-rear direction It has a surface portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape in the vicinity of the front end of the square portion. The device cover 151 is entirely inclined so that the front end side is lower. The first movable portion 155 is inserted into the opening 151 a of the device cover 151.

  In the device cover 151, the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151 b matches the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. In addition, the device cover 151 is inclined so that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b is lower toward the front. Thereby, even if the gaming ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can be rolled forward and released into the upper tray 130.

[3-1 e-2. Door Frame Effect Display Device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a rectangular shape long in the left and right direction, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than half of the full width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state such that the lower side is positioned forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed to the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is positioned at a height near the upper end of the lower portion 100 of the door frame, and the lower side is positioned at a lower level than the bottom surface of the front area 131 a in the upper tray 130. The upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is located near the rear end of the lower door frame unit 100 (apparatus cover 151), and the lower side is located near the front end of the inclined surface 151b of the apparatus cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16: 9.

[3-1 e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the lower speaker base 153b on which the pair of lower speakers 153a, the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and the lower speaker base 153b. And a lower speaker decoration portion 153c for decorating between the outer peripheral and lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153 a is a tweeter that outputs high-range sound.

  The lower speaker base 153 b has a front surface inclined so that the rear side is positioned upward with respect to the front side, and a rear surface extending downward from the rear side of the front to the front side, It is formed in the shape of a long container opened to the left and right. In the lower speaker base 153b, circular mounting holes are formed on the front side so as to be separated to the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at an angle smaller than the inclination angle from the horizontal of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11 and the like).

  The lower speaker decorative portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and a plurality of annular portions disposed on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of the lower speakers 153a. And an arc-shaped portion. The lower speaker decorative portion 153 c has translucency, and can emit light by emitting an LED mounted on the lower speaker decorative substrate (not shown).

  The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the inside of the lower speaker base 153 b so that the pair of lower speakers 153 a faces forward from the attachment hole of the lower speaker base 153 b. Thus, the pair of lower speakers 153 a is directed to the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the vertical center of the door frame effect display device 152, and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. There is.

  Further, the lower speaker unit 153 is positioned such that the front end is closer to the front than the rear end of the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 (slightly backward from the rendering operation unit 160), and the rear end is the front end of the inclined surface 151 b of the device cover 151. It is located near. The lower speaker unit 153 can be viewed through the transparent device cover 151. Further, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be favorably radiated to the outside (outside of the pachinko machine 1) through the grille hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grille hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156.

  In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 is configured to emit and decorate the lower speaker decorative portion 153c with the LED of the lower speaker decorative substrate (not shown), whereby the speaker grille of the lower speaker 153a and the lower speaker 153a (apparatus cover 151 and first movable portion main body A light emitting decoration between the light emitting device and the upper wall (156) can be displayed, and the light emitting decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines, can be shown to the player.

[3-1 e-4. First movable part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a container-like transparent first movable portion main body 156 opened rearward and downward, a first movable portion base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, and A first movable portion cover 158 attached to the upper surface of the first movable portion main body 156 and a first movable portion decorative substrate 159 attached to the inner side of the first movable portion main body 156 (FIG. 11). And Figure 12). The first movable portion 155 is disposed at the opening 151 a of the device cover 151. The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first lifting mechanism 170 so as to be capable of lifting and lowering, and is lifted and lowered by the first lifting mechanism 170.

  The first movable portion main body 156 has a shape in plan view similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the apparatus cover 151, and is a combination of a long square on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the square as the base. It is formed in shape. The first movable portion main body 156 is open at the rear and the lower with an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid and a side wall extending downward from a side of the upper wall excluding the rear side. It is formed in the shape of a container. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is low, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is high.

  The first movable portion main body 156 has a plurality of grilles penetrating in a hexagonal shape at a portion excluding the opening 156a which is long in the shape of a rectangular square penetrating in the left and right near the front end of the upper wall and the opening 156a of the upper wall A hole 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c arranged in a circumferential direction in the side wall and penetrating in a rectangular shape are provided. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156 c is formed in a size such that the LED 159 a mounted on the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 faces the outside.

  The first movable portion base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape long in the left and right. The width of the first movable portion base 157 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 such that the front end thereof is at substantially the same position as the front end of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 in the front-rear direction. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 in a horizontal state. On the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157, the pair of elevation sliders 172 of the first elevation mechanism 170 are attached, and on the upper surface, the second elevation base 181 of the second elevation mechanism 180 is attached.

  The outer shape of the first movable portion cover 158 is formed in the same shape and size as the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion cover 158 is a horizontally long rectangular opening frame portion 158a corresponding to the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b extending in the left and right direction and separated in the front and rear direction ,have. The first movable portion cover 158 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 protrudes downward more than the lower end of the louver portion 158b, and is inserted into the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The effect operation unit 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame portion 158a.

  The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 extends with a constant width except for both end portions in the left-right direction, and is formed in a triangular shape such that both end portions in the left-right direction obliquely extend forward. . The plurality of (five in this case) louver portions 158 b are provided in the front-rear direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored between the louver portions 158 b. Incidentally, one game ball B is provided between the first louver parts 158b, two game balls B are provided between the second louver parts 158b, and the third louver parts 158b are provided. In the meantime, three game balls B can be stored respectively (see FIG. 15).

  The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 has a plurality of LEDs 159a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 159 a are disposed at positions corresponding to the through holes 156 c of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156, so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through hole 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 is a full color LED.

  When the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 causes the LED 159a to emit light in a state (normal state) in which the first movable portion 155 is lowered, the first peripheral portion 133 of the upper tray 130 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 The upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be illuminated and decorated through the gap. In addition, when the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 causes the LED 159a to emit light in a state in which the first movable portion 155 is lifted, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated. Light can be emitted forward (to the player).

[3-1e-5. Production operation section]
The effect operation unit 160 is a so-called push button provided so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155 and capable of being pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 160 is supported by the second lift mechanism 180 so as to be able to move up and down, and is moved up and down by the second lift mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The effect operation unit 160 is an operation that is disposed below the press operation unit 161 having the light transmission property, in which the characters “PUSH” are formed on the upper surface, and the press operation unit 161, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface An operation unit movable base 163 to which a part decoration substrate 162, a pressing operation unit 161 and an operation unit decoration substrate 162 are attached on the upper surface, and an operation unit movable base 163 are supported so as to be movable up and down. The operation unit base 164 attached to the first movable unit 155 via the (second lift base 181), the operation unit spring urging the operation unit movable base 163 upward, and the urging force of the operation unit spring And a pressure detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 18) for detecting the pressure operation unit 161 moved downward.

  The pressing operation unit 161 is a rectangular shape which is long in the left and right direction, and the characters “PUSH” are formed on the upper surface in a relief shape. The pressing operation portion 161 has an outer peripheral shape slightly smaller than the inside of the frame of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 are full color LEDs. The operation unit decoration substrate 162 has a first LED for emitting light upward and a second LED for emitting light outward along the upper surface of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 mounted on the upper surface. The operation unit decoration substrate 162 can emit light and decorate the pressing operation unit 161 (the characters “PUSH”) by causing the first LED to emit light. In addition, by making the second LED emit light, the peripheral wall of the operation portion movable base 163 can be decorated with light emission, and the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 can be It can be decorated to emit light.

  The operation portion movable base 163 is formed in a box shape long in the left and right open at the lower side. The operation portion movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer periphery of the pressing operation portion 161. A pressing operation unit 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation unit decoration substrate 162. The operation unit base 164 is inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 from below.

  The operation unit base 164 has a size that can be inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 and has a box-shaped portion that is open at the top and the left open from the box-shaped portion to the same position as the outer periphery of the operation unit movable base 163 And an outwardly projecting flange-like portion. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so as to be able to move up and down within a predetermined range. The second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 164.

  The upper end of the operation spring is in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation portion movable base 163, and the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation portion base 164. The pressure detection sensor 165 is attached to the inside of the operation unit base 164, and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163 to press the pressing operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect

[3-1e-6. 1st lifting mechanism]
The first lifting mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 as shown in FIG. The first elevating mechanism 170 is a pair of elevating rails 171 mounted on the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to be laterally separated and extending vertically and a pair of elevating rails each guided by the pair of elevating rails 171 A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 connecting the pair of lifting sliders 172, and one end thereof is rotatably attached to the lifting slider 172, and the other end is rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120. A pair of lift arms 174 in the form of a circle, a first lift drive mechanism 175 for rotating the pair of lift arms 174 respectively, and a first lift detection sensor 176 for detecting the lift position of the lift slider 172 (first movable portion 155); Is equipped.

  The pair of elevator rails 171 are separated left and right at intervals longer than the length in the left-right direction of the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161). The pair of lifting rails 171 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. The upper ends of the pair of lift sliders 172 are attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155, and the lower ends of the pair of elevation sliders 172 are attached to the connecting portion 173.

  The pair of lift arms 174 are rotatably attached to the corresponding lift sliders 172 so that their front end sides can rotate about an axis extending in the left-right direction and slidably mounted in the longitudinal direction of the lift arms 174. . Further, the pair of lifting arms 174 is rotatably attached at its rear end side to the bulging portion 120 about an axis extending in the left-right direction. The pair of lift arms 174 each have a longitudinally extending slit 174a at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

  The first lifting and lowering drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of lifting and lowering arms 174. That is, the first lift drive mechanism 175 is provided in a pair. The first lifting mechanism 170 rotates the pair of lifting arms 174 in the direction in which the front end sides of the pair of lifting arms 174 move upward by the first lifting drive mechanism 175, thereby the tips of the pair of lifting arms 174 The first movable portion 155 (rendering operation portion 160) can be raised and lowered via the pair of lift sliders 172 attached respectively.

  More specifically, the first lifting and lowering drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174 a of the lifting and lowering arm 174, and revolves around a laterally extending axis. It has pin 175a and the 1st raising / lowering drive motor 175b which revolves the 1st raising / lowering pin 175a. More specifically, the first lifting and lowering drive mechanism 175 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and extends in the lateral direction to a flat drive base 175c extending in the longitudinal and vertical directions and to the drive base 175c. A spur gear-like elevation gear 175d is mounted rotatably around an axis and eccentrically attached to the rotation axis, and engaged with the elevation gear 175d. And a drive gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of the first elevation drive motor 175b.

  In the present embodiment, two first elevation drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and a drive gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of each first elevation drive motor 175b is attached to the elevation gear 175d. They are engaged with each other. That is, one elevating gear 175 d is rotated by the two first elevating drive motors 175 b.

  The first elevation drive mechanism 175 rotates the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotation shafts of the two first elevation drive motors 175b in the same direction, and the elevation gears meshed with the respective drive gears 175e. While 175 d rotates, the first raising and lowering pins 175 a revolve around the axis of the raising and lowering gear 175 d. As the first lifting pin 175a revolves, the first lifting pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the lifting arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, and the lifting arm 174 is on the rear end side It will rotate (turn) around the Thus, the front end side of the lift arm 174 moves in the vertical direction, so that the first movable portion 155 can be raised and lowered via the lift slider 172 to which the front end side of the lift arm 174 is attached.

  The first elevation detection sensor 176 is in a detection state when the pair of elevation sliders 172 is positioned at the downward moving end (lower end). That is, the first elevation detection sensor 176 detects that the first movable portion 155 is positioned at the lowering end via the elevation slider 172.

[3-1e-7. Second lift mechanism]
The second lift mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155, and supports the operation portion base 164 of the effect operation portion 160 so as to be able to move up and down; A second elevation drive motor 182 attached to the second elevation base 181, and a second elevation pin 183 attached to the rotation shaft of the second elevation drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft An elevation transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction in which the second elevation pin 183 is slidably inserted, and an upper portion of which is attached to the operation unit base 164; And a second elevation detection sensor 180a for detecting elevation of the object.

  The second elevation base 181 of the second elevation mechanism 180 is a direction in which the operation unit base 164 extends in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (an inclined axial line extending forward as going upward) Supports vertically).

  In the second lifting mechanism 180, when the second lifting pin 183 is revolved by the second lifting drive motor 182, the second lifting pin 183 slides in the slit 184a of the lifting transmission piece 184, and the inner surface of the slit 184a is raised and lowered. By pressing in the direction, the lifting transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction. Since the operation unit base 164 of the effect operation unit 160 is attached to the elevation transmission piece 184, the effect operation unit 160 can be raised and lowered via the elevation transmission piece 184.

  In the second elevating mechanism 180, the second elevating pin 183 is positioned near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction when the elevating transmission piece 184 (rendering operation unit 160) is positioned at the lowering end There is. That is, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. When raising and lowering the elevation transfer piece 184 from this state, the second elevation pin 183 is revolved by the second elevation drive motor 182 so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second lift pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, and the second lift pin 183 pushes the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, and the lift transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

  When the second lifting pin 183 further revolves, and the line connecting the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the revolving center passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second lifting pin 183 raises the inner surface of the slit 184a. It slides in the inside of the slit 184a toward the back, pressing it. Then, when the second lift pin 183 reaches near the rear end of the slit 184a, the drive of the second lift drive motor 182 is stopped, and the revolution of the second lift pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the lifting transmission piece 184 is located at the rising end.

  When the force for moving the lift transmission piece 184 downward acts by pressing the production operation portion 160 or the like while the lift transmission piece 184 (rendering operation portion 160) is positioned at the rising end, Since the second lift pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the front-rear direction acts on the second lift pin 183. Accordingly, since the second lift pin 183 does not revolve, the lift transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

  Further, when the effect operating unit 160 is pressed in a state in which the lifting and lowering transmission piece 184 is positioned at the rising end, the player located in front of the effect operating unit 160 operates the effect operating unit 160. In addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts. On the other hand, since the second lifting pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a in the state of the rising end, even if a backward movement vector acts on the second lifting pin 183 via the slit 184a, The second lifting pin 183 abuts on the rear end of the slit 184a to prevent the second lifting pin 183 from revolving, and the lifting transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the rendering operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end position. It can be maintained.

  The second elevation detection sensor 180a is in the detection state when the second elevation base 181 is located at the lower moving end (lower end). That is, the second elevation detection sensor 180 a detects that the effect operation unit 160 is positioned at the lowering end via the second elevation base 181.

[3-1 f. Door frame sub display section]
The door frame sub display unit 185 is disposed to the right of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150, behind the top bowl ball extraction button 124, the ball rental button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub display unit 185 is configured of three seven-segment LEDs arranged side by side. The door frame sub display unit 185 is provided in an inclined state such that the lower end side is positioned forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub display unit 185 is disposed at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper bowling ball extraction button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 protrude.

  The door frame sub display unit 185 covers the frame-like sub display portion decoration frame 186 for emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the three square 7 segment LEDs, and covers the three 7 segment LEDs and the sub display portion decoration frame 186. And a transparent sub display cover 187 which is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface 151b of the device cover 151.

[3-1 g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 has a lower front speaker 191 attached to the rear of the speaker attachment opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grill holes penetrating through the speaker attachment opening 120a. The lower front speaker grill 192 for closing the frame, the horizontal lattice-like grille decoration frame 193 disposed in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 and attached to the front of the bulging portion 120, and each lattice in the grille decoration frame 193 A rod-like lattice decoration 194 arranged on the rear side of the unit and a lattice decoration LED 195 provided on both ends of each lattice decoration 194 and emitting and decorating the lattice decoration 194 are provided.

  The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs sounds in the low frequency range. The lower front speaker grill 192 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is a punching metal.

  The grille decoration frame 193 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. A plurality of grille decorative frames 193 are arranged by connecting a rectangular frame along the inner periphery of the speaker attachment opening 120a of the bulging part 120 and two sides extending vertically in the frame and separating them vertically from each other. And the grid part of The grid portion extending to the left and right of the grille decoration frame 193 has a portion (general portion) excluding both end portions in the left and right direction extending with a constant width, and both end portions in the left and right direction are inclined downward toward the end portion It is formed in the trapezoidal shape extended by a fixed width after spreading.

  The lattice decoration part 194 has translucency, and is formed in a cylindrical shape long to the left and right. Both ends in the left-right direction of the lattice decoration portion 194 are positioned behind the trapezoidal portion of the lattice portion in the grille decoration frame 193, and the remaining portions are positioned below the general portion of the lattice portion. Thereby, the lattice decoration part 194 can visually recognize the site | part except the both ends from the front. The plurality of lattice decoration parts 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

  The lower front speaker unit 190 can output low range (low frequency) sounds among the output sounds by the lower front speaker 191. The lower front speaker unit 190 applies sound pressure to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 since the lower front speaker unit 190 faces the front from the front of the bulging portion 120 which is bulging forward. It can be done. In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can emit light and decorate the lattice decoration portion 194 by appropriately emitting the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195, and the inside of the grille decoration frame 193 via the lattice decoration portion 194 (lower front speaker The front side of the grill 192 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1 h. Cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) and cooperates with the locking unit 360 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. It is used for opening and closing locking with 4. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front and rear direction, a metal keyhole 128 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a keyhole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmitting member (not shown) which rotates with the rotation of a regular metal key.

  The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 penetrates from the rear to the front end of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front end. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) open at the rear, and is opposed to the central axis between the rear end and the front It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, a metal transmission cylinder (not shown) of the metal locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the key hole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the rotation transmitting member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 is in contact with the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the body frame 4 in a state where the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 And the lock unit 360 are electrically connected.

  When the cylinder lock 127 opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 3, a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like is made of regular metal. The key is inserted into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively). When a clerk at a game hall or the like inserts an authorized metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, the electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic charging by itself is made via the authorized metal key. Therefore, it is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not disposed around the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent the penetration of electromagnetic noise.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Subsequently, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and 14. Fig.14 (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of a door frame, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part in (a). The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 is a game window 201 which allows the inside of the game area 5 a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be visible from the front when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. And a door frame upper unit base 202 formed in an inverted U shape whose outer periphery is a rectangular shape having a vertically outer periphery in the front view and an inner periphery to be the game window 201 opened downward, and a door frame upper unit base 202 And a transparent closing glass 205 closing the reverse U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

  In addition, the door frame upper unit 200 is a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided in a strip shape along the reverse U-shaped inner periphery of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202; A door frame covering a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided on the front of the base 202 and outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 An upper outer decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in a gate shape opened downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer periphery is vertically elongated in a front view, and is formed in an inverted U shape whose inner periphery is opened downward. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the game area 5 a of the game board 5 disposed behind.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . This closed glass 205 prevents the game ball B from dropping forward from inside the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4. For the front of the The closing glass 205 is a transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and protrudes forward along a wall upper upper base 211 and an upper inner base 211. A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration 212 extending at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner provided behind the upper inner decoration 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front And a decorative substrate 213.

  The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U-shape in a front view. In the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions in the inverted U-shape extend vertically in the vertical direction, and a portion extending in a semicircular arc in the inverted U-shape extends upward. It curves to project forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be opaque. The distance in the left-right direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 is the same as the distance between the rear ends of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100 that are separated to the left and right of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121.

  The upper inner decorative portion 212 is translucent and milky white, and formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decorative substrate 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface are arranged along the upper inner decorative portion 212. The plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative substrate 213 are full color LEDs. By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative substrate 213, the upper inner decorative portion 212 can be made to emit light.

  The door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 matches the rear end of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 The upper inner decoration 212 and the bulging upper decoration 121 form one continuous decoration.

  A first ambient light area LA1 (in FIG. 16, surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) in which the light emitting decoration of the periphery of the game window 201 is performed with the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Part)). Further, since the upper inner decorative portion 212 is formed to be milky white, the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a can be reduced and emitted outward, so the gaming window surrounded by the upper inner decorative portion 212 It is possible to prevent the inside of the screen 201 from being obscured by glare, and the game area 5a can be viewed in a good state from the front through the game window 201.

[3-2 d. Door frame upper outside decoration unit]
The rear end of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 and protrudes forward, and has a plurality of protruding bases 221 spaced apart in the vertical direction. The upper outer top decoration 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, the upper outer valley decoration 223 respectively disposed between the protruding bases 221, and the rear of the upper outer top decoration 222 And a top outer valley LED 225 disposed behind the top outer valley decoration 223.

  The projecting base 221 is formed in an isosceles triangle in a side view. The projecting base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202 and is formed to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The projecting base 221 has the front end projecting forward to a position substantially the same as the front end of the contacting portion of the upper inner base 211.

  The plurality of upper outer top decorative portions 222 are formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the upper outer decoration portion 222 is formed to be about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the upper inner decoration portion 212. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length of the provided protruding base 221 in the left-right direction. These upper outer top decoration parts 222 have translucency.

  The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is a portion (vertical surface portion) extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and the lower surface or upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper side or lower side of the portion And a portion (inclined portion) obliquely extending to the vicinity of the front end of the protruding base 221 along the The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a mirror-like plated layer on the surface (front surface). In the upper outer valley decorative portion 223, a square opening is formed at a portion extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 disposed at the rear faces forward. ing.

  The upper outer top LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high brightness full color LED.

  The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can emit light and decorate the upper outer top decoration portion 222 by appropriately emitting the upper outer top LED 224. In addition, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can emit light and decorate the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 by appropriately emitting the upper outer valley LED 225, and the upper outer top decorative portion 222 which is separated in the vertical direction. It can brighten the space between them.

  A second ambient light area LA2 which illuminates and decorates the outside of the first ambient light area LA1 around the game window 201 with the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 (FIG. 16) In the region enclosed by a two-dot chain line). Further, the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 have the front end located behind the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer outer It is possible to prevent the inside of the game window 201 from being obscured by glare even if the valley decoration portion 223 is lighted and decorated, and it is possible to visually recognize the game area 5a from the front through the game window 201.

[3-2e. Door frame upper rim decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged along the outer peripheral edges (right and left sides and upper sides) of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 A door frame upper cover 232 attached to the edge and covering the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220, and opaque decorative portions 233 provided on both left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full color LEDs.

  The door frame upper cover 232 connects a pair of side walls extending forward from portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202 and upper sides of the pair of side walls, and near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202 It consists of an upper wall extending forward from the region, and a front wall connecting the front side of the pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is formed in a box shape with the rear and lower side open. It is done. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely formed to be transparent.

  The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the upper inner decoration 212 so that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper inner decoration 212. Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 vertically extends from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the inverted U-shaped straight extending portion in the game window 201, from which the door frame upper unit base 202 It is curved and extends in an arc shape so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. Further, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved in the direction in which the portions curved in an arc shape upward as they move upward move closer to each other.

  The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker attachment openings 232a to which the grille decoration frame 243 and the like of the upper speaker unit 240 are attached at the left and right corners of the upper portion of the front wall.

  The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer side surface of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. In the opaque decorative portion 233, a slit 233a extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the same height as the protruding base 221 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233 a of the opaque decorative portion 233.

  The door frame upper outer periphery decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 with a door frame upper cover 232 so as to be visible from the front. In addition, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 causes the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 to emit light appropriately, so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (side wall and upper wall respectively) And the front end of the light emitting decoration.

  In addition, since the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 has the opaque decorative portions 233 on the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 It is possible to prevent other players sitting in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to the machine 1 from being irradiated.

  A plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 (front edge outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 emit light and decorate the outside of the second circumferential light area LA2 around the game window 201 A portion enclosed by a broken line in FIG. Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 are disposed on the front of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 Since the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, the inside of the game window 201 remains even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light. It is prevented that it becomes difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state from the front through the game window 201.

[3-2 f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 closes the speaker attachment ports 232 a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of the upper speakers 241 attached near the left and right corners of the front upper part of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the respective upper speakers 241. An upper speaker grille (not shown), a grille decoration frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grille and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same as the lattice parts in the grille decoration frame 243 A rod-like lattice decoration 244 arranged at a distance behind the upper speaker grille, and a lattice decoration LED 245 provided at the lateral end of each lattice decoration 244 for emitting and decorating the lattice decoration (see FIG. 14)).

  The upper speakers 241 are attached obliquely so as to be directed slightly downward at the center of the door frame upper unit 200 in the left-right direction. The upper speaker 241 is attached to the rear of the adjacent upper outer top decoration 222 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full range speaker that outputs the sound of the whole range from low to high. The upper speaker grille is attached to the inside of the door frame upper cover 232 (the rear surface of the front wall). The upper speaker grill is punching metal.

  The grille decoration frame 243 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grille decorative frame 243 is disposed so as to connect a frame portion shaped along the inner periphery of the speaker attachment port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and two sides extending vertically of the frame portion and vertically separate from each other. And a plurality of grid parts. The grid portion extending to the left and right of the grille decoration frame 243 has a portion (general portion) excluding the end portion on the outside in the left and right direction of the door frame 3 extending with a constant width. Is formed into a trapezoidal shape extending with a constant width after being obliquely extended downward toward the end.

  The lattice decoration portion 244 has translucency, and is formed in a cylindrical shape long in the left and right. The lattice decoration 244 can be viewed from the front through the upper speaker grille. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full color LED.

  The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can emit light and decorate the lattice decoration portion 244 by appropriately emitting the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245, and the inside of the grille decoration frame 243 via the lattice decoration portion 244 (the upper speaker grille The rear side can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, the upper outer top decoration portion 222 disposed in the upper speaker grill (the grill decoration frame 243) is located in front of the upper speaker 241 in a front view. That is, between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille, the lattice decoration 244 capable of emitting light and the upper outer decoration 222 are disposed. Thus, when the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the lattice decoration portion 244 are lighted and decorated, it is possible to show the player the effect that the inner side of the speaker grille is lighted and decorated, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Then, the whole structure of the door frame 3 is demonstrated in detail with reference to FIG. 5 thru | or FIG. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the lower door frame unit showing a state in which gaming balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a peripheral light region in the door frame. With the front of the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 makes it possible to view most of the front including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the main body frame 4 through the game window 201 be able to. Further, the front side of the game board 5 (the game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

  In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16 and the like, the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 are annularly connected, and in the ring, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, and A game window 201 or the like is disposed. In other words, the upper tray 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 (first circumferential light area LA1). Furthermore, the outer side of the upper inner decoration 212 is surrounded by the upper outer top decoration 222 and the upper outer valley decoration 223 (second circumferential light area LA2) and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third circumferential light area LA3). There is. That is, the game window 201 is triplely surrounded by three period light regions of the first period light region LA1, the second period light region LA2, and the third period light region LA3.

  In the door frame 3, the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 is formed to surround the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the gaming ball B supplied from the supply port 135 is of the bulging portion 120. It flows along the front end edge and is delivered from the delivery port 136 to the outside (the lower plate 140 or the ball launcher 330).

  In the door frame 3, in the normal state, the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150 and the effect operation portion 160 are respectively positioned at the downward moving end (lower end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable unit main body 156.

  The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 over the entire length. The upper end of the wall storing the gaming balls B in the upper tray 130 is raised by the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. The upper end of the front side (front area 131a side) of the bulging part upper decorative part 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable part 155) in the normal state. Thereby, when the inside of the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B will overflow to the door frame effect producing device 150 side, and the upper plates 130 are full of the game balls B for the player. Of the game balls B from the upper plate 130 can be suppressed.

  As for the door frame 3, the upper surface ball pulling out button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are integrated at the right corner on the right side of the upper plate 130 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The surface on which the upper ball ball extraction button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, and It inclines to become lower toward the head. Thereby, when the game ball B is placed on the surface provided with the upper ball and ball withdrawal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126, the game ball B by the surface and the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 Can be rolled to the upper tray 130 side and discharged into the upper tray 130.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the bottom wall 132 constituting the upper plate 130, the rear circumferential wall 133, and the surface of the front circumferential wall 134 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) are formed in a mirror surface shape. The game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are moved to the inner surface of the upper plate 130, so that the game balls B shown are visible, thereby making it possible to illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. As well as being able to, the volume of the upper tray 130 can appear to be large.

  The door frame 3 enters the front area 131a after the gaming ball B supplied from the supply port 135 first rolls forward in the left side area 131b in the upper tray 130, and enters the front area 131a. Roll inside to the right. Then, the player enters the flow of gaming balls B which is sent out from the sending port 136 after entering the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a and rolling backward in the right side area 131b. (See Figure 15). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player on the front side than the door frame effect producing device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be visually recognized well. The storage amount of the game ball B can be easily confirmed.

  Further, in the door frame 3, since the outlet 136 is provided at the rear end of the right side area 131b in the upper tray 130 where the gaming ball B rolls backward, the player 136 can visually recognize the outlet 136 it can. In this way, it is possible to show the player how the game ball B is sent to the ball firing device 330 from the delivery port 136 (upper plate 130), which can not be viewed with conventional pachinko machines.

  The door frame 3 can visually recognize the pair of lower speakers 153a through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, and can visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 approaches the upper end of the lower door frame unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, since the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are in a close state, an effect image in which the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. Can be displayed.

  In the door frame effect display device 152 disposed behind the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 positions the lower side lower than the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160, and the upper side is the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160. The upper portion of the door frame effect display device 152 is higher than the effect operation unit 160. Thereby, the door frame effect display device from the player side even if the door frame effect display device 152 is made to approach the effect operation unit 160 as compared with the case where the entire door frame effect display device 152 is lowered than the effect operation unit 160. 152 can be made easier to see. In addition, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of bulging of the bulging portion 120 to the front can be suppressed. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling, and it is possible to enjoy the game in a comfortable state for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a door disposed diagonally so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (the range between two one-dot chain lines in FIG. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, the effect operation unit 160 can be seen near the lower outer edge of the door frame effect display device 152 when the player sees the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image that decorates the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation unit 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and the effect operation unit can be changed by changing the effect image. The decoration of 160 can be changed variously, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 3, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 can be seen in the vicinity of the effect operation portion 160, the effect operation portion can be displayed without displaying the image of the effect operation portion 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. Since it is possible to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 160 by displaying an image such as an arrow or a hand directed to 160, it is possible to immediately turn the line of sight of the player to the effect operation unit 160. The operation timing of the effect operation unit 160 can be made less likely to be delayed, and the player can enjoy the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 160 to suppress the decrease in the interest.

  In the normal state, the door frame 3 has the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 forward by the lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240 (the player side It is difficult to see from).

[3-4. Measures against electromagnetic noise from door frames]
Next, noise measures for the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame base unit (not shown) in the form of a rectangular frame whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. As described above, this door frame base unit is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the rear side of the door frame base (not shown) having the game window 201 penetrating therethrough. A metal frame-like door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the metal frame cylinder opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit is provided. As described above, the door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, and the main frame through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown) It is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 provided for the fourth. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit is the frame ground on the door frame side. The frame ground board 559 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall, and the island facility of the game hall is connected via an island facility ground line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the earth of the

  As described above, in the various decorative parts provided in the door frame 3, there are some in which no decorative plating is applied at all, and in others, in which decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via the door frame reinforcing unit and a wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). There is. Therefore, for example, when the player touches the decorative portion on which the decorative plating is performed, the static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit through the decorative portion as electromagnetic noise. It is guided from the door frame reinforcing unit to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island facility ground wire (not shown).

  In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 contacts the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4. For example, when opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while an attendant such as a game clerk in the game hall closes the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, for example, A staff member of a game hall clerk or a person who holds a setting key to be described later (a limited person who can confirm the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value) When the lock unit 360 in the box is touched, the static electricity charged by the person in charge of the game hall clerk or the person holding the setting key described later electrostatically discharges and possesses the person in charge of the person in charge of the game hall clerk etc. Who do It is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via this locking unit 360, and from the door frame reinforcing unit to the earth of the island facility of the game hall via the door frame metal ground wire not shown, the frame ground board 559 and the island facility ground wire not shown. It is guided and eliminated.

[3-5. Lighting production of door frame]
Next, the light emission effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 is formed of an upper plate 130, a door frame effect device 150, a game window 201, etc. in a milky white column shape, and a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and an upper inner decorative portion 212 (first circumferential light It is surrounded by the area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative portion 212 are arranged in a line in the extending direction. Thus, the periphery of the game window 201 or the like can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 121 a and the LEDs 213 a. At this time, when the plurality of LEDs 121 a and the LEDs 213 a are made to emit light in order, it is possible to show the player such a light emission effect that the light circulates around the game window 201.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 (second circumferential light area LA2) disposed outside the upper inner decoration portion 212, the upper outer top LED 224 By making the upper outer valley decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 emit light by using the upper outer valley LED 225, the outer side of the first circumferential light area LA1 can be lit and decorated, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect to make the light emission decoration.

  The plurality of upper outer apex decorative portions 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so that light emission effects such as a level meter can be shown to the player by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction. . For example, when a chance comes, etc., it is possible to show the player the expected value for the game as a level meter or to the player as a sound meter matched to the output music.

  Further, since the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is formed in a mirror-like shape, by making the upper outer valley LED 225 emit light, the space between the upper outer top decorative portions 222 is brightened more strongly than the upper inner decorative portion 212. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect that can be made to attract the player's interest strongly.

  The door frame 3 is provided with a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in the outer edge row of the door frame upper unit base 202. Therefore, by making the upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light, it is possible to view with the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the outer edge (third circumferential light area LA3) of the door frame 3 which was not present emits light.

  And since the door frame 3 has triple ambient light areas of the first ambient light area LA1, the second ambient light area LA2, and the third ambient light area LA3 outside the gaming window 201, respectively. By appropriately emitting the ambient light region, various effects such as light emission effects such as moving around the game window 201, light emission effects such as going from the outside to the game window 201, light emission effects such as going outward from the game window 201, etc. It is possible to show the player a bright light effect.

  In the door frame 3, the lattice decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the lattice decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are appropriately lighted to emit the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grille decoration frame 193 and the grille It is possible for the player to emit light and decorate the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the decoration frame 243 and make the grille decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out It can be shown to

  Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decoration portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the plurality of upper outer apex LEDs 224, and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LED 225 By emitting light from the upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 located at the rear of the upper speaker grille, the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker 241 between the pair of lower speakers 153 a and the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 The light emitting decoration can be made between the upper speaker grille, and the player can be made to show the light emission effect which can not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine in which the light emitting decoration between the speaker and the speaker grille is not possible.

  Further, in the door frame 3, since the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is provided with the plurality of LEDs 138 a of the stored light emitting decorative portion 138, the plurality of LEDs 138 a emits light to store the upper tray 130 and the upper tray 130. The game ball B being lit can be decorated with light emission. For example, in a state where gaming balls B are not stored in the upper tray 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a are made to emit light, and the inner surface of the upper tray 130 is formed in a mirror surface. It is possible to show the player the luminous effect to be decorated for light emission, and the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 glares brightly with respect to the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play a game, the interest in the pachinko machine 1 Can be attracted strongly.

  Since the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided above the half wall of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130, a plurality of the game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. The light is emitted to the upper half side of the game ball B, and the light is reflected upward, so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 has a luminous effect such as sparkling light Can be shown to

  Note that when the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is made to emit light, a part of the light is also irradiated into the upper plate 130. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the stored game ball B emits and decorates.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes the light emission decoration portion 124 a surrounding the periphery of the upper plate ball extraction button 124 and the light emission decoration portion 142 a surrounding the periphery of the lower plate ball extraction button 142, By making the light emitting decorative portion 124 a of the round ball extraction button 124 and the light emitting decoration portion 142 a of the lower round ball extraction button 142 emit light, the upper round ball extraction button 124 and the lower round ball extraction button 142 can be lighted and decorated. Therefore, when many game balls B are paid out, such as during a "big hit" game, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140 can be used as the game balls B by making the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 emit light. It is possible to show a light emission effect that urges the player to operate the upper bowl ball extraction button 124 and the lower bowl ball extraction button 142 so as to prevent the player from being full.

  Thus, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can show various light emission effects to the player, and by combining them appropriately, effects can be more colorfully presented to the player, and the player While making it difficult for the player to get bored.

[3-6. Effect of door frame effect device]
Next, the effects of the door frame effect device 150 of the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect device, and FIG. 17B is a result operation portion by the effect image of the door frame effect display device It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of decoration, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production by the presentation image of a door-frame effect display apparatus, and the movable presentation of a presentation operation part.

  In the door frame effect device 150, in the normal state, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 are respectively located at the lower moving end (lowering end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable unit main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operating unit 160 can be pressed.

  In the normal state, when the first LED of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 emits light and decorates. In addition, when the second LED of the operation part decoration board 162 is made to emit light in the normal state, the light emission effect in which the opening frame part 158a of the first movable part cover 158 surrounding the outside of the pressing operation part 161 is decorated Can be shown to With these light emission effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player participation type effect operating the pressing operation unit 161 by urging the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161. It can be made easy to

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light in the normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 and the first movable portion main body 156 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 The light can be decorated between. That is, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is lighted and decorated.

  In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is emitted to the player through the grille hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grille hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. The player can be made to hear an acoustic effect in which the sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161). Thereby, the sound from the lower speaker 153a can attract the player's interest to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player is urged to press the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. It can be made easy to participate in the player participation type effect.

  Moreover, the door-frame effect device 150 can visually recognize the door-frame effect display device 152 from the player side in a good state through the device cover 151 in a normal state, and is displayed on the door-frame effect display device 152 The player can be entertained by the effect image (see FIG. 17A and the like).

  The door frame effect device 150 revolves the first lift pins 175 a by the four first lift drive motors 175 b of the first lift mechanism 170 in a normal state, thereby interposing the pair of lift arms 174 and lift sliders 172. The player can be shown a movable effect in which the first movable portion 155 moves to the upward moving end (rising end) together with the effect operation unit 160. As a result, the first movable portion 155 pops up with the effect operation unit 160, so it is possible to surprise the player and strongly urge the player to press the pressing operation unit 161. At the same time, as the first movable portion 155 is raised, it can make the player think that something is good or not, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the state in which the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12A, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 is visible from the player side. In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 are made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 emits light. Therefore, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while emitting and decorating the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156, the first movable portion 155 plays the effect of rising from the light It can be shown to the player and can give a strong impact to the player.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light in a state in which the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, the gaming ball B in which part of the light is stored in the upper tray 130 Since the light is emitted, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that causes the gaming balls B stored in the upper plate 130 to be sparkled also by the plurality of LEDs 159a, and the same operation effects as those described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first raising and lowering drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotation in small increments. It can be done. As a result, when the player touches the first movable portion 155 or the rendering operation portion 160 while the first movable portion 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. In addition, when the first movable portion 155 is vibrated at the timing of pressing operation of the rendering operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), the operation feeling of the press operation can be changed by making it heavy or light, and the player Can entertain you.

  Furthermore, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 move upward, so that the plurality of grill holes 156b The volume of the space between the lower speaker 153a and the lower speaker 153a is increased. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grille hole 156b changes, so that the natural vibration of the portion changes, and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes, The player can hear an acoustic effect in which the timbre of the sound radiated to the player is changed through the grille holes 156b.

  Further, from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the upper portion of the first movable portion 155 is the display of the door frame effect display device 152. Looks like it covers the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable portion 155. The rise of the movable portion 155 can be noticed, and the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  At this time, the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image for lifting the first movable portion 155 by a predetermined character, an effect image for lifting the predetermined character by raising the first movable portion 155, etc. Is displayed, it is possible to show the player the collaboration effect by the movable effect of the first movable portion 155 and the effect image, and the player can be enjoyed to a great extent.

  In addition, when the second lifting pin 183 is revolved by the second lifting drive motor 182 of the second lifting mechanism 180 in a normal state, the door frame rendering device 150 causes the rendering operation unit 160 to be upward through the lifting transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player the movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end) of. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operating unit 160 protrudes upward more than the upper surface of the first movable unit 155, so the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit 161. While the player can strongly urge the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161, and the rising of the pressing operation unit 161 makes the player think that something may be good for the player It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game.

  When the rendering operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12B, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 on the lower side of the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 emits and decorates. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while making the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the effect operation unit 160 emit light and decoration, the effect such that the effect operation unit 160 rises from the light Can be shown to the player, and the player can have a strong impact.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 160 can be moved up and down by the second lifting drive motor 182, it is possible to vibrate the rendering operation unit 160 by repeating the forward and reverse rotation in small increments of the second lifting drive motor 182. . Thus, when the player touches the effect operating unit 160 while the effect operating unit 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, when the effect operation unit 160 is vibrated at the timing of pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), the operation feeling of the press operation can be changed by making it heavy or light, and the player can be changed. It can be entertaining.

  Further, from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the upper portion of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed on the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152. It looks like it covers the bottom of the. As a result, when the rendering operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, a part of the rendering image displayed on the door frame rendering display device 152 is blocked by the rendering operation unit 160. Can be noticed, and the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  At this time, the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 17B) that decorates the surroundings of the effect operation unit 160, an effect such as lifting the effect operation unit 160 with a predetermined character By displaying an image, an effect image (see FIG. 17C) in which a predetermined character is lifted by the elevation of the effect operation unit 160, etc., a collaboration effect by the movable effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect image Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  This effect operation unit 160 can be moved to the rising end when the first movable portion 155 is at the falling end, and can also be raised at the rising end when the first movable portion 155 is at the rising end (FIG. 12 (b)) State of). For example, after moving the first movable portion 155 from the lower end to the upper end, the player moves the effect operation portion 160 to two stages by moving the effect operation portion 160 from the lower end to the upper end. It can be shown to As a result, since the effect operating unit 160 ascends in two steps, when the player operates the effect operating unit 160, the "big hit" game is started (the special lottery result is strongly thought to be "big hit"). As a result, the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 160 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  As described above, since the door frame effect device 150 can present various effects such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participation type effect, the sound effect, etc. as described above to the player, By combining them appropriately, effects can be presented to the player in more various ways, making it difficult for the player to get bored and entertaining the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is disposed on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5 a where the game is played. Since the upper tray 130 having the storage area 131 of the game ball B surrounding the device placement portion 123 is provided by the front region 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 and the side regions 131b on the left and right sides, The game ball B is stored on the front side of the door-frame effect device 150 by the area 131a, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. Further, since the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a are areas extending back and forth, in addition to the front area 131a, the game balls B stored in the side area 131b are also from the player side It can be made easily visible.

  Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen, and the player can be alerted to the storage amount of the game ball B, so that the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is progressed by the progress of the game. The player can easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount even if the storage amount is reduced, and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130, so the player does not notice It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper tray 130 and to prevent sudden discontinuation of the game, prevent discouragement of the player by discontinuation of the game, and reduce the interest for the player's game It can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player looks at the door frame effect below the game area 5a It is possible to immediately recognize the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the front area 131a simply by dropping it to the device 150, and the player need not carefully check the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the upper tray 130. It is possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is disposed on the left side of the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a and the delivery port 136 is disposed on the opposite right side, the front area 131a is fed from the supply port 135. It will be provided on the way to the outlet 136, and the gaming ball B supplied into the storage area 131 from the supply port 135 will be sent out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a. If the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is consumed by playing the game, the game ball B will flow in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and the consumption speed, consumption amount, etc. of the game ball B to the player Can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Furthermore, since the supply port 135 is disposed on the left side of the left and right outer side regions 131b of the device placement portion 123 and the delivery port 136 is disposed on the right side, between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 in the left-right direction Since the left and right direction of the storage area 131 is also increased, the storage amount of the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be increased. Therefore, since many game balls B can be stored in the upper plate 130, the player can play a game without worrying about the storage amount of the game balls B, and the player can concentrate on the game. Game can be enjoyed more easily, and the player can instantly recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a simply by dropping the gaze from the game area 5a to the door frame effect device 150 below. It is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130, and it becomes possible to facilitate the player to concentrate on the game, thereby making the game fun and reducing interest. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, a storage light emitting decoration 138 is provided for irradiating light from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper plate 130 to the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 above the half of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. Since the light from the LED 138a of the stored light emission decoration 138 is irradiated to a portion above the half of the game ball B stored in the 131, the light from the stored light emission decoration 138 by the game ball B Can be reflected upward. Therefore, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be lighted and decorated by the light from the stored light emission decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light emission decoration of the game ball B. And the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the stored amount of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is confirmed to obtain the same function / effect as the above. Can play.

  Further, since the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decorative unit 138 to emit light. While being able to show the player the light emission decoration which can not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to surprise the player and to turn the player's attention to the upper plate 130 (storage area 131), It is possible to cause the player to check the storage amount of the game balls B, and to reliably achieve the above-described effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed into a mirror-like shape, the light from the stored light emitting decoration 138 or the light from the stored light emitting decoration 138 reflected by the game ball B By reflecting on the inner surface, it is possible to further increase the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the storage light emission decoration portion 138, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 to align the gaming balls B, clogging of the gaming ball B can be prevented in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 and stored in the upper tray 130. The game ball B that is being played can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launcher 330 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, the interruption of the game due to the clogging of the game ball B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and can suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the delivery port 136 disposed in the side area 131b of the upper tray 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is delivered from the delivery port 136 which could not be viewed with conventional pachinko machines While being able to watch the situation, it is possible to surprise the player, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

  In addition, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 where the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the device arrangement portion 123, the game ball B is provided on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device arrangement portion 123. Therefore, even if it rolls on the front side, it falls into the front area 131a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from falling from the bulging portion 120 to the front.

  Further, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, etc. are formed into a mirror surface, the gaming ball B stored in the upper tray 130 is the upper plate 130. The game ball can be illusive as if the game ball B is stored in the other side of the peripheral wall to the player, so that many balls B appear to be stored in the upper plate 130. Can.

  Further, since the storage light emission decoration portion 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131 is provided, the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 or the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface of the plate 130, it is possible to further increase the sparkling feeling in the storage area 131 by the storage light emission decoration portion 138, and to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame effect device 150 is disposed in the device arranging portion 123 of the bulging portion 120, the effect by the door frame effect device 150 can entertain the player, and suppresses the decrease in interest for the player's game. It can be done.

  In the above embodiment, the front area 131a in front of the device placement unit 123 (the door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device placement unit 123 are used as the storage region 131 for storing the game balls B in the upper tray 130. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a front region in front of the device placement portion 123 and one side region on the left side of the device placement portion 123, It may be configured with a back region behind the device placement unit 123. Alternatively, the front area 131a at the front of the device arranging portion 123, two side regions 131b at the left and right sides of the device arranging portion 123, and the back region at the rear of the device arranging portion 123 (the device arranging portion 123 It is good also as what is provided in island shape in the upper plate 130). The back area of the storage area 131 may be in the form of a tunnel in which the game ball B can not be viewed from the player side. In addition, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

  In the above embodiment, although the upper plate 130 has a mirror-like inner surface, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may be non-mirror-like.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the storage light emission decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage light emission decoration portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134 You may

  In the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 is used to play a certain number of game balls B on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is inclined to be lower toward the upper plate 130, and the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is The game ball B may be rolled on the upper plate 130 so that the game ball B is not stored (not kept) on the upper surface of the door-frame rendering device 150.

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3) , It is for discharging the game ball B used for the game to the back (the island installation side of a game hall) of the pachinko machine 1, or.

[4-1. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 300 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at the rear and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 300 The main frame upper hinge portion 310 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Body frame lower hinge portion 320 attached to the lower end of the left side of the front view and rotatably mounted to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably mounted to the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3; Have.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 in a front view and reinforces the main body frame base unit 300, and a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 and a front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 300. A ball launcher 330 attached for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and reverse L attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 A character-shaped payout base unit 340, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 340 for dispensing the game ball B to the player side (the upper tray 130 and the lower tray 140), and a main frame base A power supply substrate 630 provided with a power switch 630 a mounted on the lower side surface of the unit 300 in a rear view and capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 A substrate unit 620 having a payout control substrate 633 and a plurality of slits 641 extending vertically and vertically through the front and back while covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 described later A back cover 640, a metal locking unit 360 attached to the right side surface of the main frame base unit 300 in a front view and locking between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4; It is equipped.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted in the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 to be described later moves forward and vertically to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 for restricting are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 described later of the main body frame base unit 300, and the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the inside (game board 5).

  The main unit frame base unit 300 of the main unit frame 4 is recessed backward from the upper end in the range of about 3/4 of the total height from the upper end in the front view, and the game board 5 is inserted detachably from the front side A mounting portion 301 is provided. The ball launcher 330 is attached to the front of the main body frame base unit 300 at a position lower than the game board attachment portion 301.

  In addition, a body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 4 is a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 is inserted. 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing of the door frame opening switch 4 a is released so that the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 has a main body frame open switch 4 b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame open switch 4 a It is attached. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing of the main body frame open switch 4 b is released and the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4 b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  The door frame open switch 4 a and the main body frame open switch 4 b open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 due to the electric signal input by the opening and closing operation by the locking unit 360, Instead of detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 separately, the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are detected independently of the opening and closing operation by the locking unit 360. ing. Further, the door cylinder opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b are not disposed around the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 is inserted so as not to be affected by the electromagnetic noise that has entered the cylinder lock 127. In the rear surface below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached and the door frame open switch 4a is attached below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached. A body frame opening switch 4b is disposed on the rear surface. As described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission line from the door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b does not receive the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The main body frame base unit 300 includes a main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted into the main body frame base 501 from the front side. The ruko is formed.

  The dispensing base unit 340 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side in a front view of the ball tank 552 and extending upward in the form of a groove and extending to the left in a front view, and a first rail cover attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stop attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 Material 557, an external terminal plate 558 disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the dispensing base 551, and not shown formed on the dispensing base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal board 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1) And a frame ground substrate 559 housed in the substrate housing portion. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame ground board 559 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall.

  The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and the gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. B. Payout device 350 for paying out one by one based on an instruction from payout control board 633, upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding gaming ball B which has passed through discharge device 350 downward, and upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The substrate unit 620 includes a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and a right side after a front view of the power supply unit 620c. It has a payout control unit 620d attached, and an interface unit 620e mounted on the left side after a front view of the power supply unit 620c.

  The base unit 620b includes a front base (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front base and the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface.

  The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear of the base unit 620b (not shown) and a power supply substrate cover 631 attached to the rear base so as to cover the rear of the power supply substrate 630. Have.

  The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped transparent payout control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the right side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c after the front view, and the payout control housed in the payout control substrate box 632 And a substrate 633. The delivery control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover and a transparent base. The payout control substrate 633 is accommodated in the payout control substrate box 632 and configured as a caulking case.

  Further, the payout control board 633 is provided with an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit which doubles as a plurality of functions, in addition to an error LED display (not shown) for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, a lead type one is adopted as the RWM clear button 633z, and the leads of the RWM clear button 633z are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z in a state where the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control substrate box 632 Can be operated by pressing.

  The RWM clear button 633z is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, a RAM incorporated in the payout control MPU, and a main control MPU as the microprocessor provided in the main control board for controlling the game content (progress of the game). Displayed on the error LED indicator, the function as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in the built-in RAM, the function as a setting switching button to select and switch the setting value, and It also has the function as an error release switch to release the error. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) related to the game specification is separate from the main control board that controls the game content (progress of the game) It is mounted on a payout control board 633 which is a board. Further, the separate substrate may not be the dispensing control substrate 633, and the substrate not accommodated in the substrate case, the substrate accommodated in the substrate case, and the substrate accommodated in the substrate case configured as a caulking case Is considered. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) is an important function as a gaming machine, it is desirable that security be high, and the board case is preferred to a board not accommodated in the board case. The substrate housed is higher in security, and the substrate with higher security is a substrate housed in a substrate case configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. Further, the main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents (progress of the game) is attached to the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as described later, while the payout control board 633 is a main body Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to the improvement of security.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the back side of the interface board 635 and the board base (not shown) mounted on the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620 c. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base.

  The interface board 635 is connected to one end of a connection cable from the body frame 4 side. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board for controlling the game content (progress of the game), a peripheral control board for controlling the progression of effects, etc. Connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the interface substrate 635 so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

  The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300. The back cover 640 is rotatably mounted on the right side end of the main frame base 501 on the right side in the front view on the right side in the front view, and the left side in the front view is the back cover attachment portion of the dispensing base 551 It is pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner at 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full tank passage unit 600. A lock screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover attachment portion 601 a of the upper full tank passage unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball passage unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a. The cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can be rotated approximately 180 degrees from a closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state opening the rear side of the game board 5.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side in the front view of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface thereof is substantially the same as the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state assembled to the main frame 4. It is formed to be located on the surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat dissipation slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The slits 641 are not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box described later attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

  By the way, the game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 come off the metal powder from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with one another and rubbing against each other. For this reason, when metal powder produced by abrasion of the gaming ball B adheres to the tank rail 553 in which the gaming ball B rolls in the downstream direction, the flow of the gaming ball B in the downstream direction is impeded. Thus, it becomes difficult to smoothly supply the gaming ball B toward the downstream side, and the payout of the gaming ball B by the payout device 350 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) Can be removed from the tank rail 553. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the tank rail 553 by falling naturally from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch 553 aa. The metal powder produced by the wear of the gaming ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 by the vibration of the gaming ball B rolling inside the 553 falls to the outside from the tank rail 553 through the notch portion 553aa. Powder can be removed from the inside of tank rail 553 and a metal powder produced by abrasion of game ball B attached to tank rail 553 by inserting a cotton swab into cutaway portion 553aa by a clerk of a game hall or the like The metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553 by removing the metal powder.

  In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, and the gaming balls B discharged from the pachinko machines 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and reassembled by the ball lifter. Since the ball tank 552 is supplied, the temperature in the island facility of the game hall is extremely high compared to the room temperature of the game hall. Therefore, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 includes various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to discharge the heat generated from the light emitting means such as to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 which are penetrated in the front and back direction and which extend vertically are formed. Further, since the back cover 640 is formed with the plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B dropped through the notch portion 553 aa of the tank rail 553 invades the back surface side of the game board 5 Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, it is possible to suppress the metal powder from invading the back side of the game board 5.

  In addition, inside the island facilities of the game hall, multiple types of wires for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the top, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 Accordingly, there are a wire electrically connected to external terminal plate 558 and a wire not electrically connected to external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring which is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 is not connected, and is suspended from the upper inside of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a plurality in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, this unconnected wiring is provided on the game board 5 various substrates, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps When a light emitting means such as a light source is touched, a short circuit may occur to cause breakage (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many are bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wire, and the tip of the unconnected wire is caught by the slit 641 and the gaming board 5 is further Since it is hard to infiltrate toward the back side, a short circuit can be prevented.

  Among the various substrates included in the game board 5, the substrates (except for the relay substrate such as a panel relay substrate 1410 described later) adjacent to the back cover 640 are molded with non-conductive resin that constitutes the substrate box Even if it is covered by the cover body and the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and contacts the cover body, the substrate covered with the cover body is not affected at all. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 to be described later is a board relaying one board to another board, and thus is an assembly of various connectors, and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors is It is not formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay substrate on which various connectors to be exposed to the back cover 640 are mounted, but is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay substrate opposite to the surface facing to the back cover 640 The predetermined color (for example, green, yellow, red, blue, black) except through holes where the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the relay substrate can be soldered by inserting pin terminals of various connectors. Etc.), and the wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color and not exposed. That is, even if the front end of the unconnected wiring intrudes into the back side of the game board 5 through the slits 641 and contacts the relay board, the relay board is not affected at all.

  As described above, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 is a protective cover that can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5. And heat from the light emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps provided with various substrates provided on the game board 5 by covering the back side of the game board 5, various motors and various solenoids, etc. The metal powder generated by the heat radiation function that can be released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 of the second embodiment and the wear of the game ball B dropped through the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is the back surface of the game board 5 Various types of boards, various motors and various solenos that the game board 5 is equipped with a metal powder intrusion suppression function that can suppress intrusion to the side and unconnected wiring hung from the inside of the island facility of the game hall Electrical driving source such as de, has a protective wall function that can prevent touching the light emitting means such as various LED and various lamps.

  The locking unit 360 includes a metal unit base (not shown) attached to the main body frame base 501, and a plurality of metal door frame notches (not shown) protruding forward from the unit base and engageable with the door frame 3. A metal transmission (not shown) vertically moving a plurality of metal outer frame weirs (not shown) protruding backward from the unit base and engageable with the outer frame 2 and a door frame weir or outer weir A metal lock spring (not shown) urging the cylinder downward, the door frame ridge downward and the outer frame ridge upward, and a metal not shown moving the outer frame ridge downward And an outer frame unlocking lever.

  The main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 300 in a front view is attached to the left side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 300 in a front view. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U-shape in which the right side in front view is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  The metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity, and via a body frame metal ground wire (not shown), It is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 described above. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire (not shown). A description will be given later on the point that the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to give rigidity.

[4-2. Measures against electromagnetic noise from the body frame]
Next, the noise countermeasure of the main body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the main body frame 4 is a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 300 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base unit 300. To the player side (upper tray 130 or lower tray 140) the game ball B received by the reverse L-shaped payout base unit 340 and the payout base unit 340 attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the It has a power supply substrate 630 provided with a payout unit 560 for payout and a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a substrate unit 620 having a payout control substrate 633, and the like.

  As described above, the main body frame base unit 300 is formed of a metal extrusion material and includes the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in a front view. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity, and via the main body frame metal ground wire not shown. It is electrically connected to the aforementioned frame ground board 559 provided on the main body frame 4. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 is a frame ground on the body frame side. Further, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 described above via a ball tank earth wire (not shown), which is a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom. Further, a not-shown ground connection terminal provided on the interface substrate 635 in the substrate unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 described above via an unshown interface ground wire. Further, a not-shown ground connection terminal provided on the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground substrate 559 via a not-shown power ground wire. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire (not shown).

  As described above, as measures against the noise of the main body frame 4, the electromagnetic wave noise that has invaded the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface substrate 635 in the substrate unit 620, and the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 respectively , Ball tank 552, interface substrate 635 in substrate unit 620, power supply substrate 630 in substrate unit 620, corresponding ground wire not shown, frame ground substrate 559, and island equipment in the game hall via island equipment ground wire not shown It is led to the earth and removed.

[4-3. Frame ground board]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall, and includes a plurality of ground terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground via the ground connection terminal provided on the interface substrate 635 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4 and an interface ground wire (not shown). The second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) is electrically connected as the island equipment ground via the ground connection terminal on the island equipment of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire (not shown). The terminal (ball tank ground terminal) is a ball tank ground, and one end of a ball tank ground wire (not shown) is attached by a metal screw (not shown) to a metal plate (not shown) arranged all over the bottom of ball tank 552 The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected, and the fourth The source terminal (main frame metal ground terminal) is a main frame metal earth wire not shown by a metal screw (not shown) on a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main frame base unit 300 of the main frame 4 as a main frame metal ground. One end is attached and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) serves as a power ground in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. The sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) is electrically connected via a ground connection terminal provided on the substrate 630 and a power ground wire (not shown), and the door frame 3 is illustrated as a door frame metal ground. Install one end of the door frame metal ground wire (not shown) with a metal screw (not shown) on the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit. Rutotomoni, the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is intended to be electrically connected.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor not shown, and the other end of the first resistor is used as a power ground And the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground, and the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground, respectively. The fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as the frame metal ground and the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor not shown. At the same time, the other end of this second resistor is the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as a power ground, and the second ground terminal as an island equipment ground (island equipment ground end ), And it is electrically connected to the first ground terminal (interface earth terminal) as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the first resistance and the second resistance.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground is the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is led to the ground and removed and flows to the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as the ball tank ground is through the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise which is led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed and flows to the fourth ground terminal (main frame metal ground terminal) as the main frame metal ground is the second ground terminal (island of the island facility ground). The equipment ground terminal), the island equipment ground wire is led to the ground of the game hall island equipment and removed, and the fifth as the power ground The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal (power supply ground terminal) is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground and the island equipment earth wire The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the sixth earth terminal (door frame metal earth) as the door frame metal earth is the game hall via the second earth terminal (island plant earth terminal) as the island plant earth and the island plant earth wire. It is led to the earth of the island facility and removed.

  The ball tank 552, the payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 340 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is polished at an island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and discharged electrostatically to release electromagnetic wave noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to collect, and as a result of the static electricity easily accumulating, the ball tank 552 and the payout are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. A third ground terminal (ball tank ground) as a ball tank ground in the frame ground board 559 with respect to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560 Terminal) and the fourth earth terminal (body frame metal earth terminal) as the body frame metal earth through the first resistor and the second resistor respectively by gradually flowing and attenuating the electromagnetic wave noise, and the moment of high voltage Discharge from the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire. And so that it can lead to ground Le island equipment. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated is from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground of a frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 also functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity.

  In addition, as described above, the various decorative portions provided in the door frame 3 may have decorative plating on the entire front and back. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. The decorative portion to which the decorative plating is applied is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit through the door frame reinforcing unit of the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 through wiring (not shown) or metal conduction plate (not shown) It is done. Therefore, for example, when the player touches the decorative portion on which the decorative plating is performed, the static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic wave noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion. In addition, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall or a person who holds a setting key to be described later (a limited person who can check the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value) When the locking unit 360 in the frame 4 is touched, as mentioned above, the static electricity charged in the staff of the game hall or the person holding the setting key to be described later discharges electrostatically, and the staff of the game hall staff as electromagnetic noise. Also, it is transmitted from the person who holds the setting key described later to the door frame reinforcing unit via the locking unit 360.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal earth) as the door frame metal earth is provided on the frame earth substrate 559 with respect to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3. Through the second resistor, the electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated to suppress high-voltage instantaneous discharge, and from the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground via the island equipment earth wire. Can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. In other words, the decorative part subjected to the decorative plating, the player, the clerk of the store clerk of the skill hall, or the person who holds the setting key described later (in addition to the change of the setting value, confirmation of the current setting value being set) The electromagnetic wave noise from the limited person who can do etc. is decorated by leading it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the door frame reinforcing unit as the frame ground of the frame ground. Persons in charge such as plated decorative parts, players, store clerks in the skill hall, and persons who possess setting keys to be described later (in addition to changing setting values, etc., check the current setting values being set, etc. The electromagnetic wave noise from the limited person who can do it can be removed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 18 to 25. FIG. 18 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 19 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 viewed from the front right, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from behind FIG. 22 is a schematic explanatory view of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 25 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the game panel or the like is transparent.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 has the game ball B accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second start opening 2004, the large opening 2005 etc in the game area 5a. In order to play the game, the player can play the game of entertaining the operation of hitting the handle 111 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 28 etc.) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 107 and 62 etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the upper left corner of the front component 1000; A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the gaming panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive substrate unit 1700 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 26 etc.) to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit according to a command from the panel control board 1510 relaying the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive substrate 1720 for driving the decorative substrate and the drive motor, and a drive substrate box 1730 accommodating the panel relay substrate 1710 and the panel drive substrate 1720 are provided. The drive substrate box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 in the rear side on the left side and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start opening 2004 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. A special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B is provided.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the starting opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and a starting which becomes the lower right corner in the front view of the game area 5a Attacker unit 2400 attached to the right in front view of mouth unit 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005, starting opening unit 2100 and side unit 2200 A frame which has a gate section 2003 attached to the upper side in the game area 5a and slightly above the center in the front view. And includes the center role object 2500, the.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a first starting opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received by the first starting opening 2002. Attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls B received at general winning openings 2001 provided for itself, and a second for detecting gaming balls B received at second starting opening 2004. A starting opening sensor 2402 and a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the special winning opening 2005 are provided. In addition, the center product 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism that acts improperly.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 further includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 62). See).

  Also, the back unit 3000 includes a back first rendering unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second rendering unit 3200 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back first rendering unit 3100. , The back third rendering unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second rendering unit 3200, and the front of the back second rendering unit 3200, the general of the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, and the game received in the general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2004, and big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 And a back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges the ball downward.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 26 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (the game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and the lower full ball path The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively, in the plurality of positioning holes formed in the round hole and the short long hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. And a plurality of engagement steps whose thickness is thin. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  In the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 26, the large opening 1112 for attaching the center character 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the gaming ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have narrow widths in which a plurality of game balls B can not be lined up.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch portion 1122 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion to lower The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank passage unit 610 are arranged to face forward.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed outside the holding step and a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding step and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 respectively. And the three engaging claws resiliently engaged with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 projecting upward from the lower outside of the holding step And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side of the housing. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from the front upper side, moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 backward, and inclines the upper side and the lower left By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is located with the engagement claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 24 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 capable of setting game performance, a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 And a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

  When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the gaming board 5 is viewed from behind, the main control board 1310 having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction is the left side of the cover of the main control board box 1320, The region surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side is formed so as to occupy an area of about 4/5 from the left side to the right side, and A square setting change substrate 1311 is disposed in the area of the corner portion where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

  As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the main frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 are arranged because the main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be able to be opened and closed forwardly centering on the left side in front view. The left side in the front view of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the pivot support side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side in the front view of the main body frame 4 opposite to this is the open side of the main body frame 4 Become. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4, The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the closing side).

  In addition, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. It is a thing. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. In addition, as described above, the back cover 640 is rotatably mounted on the right side end of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about the vertically extending axis, and the left side in the front surface is dispensed Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the right side in the front view is the pivoting side (closing side) of the back cover 640, The front side left side which is the opposite side to this is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the pivoting side (closing side) of the back cover 640. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the side.

  In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate 1310 are green resists, except for various land patterns. While the white of the color different from the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting substrate 1311 are white. It is coated with a resist except for various land patterns.

  Here, a point will be described in which a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320. The store manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, and the like, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the contents of the game and the payout of the game ball B, etc.) The awareness about is very high. For this reason, it is not necessary to distinguish and warn the point that this board is the main control board 1310 from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the gaming performance, although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it has importance in crime prevention. There is very little awareness of being a high substrate. Therefore, it should be noted that this board is the setting change board 1311 separately from the other boards.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a green color generally used as a resist of a substrate is adopted as a resist of the main control substrate 1310, and a white color different from the color adopted as a resist of the main control substrate 1310 as a resist of the setting change substrate 1311 is set. Adopted. As a result, among the substrates accommodated in the main control substrate box 1320, the setting change substrate 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control substrate 1310, and in addition to the main control substrate 1310, the setting change substrate 1311 also has high importance in crime prevention It can contribute to raising awareness about the point of being a substrate.

  In the above-described embodiment, a white color different from green employed as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, but the main control substrate 1310 and the setting change substrate 1311 may be distinguished. If possible, yellow, red, blue, and transparent may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a white color different from green employed as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, the white of the setting change substrate 1311 is used. White may be printed as silk printing so as to cover almost the entire surface (mounting surface) and / or back surface (solder surface), or silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow and red You may print it.

  Next, a main control board box 1320 accommodating the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the base body so as to be transparent by using a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not illegal modification is performed, Alternatively, it can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 whether or not the illegitimate IC is mounted. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, the main control board box 1320 In order to open the control substrate box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. A plurality of vent holes for heat radiation which can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air are formed in the cover body.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start opening sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second start opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032 are connected.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311 a that can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connecting between boards) (a connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness It may be electrically connected through (electrical wiring) The force accompanying the operation to the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (relaxed) by the harness (electric wiring) to cause the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Communication can be difficult). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The connector connection, which is an inter-substrate connection, includes a connection using a normal connector not having a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector having a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug in the socket, and when the socket is fitted with the plug, It has a structure in which there is no amount of movement in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector having a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug, and the socket is fitted with the plug At the time of fitting, it is possible to absorb an error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in a direction (for example, up and down direction) perpendicular to the insertion direction of the socket. It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector not having a floating mechanism is adopted as a connector connection which is an inter-substrate connection, but a special connector having a floating mechanism may be adopted.

  The setting change substrate 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side thereof being about one fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control substrate box 1320, and the upper edge thereof is the main control substrate 1310. The lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the main control substrate 1310, respectively.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is disposed at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction along the left side of the setting change substrate 1311, and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 is the main control substrate 1310. And a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311. A setting key switch 1311 a having a setting key cylinder which is inserted into a setting key and inserted into the center of the setting change board 1311 having a square shape and which is inserted into the center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions intersect is arranged. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) is disposed above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN. A setting indicator 1310 g consisting of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is disposed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310 h is arranged in a line of six lower seven-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dotted) from the center toward the right side.

  In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is vertically aligned In the position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot. Even if the main unit frame 4 is closed, the members of the other pachinko machines (or the members of the game hall island equipment) and the setting keys do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to be damaged.

  The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and turning it ON, and the signal of the setting key ON is the setting change board 1311 Are input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the corresponding main control board box 1320, but corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The wire intrusion preventing portion is molded to the cover body with respect to the opening so that the setting change substrate 1311 and the main control substrate 1310 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. It has a structured structure.

  In the setting key switch 1311a, a setting key cylinder whose rotation is operated by inserting the setting key is accommodated in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the metal cylindrical ( Alternatively, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (rectangular shape) is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. In a state in which the setting key cylinder is housed in a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, a state in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected It has become.

  The setting key switch 1311a is provided in the setting key cylinder with a circuit capable of extracting (outputting) as a signal which one of the state in which it is ON and the state in which it is OFF. The signal can be taken out (outputted) from a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. The circuit and the pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the setting key cylinder are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder, and the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is also electrically Are isolated.

  From the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a, a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a 90 degree rotation angle are provided for a predetermined length. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed. The set key switch 1311 a is changed by setting the setting key switch 1311 by soldering the pair of opposing mounting plate pieces through the long mounting holes formed in the setting change substrate 1311 and by soldering the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It can be fixed to the

  Further, as described above, an insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 in a state where the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320.

  By this, when the worker carries out the work of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, first, temporarily places it on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and its periphery Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and damaging it when the leg of the operator hits the game board 5 and falls over during the operation of the game board 5 temporarily placed. In addition, even when removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 temporarily placed is temporarily placed on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and around the pachinko machine 1. When the operator's leg accidentally falls over the game board 5 while working, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

  Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and can not be touched at all, the cover body is molded to be transparent as described above. The set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of spheres displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body.

  In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, setting is made as a wiring of a wiring pattern through which a signal of setting key ON of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and a wiring pattern through which a signal of OFF of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. The change boards 1311 are formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed apart Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting key switch 1311a OFF Wiring patterns in which signals are transmitted are close to each other. Of the wiring pattern to which signals from the RWM clear button 633z of the delivery control board 633 are transmitted are also kept away from each other (spaced apart from each other). Is formed.

  Here, the procedure for operating the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the support side (close side). When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640 as described above. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the pivoting side (closing side) of the back cover 640. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover open side of the back cover 640 is the pivoting side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, so the main body frame 4 is larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately If the back cover 640 does not open, the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 can not open the state of covering the back side of the game board 5. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311 a to operate the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 by a gap that can simply insert the arm. Even when trying to access the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311, the back cover 640 can not be opened. That is, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 first makes sure to the outer frame 2 to secure a space where the back cover 640 can open the state of covering the rear side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 to a large size (approximately 90 degrees).

  As described above, since the setting change substrate 1311 is disposed on the pivotally supported side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change substrate 1311 is compared to the case where the setting change substrate 1311 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4. If an unauthorized person attempting to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or wire, the open side of the main body frame 4 is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 Even if an incorrect tool is inserted and fed, it is necessary to feed the wrong tool deeply because the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long. As a result, since the operation time for sending an unauthorized tool to the setting key switch 1311a is also long, it is possible to make it easy for a clerk such as a game clerk to find such an unauthorized act.

  Further, since the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered by the back cover 640. There is. Thus, an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311 is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 using an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, and the main body frame Even if an incorrect tool is inserted and fed from the open side of 4), the incorrect tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. It can prevent inserting in the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of switch 1311a.

  In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311 is provided with a slot for inserting the setting key, and the slot of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a large size (approximately 90 degrees). By increasing the security of the access to the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 by carrying out such a plurality of operations, it is possible to increase the deterrence against the wrongdoing by the wrong tool.

  As described above, the back cover 640 is pivotally supported by the back cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 so as to open and close. The lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a to fix the back cover 640, and the lock screw 642 is also disposed on the open side of the back cover 640, thereby the main frame 4 It is arrange | positioned at the pivotal support side (closing side) of the main body frame 4 which becomes the opposite side to the open side of. Therefore, an unauthorized person who attempts to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an unauthorized tool from the open side of the main body frame 4 between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and Even if it is fed, since the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 is long, it is necessary to feed an incorrect tool deeply. Also in this point, since the operation time for sending an illegal tool to the lock screw 642 is also long, it is possible to make it easy for a clerk such as a game hall clerk to find such an illegal act, and a setting change board By increasing the security of the access to the setting key switch 1311 a of 1311, it is possible to increase the deterrence against the fraudulent act by the unauthorized tool.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed is accommodated together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320, and the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control substrate 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is disposed is accommodated in the payout control substrate box 632, and the payout control substrate box 632 is behind the power supply substrate cover 631 in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is attached to the side. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different substrates, and the target to which the substrate is attached is also different, thereby separating the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z. Can. In the case where the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one substrate, it is not preferable in view of crime prevention that only one substrate may be tampered with. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different substrates, and a target to which the substrate is attached is also different. The security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs control of game preparation and control of the game (following control of game preparation, performs control of the game). The control of the game preparation can be made in the changeable state of the set value based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 (step S14 in the main control side power on process described later) Determination, processing of step S16A), and a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) subsequent to the first step. And the second process (determination of step S216 in the setting change process described later, the process of step S218) capable of selecting and switching the setting value. Following the control of the game preparation, the control of the game is comprised of a main control side main process in the main control side power on process described later and a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Although it is possible to enhance such crime prevention, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different substrates, and by adopting a configuration in which objects to which the substrate is attached are also different, the setting key Since the switch 1311a is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, it is not necessary to convey where the setting key switch 1311a is disposed, but where the RWM clear button 633z doubles as a setting switching button. The staff of the game hall manager, the game hall clerk, and the like may be unfamiliar to what they are disposed, because they may be unfamiliar.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 has a description as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, on the cover of the main control board box 1320, a seal that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached. This seal is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, the red translucent character (height: 7 mm) is printed as "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the dispensing control board". ing. In this way, the placement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) can be notified to the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, and the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, etc. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated, eyes can be saved by easily finding the RWM clear button 633z. Therefore, the whereabouts of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Note that, even if this seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320, it does not interfere with the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, in place of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this seal, symbols such as arrows may be used.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, the main control When molding the cover of the substrate box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover and characters may be integrally molded) . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but in place of this, setting change Characters (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting change button) is on the payout control substrate” may be printed as white on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311 as silk printing, or the payout control substrate 633 A character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be printed in white on the surface (mounting surface) as silk printing. The color of silk printing may be the same or different. Also, instead of silk-printed characters, symbols such as arrows may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but in place of this, setting change Mask the characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311 and remove the characters (height: 7 mm) as "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the dispensing control substrate". The character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 and the cut character (height: 7 mm) may be formed of a resist as a “RWM clear button (setting switching button)”. The color of the resist may be the same, but different colors are preferable because the substrates can be distinguished. Also, instead of the blank characters, blank symbols may be used by masking symbols such as arrows. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z. The same seal (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet) on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, for example, red translucent characters (high Size: 7 mm) and printed “RWM clear button (setting change button) is on the dispensing control board”.) May be attached, or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet of "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be pasted with a letter (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. An announcement sound may be made to flow from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as to where the button 633z is disposed. Specifically, for example, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, or the like operates the rendering operation unit 301 of the rendering operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. The various setting screen is displayed, and an item about the arrangement place of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice "RWM clear button is present on the payout control board. RWM clear button is also used as a setting switching button" tells where the RWM clear button 633z is arranged, and flows from various speakers. An announcement image (may be taken by a photo) indicating the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The manager of the gaming hall, the clerk of the gaming hall, and the like know the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z by such an announcement voice or announcement image, and then shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to change the setting value. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Moreover, in the embodiment described above, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating location information that can convey the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting change is performed, an announcement sound may be made to flow from various speakers as to where the RWM clear button 633z which doubles as the setting switching button is disposed. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined command. "RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button is also used as the setting change button. It operates by using the RWM clear button. Please change the value. ”An announcement sound is repeatedly emitted from the various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change processing, it transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 proceeds with various processes based on the predetermined command received with the announcement voice stopped. It will be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice may be made to flow from various speakers after the setting value has been determined, which conveys the method of operating the setting key. Further, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “during setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the seal is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can indicate the location where the RWM clear button 633z is arranged, but in addition to this, the setting value When the setting change is performed, an announcement sound may be made to flow from various speakers as to where the RWM clear button 633z which doubles as the setting switching button is disposed. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined command. "RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button is also used as the setting change button. It operates by using the RWM clear button. Please change the value. ”An announcement sound is repeatedly emitted from the various speakers. As a result, it is not necessary to search for the seal attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. In addition, although such an announcement audio | voice flows repeatedly from various speakers, the seal affixed on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement audio | voice starts to flow also supposing the case where the content of the announcement audio | voice is missed is missed. By visually observing the position of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to "An RWM clear button is on the payout control board. An RWM clear button is also used as a setting change button. Please change the setting value by operating the RWM clear button." It is also possible to guide the user to the contents telling the place where the sticker indicating the whereabouts of the button is attached. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310 a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting of the setting gets used to changing the setting of the setting due to the work and becomes distracted, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after the work is started, this is used as a trigger. The announcement voice can be stopped immediately, and the work must be started so as not to bother the player even if it is necessary to do the work after the business hall's sales have been started. Immediately when the RWM clear button is operated, the announcement voice can be immediately stopped. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice may be made to flow from various speakers after the setting value has been determined, which conveys the method of operating the setting key. Further, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “during setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different substrates, and the target to which the substrate is attached is also different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z Of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633 on the setting switching button). Functions can be removed) can be arranged centrally. For example, in the setting change board 1311, the distance between the right and left sides in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 in the vertical direction, and the distance in the horizontal direction is the main control board 1310. And the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing the middle points of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 , Has a matching shape. That is, the setting change substrate 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is arranged on the center line along the left side of the setting change substrate 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 is mainly Along the right side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is disposed on the center line. A setting key switch 1311 a having a setting key cylinder which is inserted below the center line of the setting change substrate 1311 and near the lower side of the setting change substrate 1311 and is rotated is disposed, and the setting change substrate 1311 is A setting switching button having a pressing operation unit is disposed above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change substrate 1311. That is, while the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed near the lower side on the same substrate as the setting change substrate 1311, the setting switching button is disposed near the upper side and is disposed apart from each other. When the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are separately disposed on the same substrate as described above, although the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one substrate. Since it can be made difficult to perform unauthorized modification compared with the case where they are placed close to each other by bringing them close to each other, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are collected on one substrate and arranged separately Even if it is a thing, it may be able to improve crime prevention.

  Next, the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311, the RWM clear button 633 z of the payout control substrate 633, and the setting indicator 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of performing the setting change of the setting value will be briefly described, and the case of performing the confirmation display of the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used to confirm the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value, only a limited person, including the game hall manager, has possession. Allowed, limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the setting of the set value, the main frame of the outer frame 2 is restored at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (temporary power failure occurs). 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and turned ON. It is necessary to establish a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the operation unit for pressing the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. That is, a person who actually changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), and then the outer frame 2 is selected. Do the work of opening the main frame 4 and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees and turn it ON to set the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is turned on, and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the main frame 4 Perform opening work, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees, and turn it ON to set the setting key switch 1311a Set the setting key to ON. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Main control MPU 1310a is set to the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 when setting key cylinder of setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) Is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the light-off state to the light-on state.

  A person who changes the setting of the setting presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633, and a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control substrate 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310. Input to The main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z each time the person who performs the setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the setting value 1 is returned to the initial value, and the value is increased by 1 again to perform control to display the setting value on the setting indicator 1310 g.

  The person who performs setting change of the setting value, when determining the setting value, sets the setting key switch 1311 a to the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. To return to the setting key cylinder's rotational position) which is turned OFF, turn 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the state where the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. It switches to a state, and switches from a state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310 z is turned on to a state in which it is turned off.

  A person who changes the setting of the setting removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and changes the setting of the setting. Complete.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, the outer frame 2 is restored at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of the power recovery after power failure (temporary power failure occurs momentary power failure). On the other hand, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311 a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and turned on. It is necessary to satisfy the “predetermined setting value display permitting condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. That is, a person who performs confirmation display of the setting value that is currently set is first after confirming that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered off). Perform work to open the main body frame 4 to the frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  The person who performs confirmation display of the currently set setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), and then checks the outer frame 2. Open the main frame 4 and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Main control MPU 1310a is set to the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 when setting key cylinder of setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) Value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed either.

  When the confirmation display of the set value currently set is completed, when the confirmation of the set value currently set is completed, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on In order to return to the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the turning operation is performed 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state where the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to the state where the setting value is not displayed.

  The person performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and performs an operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, Complete the task of confirming the set value displayed.

  In addition, as described above, the preset value change permission condition set in advance is the outer frame at the time of power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (temporary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened from 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the preset setting display permission condition is the pachinko machine 1 as described above. The main unit frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the power is restored or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure (an instantaneous power interruption occurs), and the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311 a The setting key is inserted by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the da and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and turned on by turning on the setting key, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z It is necessary that it is not operated. As described above, the preset setting change permission condition and the preset setting display permission condition are set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power outage may occur). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by moving and turning ON, and the preset setting change permission conditions set in advance are “when power of pachinko machine 1 is turned on or power is interrupted (instantly In contrast to the condition that “the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a momentary power failure after occurrence of a power failure,” "Required that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the time of power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after power failure (instant power failure occurs momentarily) It differs in the point.

  There are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). Basically, in the setting key switch 1311 a in the present embodiment, a lead type is adopted. The setting key switch 1311 a has an operation in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port. Therefore, the force accompanying this operation acts on the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311 a is provided, whereby the substrate is bent. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is disposed inside the outer diameter of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the case of the SMD type, the leads of the setting key switch are disposed so as to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  As a result, in the lead type, if the setting key is hooked in the insertion slot temporarily when removing the setting key from the insertion slot, the leads of the setting key switch are disposed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the back of the board ( Compared to the SMD type in which the lead of the setting key switch is disposed so as to protrude toward the outer shape and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate because it is soldered to the solder surface) The load applied to the portion where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is increased, this load is strongly moved from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) and the substrate itself is largely bent It becomes. On the other hand, in the case of the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot temporarily when removing the setting key from the insertion slot, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch A lead type in which each lead of the setting key switch is arranged on the inner side of the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder side) of the substrate because it is arranged and soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board Compared to the above, the load applied to the soldered part of each lead of the setting key switch on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is smaller, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Even when working toward the substrate, the substrate itself is difficult to bend.

  In addition, when external force acts on the substrate and the substrate itself bends greatly, there is a concern that the solder portion to which the SMD type electronic component is soldered may peel off the land pattern greatly, so the lead type as a setting key switch It is desirable to mount on a substrate on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder portion where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate is smaller than that of the SMD type, and In view of the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch as it can be made more resistant to peeling.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, basically, the lead type is adopted as the setting key switch 1311 a. In the present embodiment, since the electronic components of the lead type are mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 without the electronic components of the SMD type being mounted, the lead type electronic device is mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 as the setting key switch 1311 a. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion opening when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion opening and the substrate itself is largely bent as described above, the lead soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 There is no possibility that the other type of electronic component may be peeled off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 (inter-board connection) as described above (the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310) The signals from the setting key switch 1311 a and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 because the connectors in the above may be electrically connected via the harness).

  The main control board 1310 which is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 is directed from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, upper side, right side and lower side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 Is formed to be sized to occupy an area of about four-fifths, and the upper and right sides of the cover of the main control board box 1320 are connected in the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change substrate 1311 is disposed in the area of the corner portion. The setting change substrate 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side thereof being about one fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and has a rectangular shape long in the lateral direction. Compared to the shape of the main control board 1310, it is smaller. In the present embodiment, the lead type setting key switch 1311 a is mounted on the square setting change substrate 1311 having such a small shape, and temporarily the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311 a and pushed down. When the board itself bends or when the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when pulling out the setting key from the insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board By doing this, the size of the deflection can be suppressed to be smaller than that of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the cover of the main control board box 1320 or the base is in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) or the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 at the position corresponding to the setting change substrate 1311 to prevent deflection. The screw holes can be provided in the setting change substrate 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted by eliminating the need to provide the canned ribs respectively, and the screw is accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 It can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the lead type is used as the setting key switch 1311 a and disposed on the setting change board 1311 separate from the main control board 1310, the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent in accordance with the operation (operation) that the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent in response to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  On the other hand, in place of the setting change substrate 1311, the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed on any of the main control substrate 1310, the payout control substrate 633, and the power supply substrate 630. When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the substrate, the SMD type is used instead of the lead type setting key switch 1311 a and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion opening when the setting key is pulled out from the mouth, the substrate itself does not easily bend as described above, so other SMD electronic components to be soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate are There is no risk of peeling off from the surface (mounting surface) of

  Here, to briefly explain the set value, the “set value” is usually from the time of definite variation, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not and the probability for lottery whether it is a small hit or not. It is possible to change the probability for making a lottery determination, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc. when shifting to time, which is advantageous for the player (that is, the player gains) The probability (the degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a big hit determination table defining the ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol A big hit symbol determination table in which the percentage of the determination value of the determination is defined, a small hit determination table in which the percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won is defined, the percentage of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined Small hit symbol decision table, a normal transition decision table etc. where the ratio of the judgment value of transition decision from definite variation to normal time is specified) or used at various distribution rates associated with setting value Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that specifies the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.) Or. The various determination values are allocated to the various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values differ from each other In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, although six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 were used as the setting values described above, they may be in a range smaller than this, or in many ranges. It may be one. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310 g displays the set value, and the main control MPU 1310 a checks the contents of the RAM built in itself when the power returns, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off, the contents stored in the RAM built in itself are abnormal (or trusted) And an error display telling that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls fired in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Out of the game balls launched into the game area 5 a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out port sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a through the panel relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and turning it on. This setting key The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the setting key ON position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). This OFF signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 Although the main control MPU 1310a is configured to be input, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information transmitting setting keys ON and OFF as serial information. Good. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1311 but may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 instead, or may be provided on the payout control substrate 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects one of setting keys ON and OFF from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a having a serial circuit may be described as “modification (1) of setting key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and turning it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the setting key ON position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). This OFF signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 The setting key switch 1311 a may be provided with a pulse output circuit capable of outputting information transmitting setting keys ON and OFF to the outside as a pulse signal although the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to be input. . Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Although the setting key switch 1311 a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1311, it may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 instead, or may be provided on the payout control substrate 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms in the case of information for transmitting the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set in 5 ms in the case of information for transmitting the OFF. . When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control substrate 1310, the main control MPU 1310 a generates the setting signal ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which information to convey (a mode of the setting key switch 1311 a having a pulse output circuit may be described as “modification (2) of setting key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and turning it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the setting key ON position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). This OFF signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 Although the voltage level of the signal of the setting key ON and the voltage level of the signal of OFF are input to the main control MPU 1310 a, an intermediate potential is generated between the substrates extending from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control substrate 1310. A main control board 1310 is provided with a comparator circuit using a potential (for example, a potential of 2 V to 3 V among zero V to 5 V), and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310 a to perform main control The MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the signal of setting key ON and ON / OFF of the signal of OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a (an aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be described as “modification (3) of setting key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the initial position, which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change board 1311 is turned on, The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF to return to the rotational position of the main control board, and the OFF signal is output from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board. Although the input was made to the main control MPU 1310a of 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (a mode of the setting key switch is "modification (4) of setting key" And may be written).

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is It may be accommodated in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of a crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided with two or more. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body can not be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is broken. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the determination key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. Changing the setting change board 1311 by invading a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and in the opening corresponding to the pressing operation part of the enter key button As it can not do, it becomes a structure where a wire intrusion prevention part is molded to a cover body to an opening. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above as the structure of the setting change board box, when the cover body is configured to be able to be opened or closed from the base body, with respect to the base body, A setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, a detection signal from the setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control substrate 1310, or (indirect) input to the main control substrate 1310 via the setting change substrate 1311. It may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition described above (the setting change substrate box An aspect may be described as "the modification (5) of a setting key".

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the aspect which selected suitably and was combined among the modification (1)-(5) of the setting key mentioned above. (The aspect of the selection combination of a modification is "a modification of a setting key (6) It may be described as ").

  Also, with the above-mentioned set value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit or not, to make lottery determination when transitioning from definite variation time to normal time Probability of changing the distribution rate to the area which is advantageous for the player, etc., which is advantageous for the player (that is, to increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire) The probability (the degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, there is a probability (advantagement degree) that the player is advantageous to other pachinko machines. Some have a single preset value set. That is, as in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player exists in advance as a plurality of set values, which is advantageous to the player There is a probability (advantagement degree) of a gaming specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed in design or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Is dependent on the game specification, it has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations according to the game specification. Therefore, there is a demand for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 which can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value and there is no need to change the setting at all (probability degree) that the advantage (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player is required (probability) Because there is no need to use it as a device, it is necessary to cope with the design change by the software that assigns the following contents: set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows. Can.

  For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area (an area excluding the specific area in the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein, a plurality of actual machine check operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared) The start method of the pachinko machine 1 can be used as a set value). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (characters) to be controlled, the lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED, etc. Actual operation confirmation pattern 1 is assigned to specify operation of object, lighting of light emitter), and actual operation confirmation pattern 2 to specify "operation of movable body (character)" is assigned as setting value 2 The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 for designating “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3 and “detailed operation of the movable body (character), movement over the entire operation area, other as the setting value 4 An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for specifying an operation such as an interference check with a structure or another movable body (character), an operation sequence with another movable body (character), etc.) is assigned. Light emitter 1 port unit (main control MP A real machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit of 1310a (that is, every one output port)", and a real machine confirmation specifying "no operation" as the setting value 6 The operation pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "modification (1) according to common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310 a repeatedly performs main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, and performs operation of a movable body (feature) and lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED, by repeatedly performing an actual device check operation after clearing the RAM. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 72) from the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control with contents (actual machine check operation pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. The operation of the movable body (character) to be controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. By changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to have variations in the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state). In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" as setting value 2 is allocated, and "20 seconds setting as setting value 3 Time setting pattern 3 for designating "is assigned, time setting pattern 4 for designating" 25 seconds "as setting value 4 is assigned, and time setting pattern 5 for designating" 30 seconds "as setting value 5 is assigned, The time setting pattern 6 for designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (A mode of the change setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the fluctuation of the symbol is finished. It may be described as "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration in a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol, the time from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration can be varied.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 for assigning "comical effect" as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern for specifying "comical effect, operation effect of the movable body (character)" as the setting value 2 2 is assigned, demo effect setting pattern 3 which designates “serious effect” as setting value 3 is assigned, and demonstration effect setting pattern which designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (character)” as setting value 4 4 is assigned, demonstration effect setting pattern 5 which designates “contemporary drama-like effect” as setting value 5 is assigned, and “democratic direction effect, movable object (character)” is designated as setting value 6 demonstration effect setting Pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of contents of demonstration effect may be described as “modification (3) according to common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the contents of the demonstration effect, the contents of the demonstration effect to be performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the periphery control board 1510. By turning the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 specifying "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 specifying "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" setting value 3. "Volume setting pattern 3 specifying" is assigned, volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigned, and volume setting pattern 5 specifying "volume 5" as setting value 5 is assigned, A volume setting pattern 6 specifying "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (a mode of change setting of default volume may be described as "modification (4) according to common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default sound volume is set at the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction to decrease the volume (moved to the opposite direction to the direction to increase the volume), and the movement to the minimum volume end is completed When it is adjusted and adjusted to the minimum side volume, it may be muted, or it may be a volume that can recognize a sound when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the direction to increase the volume by the volume adjustment switch (moved to the opposite direction to the direction to decrease the volume), and movement to the maximum volume end is completed When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the maximum volume may be used, or the volume may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. According to this aspect of changing and setting the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various problems, goths and errors. The various error notification sounds can not be adjusted by the operation of the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not depended on), and the pachinko machine that emits an error notification sound by setting the volume to the maximum volume is the game hall Although it may be easy for a clerk or other clerk to notice, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may find it annoying. Then, what can adjust the volume of various error alarm | sounds is also calculated | required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" as the setting value 2 is assigned. Error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigning, "setting value 5" Error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying error notification volume 5 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (volume of error notification tone The aspect of the change setting of may be described as “modification (5) according to common hardware configuration”. It should be noted that the setting value 6 (maximum sound volume) from the setting value 1 (a sound volume that does not become muffled and can detect the error notification sound when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the volume of the error alerting sound, it is possible to give variation to the volume of the error alerting sound in the error alerting.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "brightness 2" as setting value 2 is assigned, and setting value 3 " Default luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" as setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 for designating "brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (a case where the change setting mode of default brightness is described as "modification example (6) by common hardware configuration" is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeating the main control timer interrupt process described later, changing the setting of the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the light emitter can be adjusted to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the setting of the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in notification of errors such as various defects, gotos and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 specifying “error notification luminance 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as the setting value 2 The error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, and the error notification luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification luminance 3" is allocated as the setting value 3, and the error notification specifying "error notification luminance 4" as the setting value 4 Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification specifying “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as setting value 6 The luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (a manner of changing and setting the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the luminance of the lamp is low but the lamp's luminance is low, and when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine it is possible to recognize an error notification) to the setting value 6 (maximum luminance) The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing change control of the light emitter brightness in error notification and the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later to adjust the lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the luminance of the light emitter, it is possible to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the luminance setting of the light emitter in the error notification, variations can be given to the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification.

  Further, with respect to various setting values assigned to the above-described variations (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration, predetermined setting value display permission conditions established in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a are satisfied. The setting indicator 1310g is displayed when the power is turned on. However, the setting indicator 1310g may always be displayed from the time the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time the power is shut off (setting value display Mode may be described as "modification (8) due to common hardware configuration".

  In addition, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the modification (6) of the setting key described above.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 at the time of power recovery at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 and at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure And the setting key is inserted by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on by the setting key ON. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633 is pressed on the premise of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control built-in RAM performs setting change processing in main control side power on processing described later. Clear all except the specific area among all the areas, and then proceed to play the game by setting the interrupt permission etc. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of 33 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting and the like. Proceed with the game. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the setting value confirmation display process is not performed even once. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the current set value being set on the setting indicator 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of balls of the gaming balls output to the base monitor 1310 h and collected by the out port 1008 is displayed on the base monitor 1310 h. Therefore, the current setting value set by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value set in the period from the power recovery to the start of the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting etc. using the base monitor 1310h. As the game progress can be started by performing interrupt permission setting after power recovery, the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting indicator 1310 g It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18, FIG. 21 and FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  In the function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration omits the shin, and displays a state display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and two normal lottery results for drawing by passing the game ball B against the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made of LEDs, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It has an indicator.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

  Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, particularly, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting a control signal from the control substrate 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

  Wires FCBL electrically connected via connection connectors 1400 a provided on the back side of function display unit 1400 are, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, from the upper right corner of game board 5 to the back of back box 3010. When it is drawn up to the upper side, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and collected together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the 1100 or is attached directly to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 It is drawn down toward the bottom.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN After being drawn down to the lower side, they are electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 and the back box The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back 3010 is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The bottom of the main control board box 1320 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320, which is the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the bottom rear of the game panel 1100. As described above, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 88 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 Will be placed in

  Behind the function display unit 1400, a decorative substrate 1131 on which a plurality of decorative LEDs are mounted is disposed. When the wire UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate 1131, is bent to the upper rear surface of the game panel 1100, the upper edge of the front surface of the back box 3010 When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is drawn around to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a close state (or a contact state) with the above-described wiring FCBL, Are bent together and gathered together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and are routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Ru. Then, the wiring UPCBL is bent below the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the left side at the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and separated along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 apart from the path of the wiring FCBL described above. After being drawn and drawn up to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wire UPCBL electrically connecting the decoration substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive substrate 1720 has a longer wire length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL routed to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010 and vertically along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010 A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality form one another and are routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. The area in which the wire UPCBL is drawn is attached to the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 104 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 like the above-described wire FCBL. It will be arrange | positioned ahead of the payout unit 560 being carried out.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding path for guiding the gaming balls B from the tank rail 553 in a serpentine manner, and the one guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the induced gaming balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming balls B having passed through the payout devices 580 downward; And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming ball B is polished at the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic wave noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, etc., which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Have. The main control MPU 1310a incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"), and such internal reset is described. The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that can not be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a is always generated, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a Will be completely erased (cleared). That is, when the forcible reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310 a is activated again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as a package of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a It protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a are in a state of projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since static electricity tends to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof, the function display unit is disposed in front of the dispensing unit 560 when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge. In some cases, it may intrude into the wiring FCBL electrically connecting 1400 with the main control substrate 1310, and electrically connect the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 with the peripheral control substrate 1510. The wiring UPCBL may be invaded. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL may pop out and intrude into the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring UPCBL may pop out and intrudes into the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 is temporarily formed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 It is drawn on a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (eg, from the upper side of the main control board box 1320 to the right side of the main control board box 1320). The main control board box 1320 is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320) At the stage of passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the main control board box 1320 When it is bent toward the side and drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the line FCBL, the line FCBL When routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of main control substrate box 1320, the front of main control substrate 1310 (that is, the main control substrate 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of main control MPU 1310a) When passing through the area of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the wiring FCBL Under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  If the wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is The function display is received after being drawn along the wiring receiving groove, not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, and drawn from the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320. Electrically connected to unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and drawn along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position, electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the main control MPU 1310a, there is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as a main control board The main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, as well as being disposed closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing the middle point of the main control MPU 1310a between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged to be separated on the main control board 1310.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be disposed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL corresponds to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering the various pins of the main control board box 1320 via a space separating the MPU 1310 a from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Also, by arranging main control MPU 1310 a away from function display unit connector MFCN to which wiring FCBL is electrically connected, main control MPU 1310 a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL. In the space where the main control substrate 1310 or the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310 a are separated from each other on the main control substrate 1310, electromagnetic noises entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310 a is disposed with the right side of the package separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the line FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is drawn downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so the electromagnetic wave that has entered the line FCBL This is to prevent noise from intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being drawn around (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) When it is drawn downward along it, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and is drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL drawn along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”). ) Can be secured. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered the wiring FCBL penetrates various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 through the space having the second wiring distance from the wiring FCBL. Can be prevented. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a straight line. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the above-described wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). They are inserted so as to be respectively connected in series, and when using a capacitor, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 62) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface, and lower fixed pieces 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. In the effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner circumferential surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27 to 30 and the like. FIG. 27 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the gaming panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the face of the gaming panel to show the inside of the gaming area where the gaming balls circulate and the obstacle nail. FIG. 29 is an enlarged front view of the flow passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner in FIG.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And project rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 A special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are disposed below the vertical center in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the horizontal center. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is disposed at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is disposed lower than the center in the vertical direction near the right end in the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially at the center in the vertical direction above the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The second start opening 2004 is disposed below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first start opening 2002. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than that of the first starting opening 2002.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001; A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the mouth unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and a starting opening unit serving as the lower right corner in the front view of the game area 5a Attacker unit 2400 attached to the right of the front view 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and side unit 2200 In the game area 5a, the frame-shaped cell is attached slightly above the center of the front view and has the gate portion 2003. The Tar won game 2500, is equipped with a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out opening 1008 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 which is always open upward with a width that only one gaming ball B can receive, and the game ball B receiving only one at the lower left of the first starting opening 2002 It has one general winning opening 2001 which is always open toward the upper side with a possible width. The whole of the starting opening unit 2100 is formed to be transparent, and can visually recognize the rear side (rear unit 3000) (see FIG. 25 and the like).

  The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening sensor 2101 (see FIG. 28 etc.) for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 and a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. And a guide path 2102 (see FIG. 27) which is guided rearward of the plate 1110 and discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200).

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and then is opened upward, and the first starting opening 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the feature 2500. Therefore, when the gaming ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2503 a of the stage 2503 in the center role 2500 described later, and the central discharge portion of the stage 2503 The gaming ball B released from the 2503 a is configured to be received by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 open for always receiving the game ball B, and a first shelf 2201 inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning openings 2001. The second shelf 2202 is inclined such that the right end is lower at the upper part of the two general winning openings 2001. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, two general winning openings 2001 are provided at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. The two general winning openings 2001 are provided to face each other, side by side. The left general winning opening 2001 opens upward to the left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens rightward.

  With the side unit 2200 assembled on the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B that has flowed down the left area of the center character 2500. Can be guided to the right. The extension of the upper surface of the first shelf 2201 is inclined so as to pass between the first starting opening 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf 2202 is inclined such that the extension line of the upper surface passes through the opening portion of the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  The entire side unit 2200 is formed to be transparent, and can visually recognize the rear side (rear unit 3000) (see FIG. 25 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf 2201 and the second shelf 2202 project forward from the front of the panel 1110. . The side unit 2200 can guide the gaming ball received by the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guiding path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 62).

5-8 c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 at the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The whole of the attacker unit 2400 is formed to be transparent, and can visually recognize the rear side (the rear unit 3000) (see FIG. 25 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 out of the four general winning openings 2001 (see FIG. 30 etc.).

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends substantially upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 always opens upward at the upper right corner, and the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001. Is openable upward at the lower left of the second start port 2004.

  Attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 opened with a size slightly larger than gaming ball B. In addition, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened upward with a size slightly larger than the gaming ball, and the big winning opening 2005 is approximately three times the outer diameter of the gaming ball in the left-right direction It is open upward with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the second starting opening 2004. And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 62 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2411 in accordance with the result of the normal lottery where the game ball B of the gate unit 2003 passes. The starting opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 An attacker solenoid 2414 is opened and closed according to one special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 30 etc., the attacking unit 2400 is an attacking left passage 2421 and an attacking right passage 2422 through which gaming balls B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 disposed at the upper right, A second start opening guide shelf 2423 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from immediately below 2421 and the second start opening 2004 opens in the middle, and a second start opening below the second start opening guide shelf 2423 A large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 which is inclined downward from the left end of the starting opening guiding shelf 2423 to the left from a position spaced to the left and the large winning opening 2005 is opened in the middle Have.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a communication port 2425 communicating with the right attack channel 2422 on the right end side of the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and a lower end than the big winning opening 2005 from the right end side of the second start opening guide shelf 2423 From the between the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 and the attacking lower right passage 2426 extending to the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to become lower toward the left after extending to And an intermediate passage 2427 extending downward from the large winning opening 2005 and in communication with the lower right passage 2426.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001 to separate the left attachment passage 2421 and the right attachment passage 2422, and the communication opening 2425 between the lower end and the second start opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 to be formed, and an inclined portion 2429 inclined so as to be positioned to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428.

  The second start opening door 2411 enabling the opening and closing of the second start opening 2004 opened in the second start opening guide shelf 2423 extends in the front and back direction, and in the form of a plate extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward. By setting the right end side of the second start opening door 2411 at a position slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second start opening 2004 with respect to the horizontal direction, the game ball to the second start opening 2004 is The second start port 2004 can be closed without accepting B. In the state where the second start opening 2004 is closed, the second start opening door 2411 guides the gaming ball B, which has circulated the second start opening guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side), to the left. be able to.

  The second start opening door 2411 is turned in a counterclockwise direction so that the right end moves upward around the left end, from the state where the second start opening 2004 is closed. The second start-up port 2004 can be opened (opened) to enable the game ball B to be received into the second start-up port 2004. When the second start opening door 2411 is raised so that the right end side is raised and the second start opening 2004 is opened, the second start opening door 2411 is raised from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 Thus, the course of the game ball B rolling on the second start opening guide shelf 2423 can be inhibited, and the game ball B can be received in the second start opening 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (during non-energization), and when the start opening solenoid 2412 is ON (during energization), the second start opening 2004 Let it open.

  The large winning opening door 2413 which can open and close the large winning opening 2005 opened in the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low By moving forward and backward, it is possible to open and close the big winning opening 2005 opened upward. The big winning opening door 2413 can close the big winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and in the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed, the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side) The game ball B that has been played can be guided to the left. Also, the special winning opening door 2413 opens the special winning opening 2005 by moving backward by the attachment solenoid 2414, and circulates the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center role 2500. The game ball B can be accepted by the big winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is ON (during energization).

  Although not shown, the first receiving port 2007, which can be opened upward, is disposed inside the large winning opening 2005, and the attacking unit 2400 is directed upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. A second inlet 2008 which is always open is disposed. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 detects the gaming ball B received in the first reception port 2007, and the second reception sensor detects the gaming ball B received in the second reception port 2008. 2405 and opens and closes the first receiving port 2007 (dividing the gaming ball B, which is received by the large winning opening 2005 and circulates the inside, to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008) distribution piece 2415 And a sorting solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the sorting piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result by drawing the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. And. The distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending right and left so that the right end is low in the inside of the big winning opening 2005, and it opens upward by advancing and retracting in and out. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 by moving forward, and guides the gaming ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 rightward to always open the second inlet upward. May be accepted to 2008. Also, the distribution piece 2415 opens the first receiving port 2007 by retreating by driving the distributing solenoid 2416, and the gaming ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be the first receiving port 2007. Can be accepted. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the first inlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (during energization). Let In other words, the distribution piece 2415 can distribute the gaming balls B received in the big winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  In a state in which the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the gate portion 2003 downstream of the flow passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center part 2500 described later ) And the second starting port 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center character 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the special winning port A position 2005 is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center work 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

  Subsequently, the flow of the gaming ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the gaming ball B starts from the stage 2503. Even if they are released, they are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (distribution passage group 2520) of the center product 2500 may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. On the downstream side of the distribution channel group 2520 of the center character 2500, an attacking left channel 2421, a general winning opening 2001, and an attacking right channel 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the gaming balls flowed down the right side of the center character 2500. B will enter any of them.

  After the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401 And is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B is not received by the general winning opening 2001 and enters the left attachment attack path 2421 on the left of the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 It distribute | circulates to the 2nd starting opening 2004 side (left side) according to inclination. In a state where the second start opening 2004 is closed by the second start opening door 2411, it flows leftward on the second start opening door 2411 and is released leftward from the left end of the second start opening guide shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start opening guide shelf 2423, if the second start opening 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted to the second start opening 2004 with a very high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. If the gaming ball B which has flowed down the right side of the center prize 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, it is released to the left side of the large winning opening 2005 through the second start opening guide shelf 2423.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted on the left side of the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the gaming ball B released to the left from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 is the big winning opening 2005 side, Or, it will flow down to either of the intermediate passage 2427 side. When the big prize mouth 2005 is closed by the big prize mouth door 2413 when flowing down to the big prize mouth 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the big prize mouth door 2413 and from the left end of the big prize mouth induction shelf 2424 It is released to the left. When the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005 is retreated and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the gaming ball B which has flowed from the second starting opening induction shelf 2423 to the large winning opening 2005 side, It is accepted in the big prize mouth 2005. The game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B released to the left from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 pass the out port 1008 to the rear side of the game panel 1100. At the bottom of the substrate holder 1200).

  On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning a prize opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 is not accepted by the general winning a prize opening 2001. When entering the right attachment passage 2422, it abuts on the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005 and bounces back to the left. In the present embodiment, the second start opening guide shelf 2423 is provided such that the extension line of the second start opening guide shelf 2423 matches the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005, and therefore, it enters the attacker right passage 2422 Then, the game ball B rebounded at the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005 will fall (distribute) on the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425 with high probability.

  When the gaming ball B which has entered the right attachment passage 2422 and abuts on the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication opening 2425, the partitioning portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication opening 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the gaming ball B comes in contact with the inclined portion 2429. The inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is positioned to the right with respect to the lower end, so the gaming ball B in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected to the lower right lower passage 2426 side, The attacker enters the lower right passage 2426. When the gaming ball B in contact with the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005 bounces downward below the communication port 2425, the gaming ball B enters the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker.

  The game ball B entering the lower right attack passage 2426 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be accepted by the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second start port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (six in this case) full-color LEDs. The sub function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit by the lighting / flashing of the LED, the light emission color, etc. Display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. It is

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 62). The magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet.

[5-8 d. Center features]
The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame. it can. The center character 2500 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, so that the rear side (rear unit 3000) can be viewed.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B inserted into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not intrude into

  The center character 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released A warp outlet 2502 opened inward and a stage 2503 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction are provided.

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is The position substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the state of being attached to 1110) is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. In this stage 2503, a portion (center emission portion 2503 a) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portions (side emission portions 2503 b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and can release game ball B in the game area 5a from those sites.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central release portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the gaming ball B is released from the central release portion 2503 a at the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center product 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided below the center in the vertical direction and at a position to the right of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate unit 2003 is vertically penetrated with a size that allows only one game ball B to pass, and a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of the game ball is provided. The gate portion 2003 is provided between the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 at an interval where only one game ball B can pass.

  In addition, the center character 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface on the upper side, and is inclined so as to become lower from the position on the left side to the right than the center in the left-right direction , And a distribution passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and includes a plurality of passages through which the game balls B can be distributed. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 etc., the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center part 2500 and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521 And a second circulation passage 2522. The first circulation passage 2521 extends in an arc shape along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the game area 5a downward from the entrance side of the upper end, and the lower end portion is bent like a crank to the left and the outlet is downward Opening towards the The outlet at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is positioned slightly to the right with respect to immediately above the gate portion 2003.

  The inlet of the upper end of the second flow passage 2522 is opened leftwardly spaced from the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 and is bent in the crank shape in the vicinity of the upper end. Adjacent to the flow passage 2521 and extending downward in an arc, cranking to the left near the lower end and then bending right to the crank, with the outlet adjacent to the outlet of the first flow passage 2521 and downward Opening towards the Thereby, the second flow passage 2522 can attenuate the flow speed of the gaming ball B more than the first flow passage 2521. In the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522, a plurality of protrusions 2523 are provided at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B is in contact with the protrusions 2523. Can reduce the flow rate.

  The center role product 2500 is on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 (the periphery of the game area 5a) in the assembled state on the game board 5. An upstream space 2511 through which the game ball B can circulate is formed. Moreover, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the entrance of the upper end of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly under the stopper 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is the right rail 1005 (game It extends along the periphery of the region 5a. Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center character 2500 and the right rail 1005 (the periphery of the game area 5a).

5-8 e. Flow of the game ball by the distribution passage group of the center goods]
Next, the flow of the gaming balls B by the distribution passage group 2520 of the center prize 2500 in the gaming area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 and the gate unit 2003 and between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Is planted. As for a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the game balls B which have flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 are on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (gate portion 2003 and right rail 1005 And between), has been adjusted to flow with high probability. In addition, in the plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate unit 2003, the game balls B which have flowed through the second distribution passage 2522 pass through the gate unit 2003 with high probability. It has been adjusted. Furthermore, with respect to the plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the gaming ball B which has flowed through the second distribution passage 2522 has a gate portion with high probability next to the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to circulate on the left side of 2003.

  On the other hand, with respect to a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the gaming balls B distributed on the right side of the gate unit 2003 have a high probability of the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. Also, with respect to the plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the gaming ball B distributed on the left side of the gate unit 2003 or the gate unit 2003 has a high probability. It is adjusted to enter the left adjacency left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning a prize opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted by the general ad libitum opening 2001 with a high probability next to the adjacency left aisle 2421.

  In the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with the strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 (upstream space 2511) of the center character 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 is obtained. The game ball B circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522. Specifically speaking, the game ball B is driven with strength to abut against the stopper portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 which constitutes a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called, right And the gaming ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first circulation passage 2521. The game ball B which has entered the first distribution passage 2521 has a high probability of being on the right side of the gate portion 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are interposed between the downstream end of the first distribution passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the gaming ball B which has passed the right side of the gate unit 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability due to the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered into the attacking right passage 2422 will flow through either the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 or the attacking lower right passage 2426.

  As described above, since the gaming balls B distributed in the first distribution passage 2521 do not pass through the gate portion 2003 very much, the lottery of the result of the regular lottery performed by the passing of the gaming portion B at the gate portion 2003 is not performed very much. There is a low possibility that the result of the normal lottery in which the second start port 2004 is opened will be lottery. Therefore, even if the game ball B which has flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 flows through the second start opening guide shelf 2423 through the right-hand attachment 2422, the second start opening 2004 is often closed and the second start Since the game ball B is not received very much in the mouth 2004, there are few opportunities to be provided with benefits such as the lottery of the second special lottery result and the payout of the game ball B by the game ball B being received in the second starting hole 2004. Therefore, when the gaming ball B circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the bonus given to the player is relatively small.

  In the above, although the case of hitting the right has been described, the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second flow passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 is also It enters into the first circulation passage 2521, and the same result as described above is obtained.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003 By the plurality of obstacle nails N which are implanted, the gate portion 2003 is passed with high probability, and the lottery of the result of the ordinary lottery is performed. The game ball B which has passed through the gate unit 2003 enters the left passage 2421 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the left passage 2421 The second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is circulated.

  At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the drawn ordinary lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 has a predetermined pattern. The game ball B may be received by the second start port 2004 because the game ball B is in the open state. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. Therefore, when the gaming ball B circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, the bonus given to the player becomes relatively high (large).

  From such a thing, the player is more likely to receive a benefit in the second distribution passage 2522, so that the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 with a hitting strength and The hitting strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a by the hitting strength at which the ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522. A change can be given to the hitting operation, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and enjoys the hitting operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, in the case of the "big hit" etc. which the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state, The large winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the large holding hole 2005 receives the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B will be paid out. In such an advantageous gaming state ("big hit gaming state"), if the player is required to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B, some players may feel impatient or frustrated, There is a risk of lowering the interest for However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and the first distribution passage 2521 is made to flow, after passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005 communicates. The game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening induction shelf 2424 (big winning opening 2005 side) by bouncing back toward the opening 2425 and falling to the second starting opening induction shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball B to be accepted to the large winning opening 2005 by the easy hitting operation without adjusting the delicate hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the hitting operation of the game ball B can be sharpened in accordance with the gaming state, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[5-8 f. Another embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center product]
Subsequently, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center product 2500 according to the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of center products different from FIG. 29 etc., and FIG. 31 (b) is a distribution passage group of center products different from (a). It is a principal part enlarged view showing an embodiment. FIG. 32 (a) is an enlarged view of an essential part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center product further different from FIG. 31, and FIG. 32 (b) is a main part showing the embodiment of the distribution passage group FIG. FIG. 33 is an enlarged view of an essential part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of center products different from those of FIG. 31 and FIG. In FIGS. 31 and 32, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (a), compared with FIG. 29, the inlet at the upper end of the second flow passage 2522 is flowed at a distance separated to the left with respect to the inlet of the first flow passage 2521. It is The same function and effect as described above can be achieved also by the flow passage group 2520.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (b), the angle of the stopper 1006 is such that the gaming ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 in the front component 1000 can easily bounce back to the entrance side of the second flow passage 2522. Of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 between the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 and the inlet of the second flow passage 2522 so that the second flow passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is As a result, since the game ball B easily enters the second distribution passage 2522 side, the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B in which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 is broadened, so The game ball B can be easily hit and operated aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 32A, in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 29 and 31, the respective inlets of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. The upstream side of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 is extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center character 2500, and the respective inlets are directed leftward in a state of being vertically aligned It is made to open it.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first circulation passage 2521 and a part of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 is a part of the second circulation passage 2522. Make up the department. Moreover, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first circulation from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 The length to the inlet of each of the passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 is smaller than the upstream space 2511 shown in FIG. 29 and FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, a striking strength of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 that abuts a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, Since it is necessary to hit the gaming ball B with a hitting strength directly entering the entrance of the second flow passage 2522 opening toward the left, compared with the embodiment of FIG. 29 and FIG. 31, The adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B becomes narrow. In addition, the game ball B inserted into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 divides the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 When it abuts on the left end (a part between two entrances) of the wall, there is a possibility that it may deviate from the upstream space 2511 depending on the momentum and the angle to the left of the rebounding game ball B. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space 2511, it does not deviate from the upstream space 2511 to the left and enter neither the first circulation passage 2521 nor the second circulation passage 2522 There is a possibility that the left side of the center character 2500 may be circulated. As such, since the degree of difficulty with respect to the hitting operation of the game ball B becomes high, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the hitting operation of the game ball B, and the game medium is hit for the player. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 (a), a branch portion 2524 communicating with the second flow passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first flow passage 2521. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above the portion bent downward from the right end of the portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) extending to the left and right in the second flow passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the hit strength (when the hit strength is weak). In order to branch to the distribution passage 2522 side, the difficulty of distribution of the game ball B with respect to the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than the embodiment of FIG. 32 (a).

  In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B, which is to be entered into the first distribution passage 2521, weaker than the hitting strength of the game ball B. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the downward bending portion of the second flow passage 2522, the gaming ball B entering the second flow passage 2522 is bent at the downward bending portion. It does not bounce upward (on the side of the branch 2524), and does not enter the side of the first flow passage 2521 through the branch 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 is in one-way communication from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first flow passage 2521, the first flow passage 2521 side in the portion of the branch portion 2524 Alternatively, the player may branch to the second distribution passage 2522 side, so that the player can be squeezed by whether or not the game ball B is branched at the branch portion 2524, and the first distribution can be performed. The flow of the game balls B in the passage 2521 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even though the player aims at the second distribution passage 2522 and strikes the gaming ball B, the game ball B may enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Since the branch part 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521 may branch to the second distribution passage 2522 side, it is possible to harass the player depending on whether or not the branch part 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side. The player can be excited and can entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, the mistake of the player's hitting operation is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is obtained. The game ball B will be distributed, which can make the player feel like he / she has obtained, and can suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the second flow passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 crossing the inside of the frame of the center part 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second flow passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right circumferential wall 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right circumferential wall 2510 will flow through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center character 2500, so the player side Since it is possible to make the distribution of the game ball B stand out, it becomes possible to make the player think that there is something good after that when the game ball B circulates the bypass portion 2525. Can make the player perform the hitting operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 having the bypass part 2525, and enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B to suppress the decrease in interest Can.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37 and the like. FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive substrate unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 further includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 62). See).

  Also, the back unit 3000 includes a back first rendering unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second rendering unit 3200 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back first rendering unit 3100. , The back third rendering unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second rendering unit 3200, and the front of the back second rendering unit 3200, the general of the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, and the game received in the general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2004, and big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 And a back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges the ball downward.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixed piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 36 and 37).

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted to the left and right on the left side in a back view of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Furthermore, the back box 3010 has an insertion port 3011 that is cut out so as to be recessed rearward from the front end, near the center in the vertical direction on the left and right side surfaces. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first rendering unit 3100 to be described later with the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled in the game board 5. When the insertion slot 3011 transports the game board 5, a stuffing is inserted between the rotary ornaments 3210 from the side of the back box 3010, and vibration due to transport etc. causes the second reverse performance unit 3200 to The rotating decoration 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a defect occurs in the movement of the rotary decorative body 3210 of the back second rendering unit 3200, a finger, a tool, or the like can be inserted through the insertion port 3011 to eliminate the defect.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 38 and 39 and the like. Fig.38 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st rendering unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st rendering unit of the back unit from the back. FIG. 39 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decoration substrate in the back first rendering unit. The back first rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

  The back first effect unit 3100 is a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 closing the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 disposed above the light guide plate 3110 and emitting light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. The back first upper decoration substrate 3120 on which the LEDs 3121 are mounted, and the back first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 disposed on the left of the light guide plate 3110 and emitting light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted A diffusion lens 3140 provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffusing the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 And have.

  In addition, the back first rendering unit 3100 is attached to the transparent flat upper base 3151 attached to the front upper edge of the light guide plate 3110 and the upper base 3151 behind to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and A transparent upper back cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent flat left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and a rear side of the left base 3153 Transparent left rear cover 3154 to which light guide plate 3110 is held and back first left decorative substrate 3130 and diffusion lens 3140 are attached, and transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of light guide plate 3110 Right base 3155 and a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and holding the light guide plate 3110 It is equipped with a.

  Also, the back first rendering unit 3100 is attached to the front of the upper base 3151 and is attached to the front of the back first upper decoration 3161 on which a relief-like decoration is formed and the front of the left base 3153 , A back first left decoration 3162 on which a relief-like decoration is formed, and a back first right decoration 3163 attached to the front of the right base 3155 on which a relief-like decoration is formed; It is attached to the center of the front lower edge of the light plate 3110 in the left-right direction, and is attached to the back side of the back first lower decoration 3164 and the back first lower decoration 3164 on which a relief-like decoration is formed. And a back first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of emitting light toward the end are mounted.

  The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a notch 3111 cut upward in a semicircular arc shape at the center in the left-right direction at the lower edge. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by light emitted from the upper surface, and a second pattern that emits light by light emitted from the left surface. The first pattern and the second pattern are patterns different from each other. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, a 1st pattern is formed so that a light emission aspect may differ with LED3121 made to light among several LED3121 of the back 1st upper decoration board | substrate 3120. FIG.

  In the back first upper decoration substrate 3120 and the back first left decoration substrate 3130, the LEDs 3121 and the LEDs 3131 mounted on the back first upper decoration substrate 3120 and the back first left decoration substrate 3130 are full color LEDs. In addition, the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three in the vertical direction. Since the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three in the vertical direction so as to correspond. The first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light by causing the LED 3121 of the back first upper decoration substrate 3120 to emit light, and the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 is caused by causing the LED 3131 of the back first left decoration substrate 3130 to emit light. The pattern can be made to emit light.

  The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are formed in a strip shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. There is.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions extending in a circular arc concentrically with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and the upper and lower portions are open It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decoration 3164 has a plurality of three-row decorations arranged in a circular arc at the front. In addition, the back first lower decoration 3164 has projections extending radially so as to pass through portions of the respective three-fold decoration. These radially extending protrusions are long outward from the three-tiered decoration and short in the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is a transparent member provided with a vapor deposition layer having metallic gloss of a predetermined color and light transmissivity. The back first lower decorative body 3164 can visually recognize the front side decoration from the player side in a good state by the metallic gloss vapor deposition layer in a state where the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 is not made to emit light. .

  In the back first lower decoration substrate 3170, the LED 3171 is mounted at a position behind the portion of the three-fold decoration in the back first lower decoration 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 are made to emit light, the whole of the back first lower decoration 3164 can be made to emit light and decoration, and the three-row decoration part can be made to emit light and make a brighter decoration. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 are full color LEDs.

  In a state where the back first rendering unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends to the front of the transparent panel plate 1110 and approximately to the front of the stage 2503 of the center character 2500, The second pattern can be illuminated and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 25 etc., the back first first rendering unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, and the back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163. Are located near the upper edge, the left edge, and the right edge, respectively, in the game area 5a.

  In addition, the back first lower decorative body 3164 is positioned immediately above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting opening 2002. . The back first lower decorative body 3164 can decorate the outer side of the rotary decorative body 3210 located at the lowermost specific position among the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 of the back second rendering unit 3200. Therefore, a special feeling (or a feeling of premium) can be given to the rotary decorative body 3210 at a specific position by the back first lower decorative body 3164.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 40 to 47 and the like. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the back second rendering unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the back second rendering unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the back It is a figure. FIG. 44 is a front view showing a mechanism of drive in the back second rendering unit. Fig.45 (a)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the some rotation decoration body in a back 2nd rendering unit, FIG.46 (e)-(g) is in the back 2nd rendering unit which continues from FIG. 45 It is an explanatory view showing movement of a plurality of rotation ornaments. FIG. 47 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs in the back second rendering unit.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first rendering unit 3100 and the back third rendering unit 3300. The back second rendering unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (in this case, twelve) rotary ornaments 3210 that rotate in a revolving manner. Each of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 has shaft portions 3210 a cylindrically projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface. The plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 have translucency. A plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 are provided in front of a second back outer decoration 3228 and a second rear inner decoration 3229 described later.

  The plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 are composed of a plurality (four in this case) of special rotating ornaments 3211 and the remaining (in this case eight) ordinary rotating ornaments 3212. The special rotating ornaments 3211 are equally spaced in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (two in this case) of ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotary decorative body 3211 is decorated with three folds. The special rotary decorative body 3211 is formed in a red color at the heel portion and in gold color at the other portions with metallic luster, and the whole is translucent. The ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 is decorated with petals. In the case of the normally rotatable decorative body 3212, the petal part is formed in a pink color with metallic luster, the other rim part is formed in a white color, and the whole is translucent.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a rectangular outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220 a at the center, and an annular fixed gear portion 3220 b larger in diameter than the through hole 3220 a, and a unit base It is rotatably attached to the front of the 3220, and penetrates back and forth at fixed intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210 is rotatable And an annular drive ring 3221 having a plurality of axial holes 3221a inserted into the ring and an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of axial holes 3221a.

  In addition, the back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and the rotation shaft projects through the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward, and the back second drive motor 3222 A spur gear-like drive gear 3223 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3222 meshes with the drive gear 3223 and also meshes with the ring gear portion 3221 b of the drive ring 3221 and can be rotated by the unit base 3220 Gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 attached to each other, and a rotation gear 3225 fixed respectively to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210 a of the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 and engaged with the fixed gear portion 3220 b of the unit base 3220 And.

  In addition, the back second rendering unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through hole 3226a having a square outer shape and a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The outer base 3226 and the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 are provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and the outer shape is a circle slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221 The inner base 3227 has a polygonal through hole 3227a at the center, and is attached to the front of the outer base 3226. The outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer base 3226 and the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 Back second outer side with through holes 3228a of even smaller diameter It is attached to the front of the inner base 3227 in the decorative body 3228 and the through-hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the circular outer through-hole 3229a is larger in outer diameter than the outer diameter of the inner base 3227 And an annular back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 inserted in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 and attached to the unit base 3220. And.

  Furthermore, the back second effect unit 3200 is a special rotating rotational sensor that detects that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating is located at the lowermost position. And a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotary decorative body 3211 is positioned at the lowermost specific position.

  Also, the back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the outside base 3226 and the inside base 3227 between the outside base 3226 and the inside base 3227 and the back second outside decoration 3228 and the back second inside decoration 3229 The rear second decorative substrate 3240 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting the LED 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240, the light emitting decoration of the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 can be performed.

  The unit base 3220 is transparent and flat. In the drive ring 3221, a plurality of shaft holes 3221a are formed in the same number as the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding to the center side are arranged at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The number of parts projecting in a trapezoidal shape is the same as that of the rotary decorative body 3210 (12 in this case). In the present embodiment, twelve trapezoidally projecting portions are provided at an angle of 30 degrees clockwise from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

  The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c projecting from the inner circumference to the center of the portion corresponding to the plurality of axial holes 3221a. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further to the center side from the detection pieces 3221 c arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (here, two) of detection pieces 3221 c among the plurality of detection pieces 3221 c. (Four in this case) special detection pieces 3221d. That is, the drive ring 3221 of this embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotary decoration 3210, and has the same number (4) special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotary decoration 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

  The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed to the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and flat. The outer base 3226 is divided into four at a vertical line passing through the center of the through hole 3226 a and a horizontal line, and each of the outer base 3226 is attached to the unit base 3220.

  The inner base 3227 has the same inner peripheral shape as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a. The inner base 3227 is transparent and flat. The inner base 3227 is divided into four, with a vertical line passing through the center and a horizontal line bordering a cross line rotated approximately 20 degrees in the clockwise direction, each of which is attached to the unit base 3220 There is. In this embodiment, since the division part of the inner base 3227 divided into four is made different from the division part of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is compared with the case where the respective division parts are the same. When the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to each other, strength and rigidity can be improved.

  The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed in the same shape and size as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. The inner diameter of the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the same circumference along which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a red annular decorative portion 3228b provided in an annular shape with a certain width outward from the through hole 3227a, and upper two corners of four corners outside the annular decorative portion 3228b. And a corner decoration 3228c provided on the The annular decorative portion 3228 b is decorated with the leaves of the stylized plant arranged circumferentially in a certain pattern. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated to imitate a windbreak. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is provided with a vapor-deposited layer having metallic luster and transparency. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four in the same manner as the outer base 3226.

  The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter slightly smaller than the same circumference along which a plurality of axial holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is formed to have the same size and the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227. The back second inner decoration 3229 is a red decoration in which the leaves of the stylized plant are circumferentially arranged in a certain pattern so as to be paired with the annular decoration 3228 b of the back second outer decoration 3228 Is applied. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a vapor-deposited layer having metallic luster and light transmissivity. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four in the same manner as the inner base 3227.

  The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is formed so as to connect the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the rear second inner decorative body 3229 in the front-rear direction. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 is provided with a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency.

  The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the back second decoration substrate 3240. The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the lowermost detection piece 3221 c among the plurality of detection pieces 3221 c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 44).

  The special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227, and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 has moved by one in the clockwise direction from the lowermost portion of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 (a 30 degree rotation Mounted at the location of the protruding trapezoid in position (see FIG. 44).

  In the back second decorative substrate 3240, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front is a full color LED. The outer second decorative substrate 3240 has a rectangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240 a is formed at the center. In addition, in the back second decorative substrate 3240, an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape is formed on the outer peripheral side than the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226 and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the inner base 3227. The back second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight parts so as to correspond to the divided parts of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 which are divided into four parts, respectively.

  Subsequently, the movement of the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 in the back second rendering unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the shaft portions 3210a projecting backward from each of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 from the front, the inner circumference of the back second outside decoration 3228 and the back second inside decoration 3229 Between the outer periphery of the back second decorative substrate 3240 and between the inner periphery of the outer base 3226 and the outer periphery of the inner base 3227 so as to be rotatable in the shaft hole 3221 a of the drive ring 3221 While being inserted, the rear end projects rearward from the drive ring 3221 through the axial hole 3221 a. A rotary gear 3225 engaged with the fixed gear 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210.

  Of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210, the four special rotary ornaments 3211 move one counterclockwise from the axial hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 in front view The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotary ornament 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. In the remaining eight ordinary rotary decorations 3212, the respective shafts 3210a are inserted in the remaining shaft holes into which the shafts 3210a of the special rotary decoration 3211 are not inserted.

  In the back second rendering unit 3200 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 44 etc., in the normal state, four special rotary ornaments 3211 out of twelve rotary ornaments 3210 have a revolving orbit. It is located at both ends in the up and down direction on the circumference and both ends in the left and right direction. In other words, the four special rotating ornaments 3211 are located at three o'clock, six o'clock, nine o'clock and twelve o'clock on the watch, and the remaining eight ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the six o'clock position is set as the specific position of the rotary ornament 3210.

  In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221 c of the drive ring 3221 and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221 d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. See 44).

  When the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 25 etc., a plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 are arranged in a circle along the periphery of the game area 5a, and both left and right sides , And all the rotating ornaments 3210 can be viewed in a good condition from the front. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which is disposed to the rear, is inserted from the front through the through hole 3229a (the back second inner circumference ornament 3230) of the back second inner decoration 3229. It can be viewed in good condition.

  Then, in the normal state, the rotary decorative body 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock portion which is the lowest end is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first rendering unit 3100 , And the outer side is in a state of being decorated by the back first lower decoration 3164. In addition, the rotary decoration 3210 at a specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002, and can decorate the rear of the first starting opening 2002.

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3223 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 meshing with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221 b meshing with the transmission gear 3224 The drive ring 3221 rotates clockwise. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotary decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

  At this time, since the rotary gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210 is in mesh with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, along with the movement of the shaft portion 3210a in the circumferential direction The rotary gear 3225 rotates around the shaft portion 3210 a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, the clockwise direction). Thus, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

  In the present embodiment, when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, the gear ratio of the fixed gear portion 3220 b of the unit base 3220 to the rotary gear 3225 is configured such that each rotary ornament 3210 rotates by one rotation. .

  As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 revolve while rotating on their own axis, and when the ordinary rotary ornament 3212 is positioned at the specific position, the rotational position is rotated. The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 45A).

  Then, when the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction, and the special rotary decoration 3211 approaches a specific position, the ordinary rotary decoration in front of the special rotary decoration 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the axial hole 3221a in which the axial portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 (FIG. 45 (b) to (d) and FIG. 46 (e ), (F)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotary decoration 3211 reaches a specific position, the special rotation decorative body 3211 corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 into which the shaft portion 3210a is inserted. While detecting the detection piece 3221c being detected by the rotational position detection sensor 3231, the axial hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotary decoration 3212 one before the rotational direction of the special rotary decoration 3211 is inserted The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 46 (g)). That is, when the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above to rotate the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 in the counterclockwise direction in the opposite direction to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

  Subsequently, a light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Each of the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 is a full-color LED with high brightness. Regardless of the decoration color of the rotating decoration 3210, the back second outside decoration 3228 and the back second inside decoration 3229 arranged on the front side, these LEDs 3241 can cause the player side to emit the emitted color. it can. That is, the light emitting color of the LED 3241 enables the light emitting decoration of the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 to be performed with an appropriate color.

  The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 are provided 12 in the area behind the respective rotation ornaments 3210 in a state (normal state) in which the rotation ornaments 3210 are stopped at specific positions. , The 12 middle LED groups 3255 provided between the respective rotating decoration LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decoration 3228c of the back second outside decoration 3228. Upper left corner LED group 3256 and upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at the position to be positioned, lower left corner LED group 3258 provided behind the side unit 2200 and at lower left corner, start opening unit 2100 and side A winning opening LED group 3259 provided in a portion behind the general winning opening 2001 of each of the units 2200. .

  The 12 rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 have a portion behind the lowermost specific position as a first rotating decorative body LED group 3250 a in a clockwise direction, a second rotating decorative body LED group 3250 b, a third rotation Decorative body LED group 3250c, fourth rotational decorative body LED group 3250d, fifth rotational decorative body LED group 3250e, sixth rotational decorative body LED group 3250f, seventh rotational decorative body LED group 3250g, eighth rotational decorative body LED group 3250h The ninth rotation decorative body LED group 3250i, the tenth rotation decorative body LED group 3250j, the eleventh rotation decorative body LED group 3250k, and the twelfth rotation decorative body LED group 3250l are provided. In the 12 rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, each LED 3241 provided is capable of emitting light independently.

  In each of the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the radiation passing from the center of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 through the rotational center of the rotating decorative body 3210 and the rotational center of the rotating decorative body 3210 around the rotational center of the rotating decorative body 3210 And a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. The four first LED groups 3251, the second LED groups 3252, the third LED groups 3253, and the fourth LED groups 3254 that constitute one rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are each provided with LEDs 3241, It is possible to emit light independently

  The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is on the side of the center of revolution (inner side) than the rotational center of the rotating decorative body 3210, in the counterclockwise direction of rotation of radiation passing through the rotational center of the rotating decorative body 3210 positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the first LED group 3251 with respect to the rotation center side of the rotary decorative body 3210 with respect to the rotation center side. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (side in the clockwise direction) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotary decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the third LED group 3253 from the center of rotation of the rotary decorative body 3210 with respect to the center of revolution.

  The 12 middle LED groups 3255 have a portion adjacent in the clockwise direction to the lowermost specific position as the first middle LED group 3255a in the clockwise direction, the second middle LED group 3255b, Third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, fifth The tenth intermediate LED group 3255 j, the eleventh intermediate LED group 3255 k, and the twelfth intermediate LED group 3255 l are provided.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 according to the present embodiment causes the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 to emit light among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration substrate 3240 in a normal state. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be lighted and decorated. That is, 12 circular luminous ornaments arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, light emission decoration can be performed in different colors for each rotation decoration body 3210, or the special rotation decoration body 3211 can be light emission decoration in a different color with respect to the normal rotation decoration body 3212.

  Further, by making the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 emit light in the circumferential direction in order, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decorative body LED group 3250 emits light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating ornament body LED groups 3250 is compensated by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, and it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that turns more smoothly.

  Further, since each of the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 is divided into four, ie, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254, for example, After emitting the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, and subsequently, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are adjacent to each other. When the middle LED group 3255 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that turns more smoothly and a light emission effect that turns in small increments. When the above-described light-emitting effect is performed according to the revolving speed of the rotating ornament 3210 while revolving the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 while rotating, LEDs are provided on the rotating ornament 3210 itself as well. It is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light as if it is.

  Furthermore, in each of the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, for example, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, the first LED group 3251, ... By emitting light in the proper order, it is possible to show the player such a light emission effect that light is rotating in one rotating decoration body LED group 3250. Thus, when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped in the normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light in order, It is possible for the player to have an illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (rotation) without being revolved.

  Further, for example, when the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light in the respective rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light emission effect such as moving and spreading. Alternatively, after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the player is shown a luminous effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Further, when the respective LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the middle LED group 3255 are caused to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to show the annular emission decoration to the player. At this time, by making the luminance of the light emission decoration high, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the shape of the rotary decoration 3210 or the like (to make the shape difficult to see). Thereby, for example, in a state in which the rotary decorative body 3210 is obscured and light is emitted in an annular shape by raising the luminance, the position of the special rotary decorative body 3211 is changed by revolving while rotating the rotary decorative body 3210, After that, the luminance can be lowered or the light can be turned off to make the rotating decorative body 3210 easier to see, thereby making it possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is moving before and after.

  As described above, according to the back second rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various emissions are generated by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240. It is possible to make a presentation. In addition, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player and to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 48 to 52 and the like. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back It is a figure. FIG. 52 is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decoration substrate in the back third rendering unit with the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200.

  The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010, and has a rectangular frame-like unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the front of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided at the lower part of the front of the unit, a left unit 3350 provided at the left of the front of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided at the right of the front of the unit base 3301 And have.

  The upper unit 3310 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is attached to the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 mounted so as to be openable and closable in the vicinity of the center in the horizontal direction at the upper part of the unit base 3301 and the rear side of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 The upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315 and the back third upper drive motor 3320 attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 with the rotation axis projecting to the rear of the unit base 3301 and the back third upper drive A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, a rotation link member 3322 rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3321 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3322 Slide vertically to open and close the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 That the slide link member 3323, and a.

  The upper unit 3310 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the open / close position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the front side. The slide link member 3323 is biased in the direction in which the front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 are closed. And an upper spring 3327.

  The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 has a first decorative body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose proximal end extends back and forth, and a right side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3312 And a second decorative body 3313 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the back and forth direction. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 linearly extend from the proximal end side in a straight line, and from the tip, the extension of the straight line portion is substantially semicircular so that the inside of the antinode of the chord faces After extending in a direction away from the proximal side, the antinodes of the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the same direction in the same direction and extending in the direction away from the proximal side.

  The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend from the proximal side to the distal side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large diameter large diameter decorative portions 3311 a and six small diameter small diameter decorative portions 3311 b along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 side with the axial hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3312a. A long gear link slit 3312d extending through the first gear portion 3312b, the link piece 3312c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the distal end side, and the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a And. In the link slit 3312 d, a transmission pin 3323 b of a slide link member 3323 to be described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3313 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side with the axial hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3313a. And a second gear portion 3313 b meshing with the first gear portion 3312 b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 by the engagement of the first gear portion 3312 b and the second gear portion 3313 b. As a result, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 moves so that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 open and close the tip end centering on the base end side.

  The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3311b The second LED 3317 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

  The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 is provided with a spur gear-like transmission gear portion 3322 a meshing with the drive gear 3321 and a crank pin 3322 b cylindrically protruding forward from the eccentric position. The crank pin 3322 b of the rotation link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323 a of a slide link member 3323 described later.

  The slide link member 3323 has the base end side located near the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the tip end side is the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (a part where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is rotatably supported ) Extends to the left and right, and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left and right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends in the vertical direction on the base end side and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and projects forward cylindrically at the distal end side. A transmission pin 3323 b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312 d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323 c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is positioned to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and the lower end is positioned below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322 and is directed to the tip side As it is bent. In addition, the slide link member 3323 has a collar portion 3323 d on which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is latched. The slide link member 3323 is always urged to the right by the upper spring 3327 hooked to the collar 3323 d.

  In the upper unit 3310, in the normal state, the slide link member 3323 is located at the moving end to the right, and the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are most distant from each other, and the upper vertical ring The decorative body 3311 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are respectively located near the upper edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3322 b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at a bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323 a in the slide link member 3323. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

  In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are far from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, so gravity applied to each of them. A rotational moment acts on each of the distal end sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to be left via the link slit 3312 d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323 b of the slide link member 3323. The force to move it is acting. The force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the left acts on the crank pin 3322 b via the transmission slit 3323 a of the slide link member 3323 to move to the left.

  In the normal state, since the crankpin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3322), the crankpin 3322b is rotated clockwise so that the crankpin 3322b moves downward and to the left. Trying to revolve in the direction, but because the crankpin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b can not revolve further clockwise, and the crankpin 3322b revolves. There is no. That is, in the normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. It is locked in the state, and the load on the back third upper drive motor 3320 from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side is shut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3322 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 ascends within the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the biasing force of the upper spring 3327. When the slide link member 3323 moves leftward, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the tip end side moves downward via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip. The second decorative body 3313 is rotated clockwise around the shaft hole 3313 a by the second gear portion 3313 b rotating in the direction and meshing with the first gear portion 3312 b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

  Further, as the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323 c also moves to the left together, so the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3322 b of the rotation link member 3322 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3322 b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323 a and then slides downward, and the crank pin 3322 b is normal. If it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the lower end (lower than the revolution center) of the transmission slit 3323a, the driving of the back third upper drive motor 3320 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 each rotate 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

  In the state of this appearance position, a force is exerted to move the slide link member 3323 to the right by the biasing force of the upper spring 3327. Therefore, the crank pin 3322b is transmitted to the crank pin 3322b through the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. A force is acting to move it to the right. In the state of this appearance position, since the crankpin 3322b is located below with respect to the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322), the crankpin 3322b rotates counterclockwise so that the crankpin 3322b moves downward and rightward. However, because the crankpin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b can not revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3322b revolves around. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, even if the force from the upper spring 3327 or the like acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side), and the state of the appearance position as closed. The load on the back third upper drive motor 3320 is shut off from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips come in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) is in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the state of being located. In the case of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is kept until the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the reverse direction.

  As described above, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 by a constant current drive method, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is at the standby position and the appearance position It can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The lower unit 3330 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is attached to the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 which is attached so as to be able to open and close in the vicinity of the center in the horizontal direction at the lower part of the unit base 3301 and the rear side of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 and the lower third corner drive motor 3340 attached to the lower left corner of the front of the unit base 3301 with the rotation axis projecting to the rear of the unit base 3301 and the lower third lower drive A spur gear-like drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotation link member 3342 which is rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3341 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3342 Slide horizontally to open and close the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 That the slide link member 3343, and a.

  The lower unit 3330 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the open / close position of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the front side. The slide link member 3343 is biased in the direction in which the front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 close. And a lower spring 3347.

  The lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 has a first decorative body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose proximal end extends back and forth, and a left side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3332. And a second decorative body 3333 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a straight line from the proximal end side in a short straight line, and from the tip of the straight line, the extension line of the straight line portion is approximately semicircular After extending in a direction away from the proximal side, the antinodes of the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the same direction in the same direction and extending in the direction away from the proximal side.

  The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend from the proximal side to the distal side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large diameter large diameter decorative portions 3331a and six small diameter small diameter decorative portions 3331b along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 side with the axial hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3332a. A long gear link slit 3332d extending through the first gear portion 3332b, the link piece 3332c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a And. In the link slit 3332d, a transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3333 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 side with the axial hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3333a. And a second gear portion 3333 b meshing with the first gear portion 3332 b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 by the engagement of the first gear portion 3332 b and the second gear portion 3333 b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 moves so that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 open and close the tip end centering on the base end side.

  The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3331b And the second LED 3337 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

  The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor with a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third lower drive motor 3340 at the right of the back third lower drive motor 3340. The rotary link member 3342 is provided with a spur gear-like transmission gear portion 3342a which meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b cylindrically projecting forward from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3342 b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343 a of a slide link member 3343 described later.

  The slide link member 3343 has a base end located near the back third lower drive motor 3340 and a tip end located in the lateral center of the unit base 3301 (a portion of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 supported rotatably ) Extends to the left and right, and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left and right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 extends vertically on the base end side and has a transmission slit 3343a into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotation link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and projects forward cylindrically at the distal end side. A transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332 and a detection piece 3343c detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and the upper end thereof is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342 and goes to the tip side. As it is bent. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a collar portion 3343 d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is latched. The slide link member 3343 is always urged leftward by the lower spring 3347 that is hooked to the collar portion 3343 d.

  In the lower unit 3330, in the normal state, the slide link member 3343 is located at the left moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are most distant from each other and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are respectively located near the lower edge of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 in the frame. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3342 b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at a bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343 a in the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

  In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, so gravity applied to each of them. A rotational moment acts on each of the distal end sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3343 to be right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force to move it is acting. The force to move the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342 b via the transmission slit 3343 a of the slide link member 3343 to move to the right.

  In the normal state, since the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3342), the crankpin 3342b rotates clockwise so that the crankpin 3342b moves upward and to the right. Trying to revolve in the direction, but because the crankpin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crankpin 3342b can not revolve further in the clockwise direction, and the crankpin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in the normal state, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is not further opened even when a force from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 acts, and is locked in the standby position, and the lower vertical The load on the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off from the ring decorative body 3331 side.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the biasing force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side moves upward by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip via the link slit 3332d. The second decorative body 3333 rotates clockwise around the shaft hole 3333 a by the second gear portion 3333 b rotating in the direction and meshing with the first gear portion 3332 b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (as the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 closes).

  Further, as the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343 c also moves to the right together, so the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crankpin 3342b of the rotation link member 3342 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, and after the crankpin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a, the crankpin 3342b slides upward, and the crankpin 3342b becomes normal. If it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the revolution center), the driving of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

  In the state of this appearance position, a force is exerted to move the slide link member 3343 to the left by the biasing force of the lower spring 3347, so the crank pin 3342 b is transmitted through the transmission slit 3343 a of the slide link member 3343. The force to move to the left is acting. In the state of this appearance position, since the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotating link member 3342), the crankpin 3342b rotates counterclockwise so that the crankpin 3342b moves upward and leftward. However, since the crankpin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crankpin 3342b can not revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3342b revolves. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open (move to the standby position side) even when a force from the lower spring 3347 or the like acts, and the state of the appearance position as closed. , And the load on the back third lower drive motor 3340 from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side is shut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips come in contact with each other, and each rotate 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333) is in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the state of being located. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is operated until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the reverse direction.

  As described above, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical lower ring decorative body 3331 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

  Further, in this embodiment, the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third lower drive motor 3340 by a constant current drive method, and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is at the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The left side unit 3350 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is on the rear side of the left side ring decoration 3351 and the left side ring decoration 3351 mounted so as to be openable and closable in the vicinity of the vertical center of the left side A left lateral ring decorative substrate 3355 is attached, and a back third left drive motor 3360 attached to the upper left corner of the front of the unit base 3301 and whose rotation axis protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301; A spur gear-like drive gear 3361 attached to the rotational shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotational link member 3362 which is rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3361 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotational link member 3362 Slide left and right to rotate the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 That the slide link member 3363, and a.

  The left unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 and a left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the open / close position of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 And a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

  The left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 has a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be pivotable about an axis whose proximal end extends back and forth, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3352 And a second decorative body 3353 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front and back direction. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line except for a part. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a straight line from the proximal end side in a short straight line, and from the tip of the straight line, the extension line of the straight line portion is substantially semicircular After extending in a direction away from the proximal side, the antinodes of the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the same direction in the same direction and extending in the direction away from the proximal side.

  The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend from the proximal side to the distal side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large diameter large diameter decorative portions 3351a and six small diameter small diameter decorative portions 3351b along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 side with the axial hole 3352a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3352a. First gear portion 3352 b, link piece 3352 c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip side, and long link slit 3352 d extending through the link piece 3352 c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352 a And. In the link slit 3352 d, a transmission pin 3363 b of a slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 side centering on the axial hole 3353a and the axial hole 3353a which are rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side And a second gear portion 3353 b engaged with the first gear portion 3352 b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 by the engagement of the first gear portion 3352 b and the second gear portion 3353 b. Thereby, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 moves so that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 open and close the distal end side centering on the proximal end side.

  The left horizontal ring decorative substrate 3355 is attached to the rear face of each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, and the first LED 3356 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3351a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3351b And the second LED 3357 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

  The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360 below the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotation link member 3362 includes a spur gear transmission gear portion 3362a which meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b cylindrically projecting forward from an eccentric position. The crankpin 3362 b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363 a of a slide link member 3363 described later.

  The slide link member 3363 has a base end located near the back third left drive motor 3360 and a tip end located at the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (a portion of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 supported rotatably It extends vertically to the vicinity, and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right on the proximal end side and has a transmission slit 3363a into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotation link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and a cylindrical shape projecting forward on the distal end side A transmission pin 3363 b slidably inserted into the link slit 3352 d of the decorative body 3352 and a detection piece 3363 c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the proximal end side.

  The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is positioned below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and the right end is positioned to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362 and is directed to the tip side As it is bent.

  In the left unit 3350, in the normal state, the slide link member 3363 is located at the upward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are most distant from each other and the left lateral ring The decorative body 3351 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In the normal state, the crankpin 3362 b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363 a of the slide link member 3363. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3363 c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 approach vertical lines passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is greater than the rotation centers It is located to the right. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the rotational moment trying to rotate in the clockwise direction respectively acts, but the first gear portion 3352b and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 Since the second gear portion 3353 b of the second decorative body 3353 is engaged with each other, the rotational moment applied to each is offset and maintained in the standby position. Thus, from the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 side, the force for sliding the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3352 d and the transmission pin 3363 b, and the left lateral ring decoration There is almost no load from the body 3351 side to the back third left drive motor 3360.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is left in the transmission slit 3363a. It revolves to slide in the direction, and the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 moves counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3352a so that the tip end side moves upward by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip via the link slit 3352d. The second decorative body 3353 is rotated clockwise around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b which is rotated to the first gear portion 3352b and in mesh with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so that they approach each other (as the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

  Further, when the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363 c also moves downward together, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crankpin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, and after the crankpin 3362b slides in the transmission slit 3363a leftward, it slides rightward, and the crankpin 3362b If it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is located near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (rightward from the center of revolution), the driving of the back third left drive motor 3360 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 approach each other so that the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

  In the state of this appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 extend from the respective pivot centers to the right, so the first decorative body 3352 The first and second gear 3352 b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have rotational moments acting to rotate in the clockwise direction respectively acting on the second decorative body 3353. Since the second gear portion 3353b is in mesh with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moment applied thereto is offset and maintained in the state of the appearance position. Thus, from the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 side, the force for sliding the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3352 d and the transmission pin 3363 b, and the left lateral ring decoration There is almost no load from the body 3351 side to the back third left drive motor 3360.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are not rotated until their respective tips come in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 (the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353) is in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the state of being located. In the case of moving the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is kept until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the reverse direction.

  Thus, in the left unit 3350, the back side third upper drive motor 3320 can open and close the left lateral ring decoration 3351 between the state of the open standby position and the state of the closed appearance position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third left drive motor 3360 by a constant current drive method, and the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is at the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The right side unit 3370 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is on the rear side of the right side ring decoration 3371 and the right side ring decoration 3371 which are mounted so as to be openable and closable in the vicinity of the vertical center of the right side The right horizontal ring decoration substrate 3375 attached, and the back third right drive motor 3380 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the unit base 3301 with the rotation axis projecting to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotation link member 3382 rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3381 and rotatably mounted to the unit base 3301, and a rotation link member 3382 Slide in the vertical direction by opening and closing the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 That the slide link member 3383, and a.

  The right unit 3370 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the front side with a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the open / close position of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 And a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

  The right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 has a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose proximal end extends back and forth, and an upper side on the proximal side of the first decorative body 3372 And a second decorative body 3373 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line except for a part. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 linearly extend short from the proximal end side, and from the tip, the extension of the linear portion is substantially semicircular so that the inside of the antinode of the chord faces After extending in a direction away from the proximal side, the antinodes of the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the same direction in the same direction and extending in the direction away from the proximal side.

  The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend from the proximal side to the distal side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large diameter large diameter decorative portions 3371a and six small diameter small diameter decorative portions 3371b along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 side with the axial hole 3372a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 at the base end side and the axial hole 3372a. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the distal end side, and an elongated hole-like link slit 3372d penetrating through the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a And. In the link slit 3372 d, a transmission pin 3383 b of a slide link member 3383 to be described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3373 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 side with the axial hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the axial hole 3373a. And a second gear portion 3373 b meshing with the first gear portion 3372 b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 by the engagement of the first gear portion 3372 b and the second gear portion 3373 b. Thereby, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 moves so that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 can be opened and closed on the distal end side centering on the proximal end side.

  The right horizontal ring decorative substrate 3375 is attached to the rear face of each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, and the first LED 3376 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3371a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3371b And a second LED 3377. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

  The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380 above the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotation link member 3382 includes a spur gear transmission gear 3382a engaged with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b cylindrically projecting forward from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3382 b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383 a of a slide link member 3383 described later.

  The slide link member 3383 has a base end located near the back third right drive motor 3380 and a tip end located at the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (a portion of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 supported rotatably It extends vertically to the vicinity, and is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 has a transmission slit 3383a which extends leftward and rightward on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and projects forward cylindrically at the tip end side. A transmission pin 3383 b slidably inserted into the link slit 3372 d of the decorative body 3372 and a detection piece 3383 c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is positioned above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and the left end is positioned to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and It is bent to the other side.

  In the normal state of the right unit 3370, the slide link member 3383 is located at the upward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are most distant from each other and the right lateral ring The decorative body 3371 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are respectively positioned near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in the normal state, the crankpin 3382 b of the rotary link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383 a in the slide link member 3383. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3383 c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

  In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 approach vertical lines passing through the respective rotational centers, and the center of gravity is greater than the rotational centers It is located on the left side. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moment trying to rotate in the counterclockwise direction respectively acts, but with the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 Since the second gear portion 3373 b of the second decorative body 3373 is in mesh with each other, the rotational moment applied to each is offset and maintained in the standby position. Thus, from the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 side, the force for sliding the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3382 d and the transmission pin 3383 b, and the right horizontal ring decoration There is almost no load from the body 3371 side to the back third right drive motor 3380.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3382 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is in the right direction in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 is moved clockwise around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip end side moves upward by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip via the link slit 3372d. The second decorative body 3373 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3373 a by the second gear portion 3373 b which is rotated and meshed with the first gear portion 3372 b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so that they approach each other (as the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 closes).

  In addition, when the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383 c also moves downward together, so the right detection sensor 3384 enters a non-detection state.

  Then, the crankpin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, so that the crankpin 3382b slides in the transmission slit 3383a rightward and then slides leftward, and the crankpin 3382b normally In the state of {circle over (1)}, the drive of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped if it is located 180 degrees or more from the state of < / RTI > In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are close to each other so that the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 each rotate 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

  In the state of this appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 extend leftward from their respective pivot centers, so the first decorative body 3372 The first gear portion 3372 b and the second decorative body 3373 of the first decorative body 3372 act on the rotational moment for rotating in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the second decorative body 3373. Since the second gear portion 3373b is engaged with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portion 3373b and the second gear portion 3373b is offset and maintained at the appearance position. Thus, from the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 side, the force for sliding the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3372 d and the transmission pin 3383 b, and the right horizontal ring decoration There is almost no load from the body 3371 side to the back third right drive motor 3380.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 do not rotate until their respective tips come in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 (the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) is in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the state of being located. When the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is kept until the detection piece 3383 c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the reverse direction.

  As described above, in the right unit 3370, the right lateral ring decoration 3371 can be opened and closed between the open standby position and the closed appearance position by the back third right drive motor 3380.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third right drive motor 3380 by a constant current drive method, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is at the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third rendering unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided further to the rear than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331.

  In this embodiment, a two-phase stepping motor is used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, 200 pps (one pulse width is 5 ms) with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 attached. It is possible to drive itself even if it excites with a pulse of 200 pps without slow-up processing from the stop state.

  In addition, the movement is completed in 130 steps from the standby position to the appearance position of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, so [130 step × 5 ms = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear and save (appear / save) in 650 ms.

  Subsequently, movable presentation using the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 in the back third rendering unit 3300 will be described. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are in the standby state in the normal state. ing. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are in the standby position, the back second of the back second rendering unit 3200 arranged forward. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229, and is not visible from the front (the player side).

  In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 from the standby position to the emergence position, At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 in front view, the tip of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 approach each other, and the decoration in which three rings are vertically aligned (upper and lower) It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 55).

  When the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in the normal state to move the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the emergence position. At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 in the front view, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 approach each other, and the three rings are arranged side by side (left and right) Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 56).

  Furthermore, in the normal state, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively, in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 in front view While the tip of the ring decoration 3311 comes close to the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 comes close to the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Rings can be presented to the player with decorations arranged in a cross (see FIG. 57).

  Further, in the back third rendering unit 3300, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 Is moved from the standby position to an intermediate position from the standby position to the emergent position, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 (first The distal end portion of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) is located inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in a front view, and partially on the player side (See FIG. 58). In this state, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 and two right horizontal ring decorative bodies 3371 Since the two tips appear at the upper and lower right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, changing the inner circumferential shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 it can.

  As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving it to the appearance position, it is possible to make the decoration of the rings arranged vertically, horizontally or in a cross, and to show the player various colorful effects.

  In addition, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355, the right horizontal ring By appropriately emitting the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are lighted and decorated Since it can be made to show, various luminous effects can be shown to a player.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 61 and the like. FIG. 53 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second rendering unit are revolved 15 degrees while being rotated in the clockwise direction from the normal state. FIG. 54 is an enlarged front view showing the lower portion of the game board in a state in which the special rotary decorative body in the back second rendering unit has been moved to the specific position. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body in the back third rendering unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board showing the left horizontal ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third rendering unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body, the lower vertical ring decorative body, the left horizontal ring decorative body, and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third rendering unit moved to the appearance position is there. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third rendering unit in the state of being moved to the middle of the appearance position.

  Further, FIG. 59 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a failure occurs in the back side third effect unit. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect performed during a light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko machine shown with the game board facing from the game window of the door frame.

  In the game board 5, a panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a start opening unit 2100, a side unit, 2200, an attacker unit 2400, a center character 2500 etc. Since it is formed transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 25 etc., an effect image being displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them, a back unit 3000 A plurality of rotations in the back first upper decoration body 3161, the back first left decoration body 3162, the back first right decoration body 3163, the back first lower decoration body 3164, and the second back second effect unit 3200 in Decoration body 3210 (special rotation decoration body 3211 and ordinary rotation decoration body 3212), back second outside decoration 3228, back second inside Kazaritai 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognize the.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 25 and the like, among the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 in the back second rendering unit 3200, four special rotary ornaments 3211 are at both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the orbit. , Located at both ends in the left-right direction. That is, one special rotary decorative body 3211 is located at the lowermost specific position on the revolving orbit (the part at 6 o'clock in the watch). The special rotary decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is located at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first rendering unit 3100, and the outer side is the first rear lower decorative body 3164. It is in the state of being decorated by. Further, the special rotary decorative body 3211 (rotary decorative body 3210) at the specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002, and decorates the rear of the first starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 54).

  In the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are each in the standby position By being positioned outside the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in front view, the front has a plurality of rotary decorations 3210, a drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with the decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the like, and is in a state in which it can not be seen from the player side.

  In this normal state, the player side (forward) of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed at the rear through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 Can be viewed in good condition.

  According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the game board 5 is drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, The rendering unit 3100, the back second rendering unit 3200, and the back third rendering unit 3300 perform predetermined movable rendering.

  First, effects using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54, and the like. As an effect using the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the back second drive motor 3222 A movable effect can be performed in which a plurality of (12) rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate in the clockwise direction while revolving in the clockwise direction. Thus, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate around the effect image viewed through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 while rotating, so the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate around the game area 5a can be made lively and player can be entertained.

  As described above, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 in the back first rendering unit 3100 is made to emit light in a state in which the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolved while rotating, Since the substantially circular back first lower part decoration 3164 in which 3210 is orbiting emits light, the player's interest can be directed to the first first lower part decoration 3164. In addition, since the back first lower decoration 3164 stands out, a desired rotation decoration 3210 (special rotation decoration 3211) is in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164 to the player. Depending on whether or not to stop the revolution, the player can be harassing and pounding, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, only the first rotary ornament LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position in the rotary ornament LED group 3250 may be lit. As a result, only the rotary ornament 3210 that passes through the rear side of the back first lower ornament 3164 in the annular ring can be visually recognized well, and the other rotary ornaments 3210 are less likely to be visible. It is possible to show the player an effect such as a roulette or a slot, with the inside of the ring of the window as a window, and to further increase the excitement of whether or not the desired rotary ornament 3210 stops at a specific position. Can.

  Then, when the desired rotary decorative body 3210 (special rotary decorative body 3211) is stopped in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. The first start port 2002 is provided, which makes it possible for the player to have a very high probability of winning a "big hit" if the first start port 2002 receives the game ball B. While being able to urge the player to perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002, the operation of hitting the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  In addition, when revolving the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 while rotating them by driving the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 are appropriately adjusted according to the movement position of each rotating ornament 3210. You may make it light-emit. For example, when one rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves approximately 7 degrees clockwise, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 remain lit, and the first LED group 3251 and the fourth LED group 3250 turn on. The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the middle LED group 3255 is turned on. Furthermore, when the rotary decoration 3210 is reciprocated 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off to turn off the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and turn on only the middle LED group 3255. Leave it as it is.

  Subsequently, when the rotary decoration 3210 is reciprocated about 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 are turned on to make the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group While keeping 3254 turned off, the middle LED group 3255 is kept turned on. Then, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the first position (the next rotary decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to turn the rotary decoration LED The group 3250 is turned on and the middle LED group 3255 is turned off. Thus, the LED 3241 on which the rotary decoration 3210 is positioned on the front is turned on, and the LED 3241 on which the rotary decoration 3210 is not positioned on the front is turned off. It is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 emits light while emitting light as if the LED is provided to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest .

  Also, in the back second rendering unit 3200, in a normal state, after making all the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the middle LED groups 3255 emit light with high brightness, a plurality of rotation decorations are performed by the back second drive motor 3222 The body 3210 is rotated and revolved, and the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 are stopped in a state different from a normal state so that the rotating ornament body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. It is good. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 by causing all the rotary ornament body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 to emit light with high brightness, so the rotary ornaments in that state. By changing the position of 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Moreover, in the back second rendering unit 3200, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration substrate 3240 can be made to emit light as appropriate, the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is compared with the first rotation decoration LED group 3250 a. , Second rotating decoration LED group 3250b, third rotating decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotating decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotating decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotating decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration Body LED Group 3250g, Eighth Rotating Decoration LED Group 3250h, Ninth Rotating Decoration LED Group 3250i, Tenth Rotating Decoration LED Group 3250j, Eleventh Rotating Decoration LED Group 3250k, Twelveth Rotating Decoration LED Group By emitting light (lighting) in order as in 3250 l, it is possible to give the player a light-emitting effect such that light is rotating in a predetermined direction. So it can be, it is possible to entertain the player. When stopping the rotation of the light, the player's expectation can be enhanced depending on at which position the light rotation stops, and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, when stopping the rotation of light, the rotational speed of light is gradually decreased, and in the rotating decoration body LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth The LED group 3254 and further the intermediate LED group 3255 may be lighted in order, and the light may be moved little by little in the rotational direction and slowly stopped. As a result, since the position at which the light stops becomes finer, it can be made difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be harassing and entertaining.

  In addition, as described above, since light can be rotated (turned around), a light emission effect that measures time like a clock and remaining time by turning on and off in the circumferential direction in sequence, and remaining time It is also possible to perform a suggested light emission effect and the like, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, for example, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, the first LED group 3251, ... It may be made to emit light in a certain order. In this way, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light is rotating in one of the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and in a state where the rotating decorative body 3210 is not revolved with respect to the player. It can be illusive as if it is rotating (rotation), and the player can be entertained.

  Further, for example, when the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light in the respective rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light emission effect such as moving and spreading. Alternatively, after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the player is shown a luminous effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Subsequently, the effects using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 from the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are brought close to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 in front view, and the three rings are vertically It is possible to show the player the decorations arranged in line).

  Also, as effects using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 56, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state to decorate the left horizontal ring. The body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the emergence position. As a result, the front end of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the front end of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other at the center of the inner side of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 in front view, and the three rings are The player can see the decorations lined up on the left and right).

  In this embodiment, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position to form a decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side, The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the parts which become the inside of each of the three rings in the display device 1600 It is possible to perform variable display of three symbol rows for suggesting. Thereby, the upper and lower sides of the three symbol rows are displayed as compared with the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed in a state where the left horizontal ring decorative member 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative member 3371 are not moved to the appearance position. The symbol row being variably displayed for the player is a game such as "big hit" because it is in a state of being physically decorated by the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the appearance position. It can be considered that the player is likely to be stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols which are advantageous, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as effects using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 57, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, The third rear right drive motor 3380 is driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively. Move it. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 are brought close to each other at the inner center of the back second inner circumferential ornament 3230 and the left horizontal ring ornament 3351 With the tip and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in close proximity, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which five rings are aligned in a cross.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when all the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it seems to the player that an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the player such as "big hit" is advantageous. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the "big hit" game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. It is good. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, etc. are moved to the appearance position in order, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 may be sequentially moved to the appearance position. As a result, the five rings are aligned in a cross after passing through multiple stages, and it is possible to excite the player by exciting the player depending on whether or not to shift to the next stage in each stage. It can be entertaining.

  By the way, in the back third effect unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are high by a constant current drive method. Since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are driven by torque, they have an extremely short time of one second or less (here, 650 ms). ) From the standby position to the emergence position, or from the emergence position to the standby position. Thus, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 appear and disappear in a moment, giving a strong impact to the player. And can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 And move the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to a position halfway from the standby position to the emergence position. Thus, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) and the distal end portion of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 (the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) However, it is located inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in front view, and can be partially viewed from the player side.

  Specifically, in the state of FIG. 58, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, Two tips of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 appear at the upper right and lower right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. As a result, the shape of the inner side of the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 on which the display screen of the effect display device 1600 faces backward changes, so the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body for the player This can make it easy to notice the movement of 3371, and can allow the player to foresee that something is going to happen and increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  When moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, first, only the tip portion is visible As in the next step, it may be moved to the appearance position. As a result, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player has completely moved to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small steps between the standby position and the player by the shape of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 being changed little by little. Can be made more easily noticed.

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, the first LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355 and the second Second LED 3357, right horizontal ring decoration substrate 3375 of the first LED 3376 and second LED 3377 to emit light appropriately, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration The body 3371 can be illuminated and decorated accordingly. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 moved to the appearance position side can be light emitting and decorated in various light emission modes. , Can entertain the player.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the appearance position in the back third rendering unit 3300. At the same time, as an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 And a similar decorative image 3390 is displayed (see FIG. 59).

  Further, in this embodiment, at least one of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is Even if the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved when they can not move to the appearance position. While keeping them in the standby position and not moving them to the appearance position side, the effect display device 1600 is made to display the decoration image 3390 (see FIG. 59). As a result, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the problem by seeing the decoration image 3390. By recognizing, it is possible to prevent the player from interrupting the game and to feel discomfort, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as effects using the back unit 3000, effects can be performed by appropriately combining the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300. As a result, it is possible to show more various effects to the player and to make it difficult for the player to get bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player a multi-step effect, it is possible to make the player harassing and pounding at each step, and to increase the player's expectation and suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when performing appropriate light emission effect using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, A shadow effect can be performed in which the LED located on the line is extinguished and the line is moved in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a from one side to the other side in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 60). As a result, by turning off the LED on the specific line, a dark part (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player "hug" and make it possible to predict that something will happen and concentrate on the game. The shadow portion 3050 can be moved in the horizontal direction or in the oblique direction as well as in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the above shadow effect can be performed at the time of movable effect by the rotating decoration 3210, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. It can also be executed at the time of switching of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the like. As a result, with the shadow effect as a break, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movable effect, effect image or the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the state where the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 61, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be viewed from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. And, in the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the semi-tubular dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decoration It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decoration 453. In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. Back, dish left upper decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish center upper decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left Since the decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (the game area 5a) can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. The light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  And as above-mentioned, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, since various light emission effects can be performed, the 1st LED group 3251 and 3rd LED group 3253 of the back 2nd rendering unit 3200, for example, 2nd By emitting light in the order of the LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect such as moving from the center to the outside and spreading. Can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Alternatively, when the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the back second rendering unit 3200, the first LED group 3251, and the third LED group 3253 are sequentially emitted, It is possible to show the player such a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center, and the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, at the time of the light-emitting effect that light is rotated (turned) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 Also, a light emission effect may be performed in which light is rotated in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a. This makes it possible to show the player a luminous effect such that the light travels around the center of the game area 5a as a whole in the pachinko machine 1, giving a strong impact to the player and enjoying the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, while being able to combine the above-mentioned movable production and light emission production suitably, it combines with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the movable effect, the display effect, etc., effects of various patterns can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and by various effects. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body of the lower unit 3330 of the upper unit 3310 of the rear third rendering unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370, the central portion of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200 Upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and right horizontal ring decorative by rotating to the outer side than the inner circumference of the decorative body 3230) The body 3371 is a rotating decoration 3210 of the back second rendering unit 3200, a back second outside decoration 3228, a back second inside decoration 3229, It is located at the back of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, and is vertically elongated by the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, the back second inner decoration 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230. The ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (forward), and the upper vertical ring to the player While being able to make it hard to notice the presence of the decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a The effect image displayed on the screen can be favorably viewed from the player side (forward), and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this implementation In the configuration, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third to rotate (move) from the retracted position to the emergence position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The three left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method to make the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring When the decoration 3371 is turned, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are turned with high torque. The large vertical moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 which had been stopped due to high torque. Since the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be pivoted to the appearance position at extremely high speed, the player does not recognize The effect that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 suddenly appear in the central portion of the game area 5a is shown to the player And can give the player a strong impact, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left The appearance of the ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 suddenly and instantly can make the player strongly think that there is something good for them, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Also, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 in a constant current drive system When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 were rotated with high torque, they were quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position A part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring to the appearance position for the player The movement of the decorative body 3371 can be recognized immediately, and the player is greatly enhanced by the movement of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 You can be surprised.

  Furthermore, the portion between the proximal end and the distal end of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is from the retracted position to the appearance position Since it is positioned on the rear side of a straight line connecting the proximal end and the distal end when it is rotated, it has a non-linear shape (here, an arc) between the proximal end and the distal end. Since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, The top end side of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 becomes visible. At this time, in the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the portion (tip side) visible from the front is the base end. Since the shape between the side and the tip side is non-linear, the direction projecting inside from the back second inner periphery decoration 3230 is the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration The direction of the body 3351 and the direction of the proximal side of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are different. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are stopped rotating halfway to the appearance position side and only the distal end side is visible When rendering is performed (see FIG. 58), the player is different from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 for the player. Since it is possible to give an illusion that another decorative body appears, it is possible to show more various effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the base end side of the central portion of the game area 5a (back second inner circumference decoration 3230), and since the tip side is in the form of an elongated frame extending to the central portion of the game area 5a at the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring When the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are turned to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is located at the central portion of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 335 of the appearance position The right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be highlighted, and the player's interest is strong in the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 It can be attracted.

  Also, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to a constant current drive method. The time when the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by high torque, 0. 0. Since it is in the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with high torque more than necessary, and the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left An increase in space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 can be suppressed, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring are relatively installed. The space for arranging the body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and other members can be easily secured, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical, and the like by the reserved space. The ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be made larger, and the large upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 The pachinko machine 1 can further entertain the player by the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 or the like. Further, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor having a high torque more than necessary or a complicated control circuit for outputting a high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 .

  In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided at the center of the game area 5a, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring When the decorative body 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, or from the appearance position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened to provide the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 to the player. The lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be hard to see, so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 can be brightened after that by brightening the display screen. The lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear in the center or disappear from the center It is possible to show the player a presentation, and to surprise the player, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are used to play the game. The player can be entertained and the decline in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by a constant current drive system, the upper vertical ring decoration Since the body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, and back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. Although there is a risk that defects may easily occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 335 Because the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect of moving the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, a defect occurs in them, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 Even if the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can not be moved (turned) to the appearance position, the decorative image 3390 also allows The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be illusive as if moved to the appearance position. Same as the effect by the ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 It is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to show the exit to the player.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512) makes the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are not visible from the player side Since the player has moved to the proper evacuation position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well, and the player can enjoy the effect image. When the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed by the peripheral control substrate 1510, appropriate. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear in the effect display device 1600 at the timing when they move from the retracted position to the appearance position The decoration image 3390 is displayed on the rear position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the frame shape of the upper vertical Ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left side are displayed because a specific effect image (for example, a plurality of symbol rows for suggesting a special drawing result selected for drawing) is displayed on the part to be divided. The specific effect image can be clearly divided by the ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371, and the specific effect image can be made to stand out, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest .

  Then, for some reason, even if one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can not move to the appearance position, When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control substrate 1510 causes all the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative are arranged so that only movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is paused. When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical In the effect display device 1600, the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 in the appearance position. , The decoration image 3390 is displayed on the rear side of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring of the appearance position Since the specific effect image is displayed on the area divided by the decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (decorative image 3390), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 for the player are also displayed. , And the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be illusive as if they were moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring according to the decoration image 3390 similar to the decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 It is possible to show the player the same effect as the effect by the decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are defective and can not move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring A decoration image 3390 similar to the decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be shown to the player, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring An effect equivalent to the effect by the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be shown to the player by the decoration image 3390, and the special effect image can be highlighted by the decoration image 3390 It is possible to make the player enjoy the effect by the specific effect image and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, if there is a problem that even one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can not move to the appearance position, Pause the movement control of all upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the horizontal horizontal ring decoration 3351 are not moved to the appearance position. When the effect to move the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position at the same time, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 moved to the appearance position, the bottom An effect is provided in which any of the ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 and the decorative image 3390 visible by not moving to the appearance position due to a defect appear together Can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decoration image is displayed regardless of whether the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image is additionally provided when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have a problem. There is no need for this, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

  Further, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the upper vertical detection ring 3311, the lower vertical detection ring 3331, the left horizontal detection ring 3351, and the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 And when it is detected that the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 does not move, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended. Since the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are stopped at a halfway position due to a defect. Can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Since the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and the decrease in the player's interest is suppressed. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is paused by detection of a defect, the upper vertical ring decorative Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving the body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 There is no overload on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and to prevent the failure from expanding.

  Also, since the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not visible in the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decorative body for some reason Even if there is a problem that 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can not move to the appearance position, as described above, decoration in effect display device 1600 Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect by the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retracted position Since the body 3371 can not be seen, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the malfunction of 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 not moving occurs, and to prevent the player from giving anxiety and to suppress the decrease in interest It can be done.

  Also, in a state (normal state) in which the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the retracted position, The vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can not be visually recognized. Since the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal When the ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 which was not seen, the lower vertical phosphorus The appearance of the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, and can entertain the player, as well as for the player It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body by upper detection sensor 3324, lower detection sensor 3344, left detection sensor 3364 and right detection sensor 3384 It is made to detect a defect that 3371 does not move to the appearance position, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the retreat position are Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are detected by the peripheral control board 1510, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring Movement control of decoration 3351 and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position When the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal If the ring decorative body 3371 is still detected, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved, and the upper vertical length It is possible to detect a defect that the ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 do not move to the appearance position, and realize the gaming machine having the above-described effects. Can be

  An upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a decoration image 3390 similar to the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration It may be larger or smaller than the size of 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. When the decoration image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the decoration image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has the advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decoration image 3390 is smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical When the effect to move the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left due to the occurrence of defects. As long as the movement control of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is not paused, there is an advantage that the player can not recognize the decorative image 3390.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through holes 3329a penetrating in the front and back. In front of the back second inner decoration 3229, in a normal state, four special rotation decorations 3211 specially decorated and the rest 6 different decorations from the special rotation decoration 3211 A flat, translucent translucent 12 rotary ornaments 3210 composed of individual ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 are centered on an axis extending forward and backward so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side from the through hole 3229a is facing along the revolving circle. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portions 3210 a extending backward from the respective rotary ornaments 3210 are inserted into the shaft holes 3221 a of the drive ring 3221, A rotating ornament body 3210 together with the shaft portion 3210a and a rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a have a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a as a radius Zhou) move (revolution). At this time, the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210 a is in mesh with the fixed gear portion 3220 b provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle in the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the rotating direction of the rotating gear 3225, and the rotating gear 3225 rotates in the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decoration 3210. Together, it rotates (rotations) about the axis | shaft extended before and behind the axial part 3210a. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality of (12 pieces) rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction while rotating on their own axis, thus giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make the player think that there is something good, to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to control the decline of the interest It can be done.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 that revolve while rotating around an axis extending back and forth are flat, the surface of the rotary ornaments 3210 is directed forward, and the entire rotary ornament 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, if these rotating ornaments 3210 revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 rotate and the player can make a lively sensation. It is possible to give the player a strong impact and enjoy the game greatly, and to control the decline in the player's interest.

  In addition, at the back of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229, within the range of the revolving locus of the rotating decorative body 3210 A plurality of (12) rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 divided in the direction of revolution and behind each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 which are at a position where the rotating decorative body 3210 stops rotating at a specific position) Since the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 configured by the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 are at the stop position In this state, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are made to emit light, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be made to emit light and decoration, and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped. In state between each other, when the emit LED3241 intermediate LED group 3255 can emit light decoration rotational decorative body 3210. Therefore, when the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the LEDs 3241 of the rotary ornament LED group 3250 and the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately lit according to the revolution of the rotary ornament 3210, light is emitted Since the light emitting diode 3241 is moved along with the revolution of the rotary decorative body 3210, the light from the LED 3241 has translucency of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 and the rotary decoration By irradiating forward (to the player side) through the body 3210, the rotary decorative body 3210 can be made to emit light and decorate so that the rotary decorative body 3210 is provided with the LED 3241. The player is greatly entertained by showing the player the effect of revolving while the rotating decorative body 3210 rotates. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are arranged in the direction of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210: the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group Since division into 3254 makes it possible to emit light from the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 finely in accordance with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, only the LED 3241 located behind the rotational decorative body 3210 Can be made to emit light easily, and if the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decoration 3210 that revolves while rotating, the player can be strongly illusiveed to the player, and the movement of the light emitting decoration 32 It can be made more enjoyable, and the decline in interest for the player's game can be suppressed. .

  Furthermore, since a plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the middle LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolving locus of the rotating decoration body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in a ring shape. If all the LEDs 3241 excluding the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the LEDs 3241 included in the winning opening LED group 3259 are made to emit light, the annular luminous effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 By emitting light in turn alternately in the direction, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the light rotates on the circumference. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 is provided in the range of the revolving locus of the rotary decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are disposed in a ring shape with a predetermined width, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are inside the annular ring. Show the player the light emission effect that the ring of light spreads outward by emitting light in order from the outside, or the ring of light emits light in order from the outside to the inside of the plurality of LEDs 3241. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges inward. As described above, since various light emission effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, when light emission effect is performed such that light is rotated in the revolving direction of the rotating ornament 3210, each rotating ornament LED group 3250 is rotated in the revolving direction of the rotating ornament 3210 and the first LED group 3251 and the second LED 3252 And the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 allow the movement of light in the direction of revolution to be made finer, so that the player can have a luminous effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. It can be shown to In addition, since the movement of light in the direction of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotational speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored by various luminous effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect for revolving while rotating the rotary decorative body 3210, the player can not produce the effects that can not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine In addition to giving a strong impact to the player, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are combined into the plurality of rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, control is made to emit light for each of the rotation decoration body LED groups 3250 and the middle LED group 3255 By doing this, compared to the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one, it is possible to reduce the load on control, and the occurrence of overload causes a problem, which causes the player to entertain Can be avoided, and the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 or the like can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, for example, only the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 can be If the speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case of emitting light sequentially in the circumferential direction and the case of emitting light of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 alternately in the circumferential direction at the same time interval It is possible to reduce the load on controlling the light emission effect, and to allow the player to enjoy the light emission effect rotating at different speeds of light, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest it can.

  In addition, since the back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the second back outer decoration 3228 is provided. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the LED 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 from the front by the back second inner decoration 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotation decoration 3210. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to make an illusion as provided with the LED 3241 in the rotary decorative body 3210, and it is possible to further enhance the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotary decorative body 3210 which revolves while rotating. It is possible to further enjoy the effect by the decorative body 3210, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game Door can be.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have special rotating decorative bodies 3211 provided with special decorations (three-pointed decoration), the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating. Depending on whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 stops revolving at a specific position, the player can be snarled and thumped, and the player can enjoy the movable effects by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 to enjoy the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotary decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolving circumference including the stop position, and one special rotary decorative body 3211 are located at a specific position. Since the special rotational position detecting sensor 3232 for detecting the presence of the rotating decorative body 3212 is included, only the rotational position detecting sensor 3231 can be selected when the normal rotational decorative body 3212 is positioned at the specific position among the plurality of rotational decorative bodies 3210. When the special rotational decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detect this, so detection by the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation are performed. The combination of the detection by the position detection sensor 3232 makes it possible to set the special decoration 3211 or the special decoration 3211 at a specific position. Les it is possible to detect whether located. Therefore, when rotating and stopping one of the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 at a specific position, using the rotational position detecting sensor 3231 and the special rotational position detecting sensor 3232, an ordinary rotating decorative which revolves while rotating on its own axis Since it is possible to stop revolution of any of 3212 and special rotation decoration 3211 at a specific position, it is possible to show the player an effect as to whether or not special rotation decoration 3211 will stop revolution at a specific position, The player can be entertained by making them harahara and pounding, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, a detection piece 3221c for detecting a normal rotation decoration 3212 and a special rotation decoration 3211 located at a specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting a special rotation decoration 3211 located at a specific position Since 3221d is provided in the drive ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the rotary decoration 3210 is provided with the detection piece and the special detection piece. The configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily embodied.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 can be revolved while being rotated by one back second drive motor 3222, the rotation and revolution of the rotary ornaments 3210 are driven by different drive motors. In comparison, the configuration of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be simplified, the drive mechanism can be made smaller, and control of the movable attraction of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 is controlled. The load can be reduced. Further, as described above, since the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be made smaller, the space for arranging the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be relatively widened. The rotary ornaments 3210 can be made larger to make them stand out from the player side, and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can strongly attract the player's attention.

  Furthermore, since the shaft portion 3210a is projected rearward of the LED 3241, the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end is rearward of the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also rearward of the LED 3241. The rotary gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221 and the like do not block the light emitted forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be reliably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the back second drive motor 3222 for rotating the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside (the inside of the through hole 3229a) of the fixed gear portion 3220b can be widely taken. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be more easily viewed, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

  In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220 b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the back of the second drive motor 322 is substantially the same position as the drive ring 3221 in the front-rear direction. Since the second drive motor 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be suppressed. Further, the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 may be flat, and the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be reduced. From these facts, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the diameter of the rotary ornament 3210 can be made larger by relatively enlarging the space for arranging the plural rotary ornaments 3210. While being able to make it stand out from the player side, a plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 can be strongly attracted to the interest of the player, and other members can be provided in front of or behind the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 By performing the effect using the other members provided, it is possible to show more various effects to the player, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit at the upper part in the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is a gate as a bonus giving unit provided in the game area 5a A predetermined benefit (for example, a regular lottery in which the player is advantageous when it passes through the unit 2003 or is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a bonus award unit. Since a lottery of a result or a special lottery result, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) is given, the player is made to perform a hit operation of the game ball B aiming at a benefit giving unit such as the gate unit 2003. I can play a game.

  In the game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the right in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center character 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space 2511 Since the game ball group B is circulated through different routes according to the strength of the shot and the passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate unit 2003 is provided, the first circulation constituting the passage group 2520 The probability that the game ball B passes through the downstream gate unit 2003 differs for each of the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 with a high hitting probability that the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 and the probability that the game ball B passes the gate portion 2003. It is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a by the hitting strength at which the ball enters, A change can be imparted, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the desired second distribution passage 2522 It is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the player's game.

  Further, the stopper 1006 protrudes inward from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a near the right end of the upstream space 2511, and the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the stopper 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stopper 1006 (for example, a specific or greater hitting strength at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). The gaming ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 in the vicinity of the stopper 1006 in the distribution passage group 2520 with high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is hit with the strength to abut against the abutment portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength not to abut the abutment portion 1006. As long as the game ball B is hit, the hit operation of the game ball B can be sharpened, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  And, the game ball B which has flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 provided with an entrance in the vicinity of the stop 1006 lowers the probability of passing through the gate part 2003 on the downstream side, and it is also an opportunity to be given benefits. Since the game ball 5 is discharged out of the game area 5a, the player adjusts the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Change can be imparted to the hitting operation of the game ball B, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and aiming the player at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 The hit operation of the ball B can be enjoyed, and a drop in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the gaming ball B is hit, the distribution passage group 2520 which circulates through different routes according to the hitting strength of the gaming ball B (first distribution passage 2521 and second The circulation passage 2522) can be embodied with certainty, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

  Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, the player can enter the gaming ball B into the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 desired. It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with the hitting strength to enter the space 2511 and with the hitting strength to enter the desired first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of difficulty of the operation for hitting the game ball B, and to allow the player to enjoy the operation for hitting the game ball B to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other. Since the entrance of the distribution passage into which the player enters easily becomes different, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty of the player's operation to hit the game ball B, and the player enjoys the operation to hit the game ball B to lower the interest It can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are integrated to a certain extent, so that the inside of the game area 5a or the center It is possible to make the inside of the frame of the character 2500 relatively wide, and to make the player enjoy the game in the game area 5a and the effect in the frame of the center character 2500 to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  In the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 includes the two distribution passages of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be made up of two circulation passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming ball B which has entered the attacking right passage 2422 of the attaching unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 with high probability by the contact with the step 1005a of the right rail 1005. Although what is shown, it does not limit to this, and game ball B which entered into the attacking right passage 2422 may be made to be guided to the attacking lower right passage 2426 with high probability.

  In the above embodiment, in the back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction as the direction of rotation, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to revolve in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, regardless of whether the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 do not move to the appearance position, In the present embodiment, the decoration image 3390 is displayed when the effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the state in which no defect occurs in them, the effect image without the decoration image 3390 is displayed The decoration image 3390 may be displayed only when a failure occurs in them.

  In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. However, the invention is not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation system, and high torque can be generated.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are illustrated as stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a DC motor having a large starting torque.

  In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is used to turn the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. Although the drive motors such as the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a solenoid or rotary solenoid etc. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the door frame effect display device 152 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511, the door frame sub A display unit 185 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of an effect image on the effect display device 1600. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. The MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a setting indicator 1310g for displaying set values and displaying errors, and for displaying the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 And a base monitor 1310 h. The main control MPU 1310a incorporates, in addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and forcibly forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to inconsistent contents. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit can not be disabled by control by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs as described later, so the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “the main control built-in hardware that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming It is described as “random number circuit”. The main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value of 0 to a value of 535 as a minimum and a value of 65535 as a minimum is preset) The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as the value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with the one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and within a predetermined numerical range Once all the values in the above have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without overlapping. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value extracted from the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals when the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit to be

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a first start opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, a general winning hole sensor 3001, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the gaming ball B which has passed through the gate part 2003, a big winning hole 2005 The first winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the gaming ball B accepted by the first winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving sensor 2404 for sensing the gaming ball B received by the first receiving port 2007 after being detected by the great winning hole sensor 2403, the big winning prize A second receiving sensor 2405 for detecting the game ball B received by the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the port sensor 2403; Collected by the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism in the skill area 5a, the vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibration in the game area 5a, and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 A detection signal from an out port sensor 3032 or the like that detects the game ball B to be played is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, a detection signal from the setting key 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit. Further, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM incorporated in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the payout control substrate 633, and a RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control substrate 1310 (main control built-in RAM) Function as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each of the predetermined areas, a function as an error release switch to cancel the error displayed on the error LED display, and a set value. It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, in the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310, a signal (RAM clear signal) for conveying the RAM clear as the RAM clear switch and a signal (signaling that the error was released as the error cancellation switch ( Although there is an error cancellation signal) and a signal (selection switching signal of the setting value) that conveys selection switching of the setting value as the setting switching button, the main control board 1310 sets the RAM clear signal as an important signal related to itself. While monitoring the input with the setting change signal of the value, it does not monitor the input of the error cancellation signal that is the control object that is handled by the payout control board 633 that is not related to itself.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are via the payout control board 633 (through, that is, the payout control input circuit described later, and the payout control output When the signal is inputted to the main control board 1310 without passing through the circuit, it is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through the other substrate, that is, through the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a general winning opening sensor 2401, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving sensor 2404, a second receiving sensor 2405, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out sensor 3032 Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start control solenoid 2412 from the main control solenoid drive circuit and the attacker solenoid 2414, to output the respective drive signals via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, ordinary Each drive signal to the reserve indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special reserve number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second special reserve number indicator, the round indicator, etc., the other substrate Output directly without intervention. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs various information (gaming information) about gaming to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (gaming information) about gaming from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting a release permission signal notifying that the release of the game ball B is permitted, a release permission signal notifying that the release of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the release permission signal that indicates that this release is allowed is set to the release permission logic when releasing the release, while the release suspension logic (release non-release permission logic) which reverses the release enable logic when not releasing the release. Set to In addition, the logic of the release permission signal is an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery), the release permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described later is started The hardware is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. In contrast, contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switches are used as the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently, so the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with a high durability and a long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. In addition, since the game balls B fired in the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5, detection of the game ball B by the out port sensor 3032 It occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out-port sensor 3032. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than that of the proximity switch are used as the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. In addition, regardless of the fact that the game ball B does not frequently enter the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 as described later in detail.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter referred to simply as “main control side” as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. Described as “capacitor”. The main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the main control side capacitor. A variety of information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a with a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 was operated at power on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to payout and a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and a launch by which the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is performed. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions are provided. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM provided in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control substrate 633, and a RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control substrate 1310 Function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM), and a function as an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and setting It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a value.

  During the period when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, the RAM clear determination period after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (The main control MPU 1310a processes when the main control MPU 1310a turns on after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on Period until the determination of step S14 in the same process is performed).

  During the period when the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button, the setting switching valid period after the RAM clearing determination period has elapsed (when the main control side power is turned on, which is described later by the main control MPU 1310a In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. Is limited to the period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). There is.

  A period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching effective period have elapsed. It should be noted that the signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is invalidated even if it is input to the payout control unit 633a (a payout control MPU described later) during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching effective period. It is done.

  Note that, as described above, the period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching effective period after the RAM clearing determination period has elapsed. However, in this setting switching effective period, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch provided in the setting change board 1311 in the setting change processing in step S37 in the main control side power on processing described later after the RAM clear determination period elapses. Since the process of continuing to monitor the rotational position of the setting key cylinder is performed by the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of 1311a, interrupt permission setting for permitting start of main control timer interrupt processing described later is performed. (Step S52 in the main control side power-on process) can not be performed, and the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process described later can not be performed. In other words, the setting switching effective period is a fraudulent operation undetectable period.

  In this setting switching effective period, that is, the injustice detecting impossible period, there is a possibility that an unauthorized person performs some unauthorized alteration on the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space in which the state can be opened, the main frame 4 has to be opened large (about 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. As a result, in the setting switching effective period, that is, in the unfair detection undetectable period, the main body frame 4 is opened large (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 If an attempt is made to make an unauthorized alteration, it is possible to take measures against such an act of fraud since the act of fraud becomes extremely prominent in the game hall. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of fraud.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 350 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payment control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payment control built-in ROM"), the payment control MPU is described. In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout through the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to the signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated is input through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  Detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 350, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. It is input.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is paid out via the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the control MPU.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the far cover unit 150 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Is input to

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, or outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner, or the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 350 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 350 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (in other words, it indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. It is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 110, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 111, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. A detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A release permission signal from the main control board 1310 which transmits a permission to release the game ball B is input to the release control circuit after being input to the release control input circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 which electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 111 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies firing condition 1 that a palm or a finger is touching the handle 111 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and based on the CR connection signal, the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board Is electrically connected, and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the gaming ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control substrate 1310 does not hold, the gaming ball B is not established. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit can not launch the game ball B without outputting a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542, because the launch reference pulse for launching the game area 5a is not output.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 111, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the game ball stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 when the ball feed solenoid drive circuit is triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 330 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  Note that various voltages are supplied to the payout control substrate 633 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 is an electric double layer capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 633 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is shut off. (Described as “capacitor”). The payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the payout control side capacitor. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is inputted to the payout control MPU at the time of power on. Completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the discharge control unit 633 b for performing the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is provided in the payout control substrate 633, it is provided in the power supply substrate 630. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control substrate 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply substrate 630, or may be input to the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, or May be input to the power supply substrate 630 via a relay substrate.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 62, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a door frame effect display based on the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control substrate 1310, and the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is provided.

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. From the serial I / O port for lamp drive board through the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700 from the lamp drive board serial I / O port for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 or operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is a serial for game board decoration drive board Transmitted from the I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 through the panel drive board 1720 or provided on the door frame 3 Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the first elevation drive motor 175b, the second elevation drive motor 182, etc., lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, blinking signals or The door side drive light emission data composed of the door side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal, and transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, a door frame effect display device In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the display 152 or the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, sound information is extracted from the sound ROM Output control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC.

  A plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration of the back third effect unit 3300 Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotational position and movement position of the body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 and the like are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive substrate 1720.

  A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 165 of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives, from the effect display control unit 1512, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the peripheral display MPU of the effect display control unit 1512 I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and various types of information are obtained from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 provided in the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to the presentation are output. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch) as sound information to the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3. By sending (1 channel surround signal etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, gaming board side lighting blink command, movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5, have a plurality of serials different from display commands. This is performed by the input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The panel drive board 1720 controls the lighting signal or the blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command, the LED (LED 121 a, LED 122 a, LED 138 a, LED 153 c, LED 159 a, lattice decoration LED 195) of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3. , The game board 5 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blink command or output to the LED 213a, the upper outer vertex LED 224, the upper outer valley LED 225, the upper outer edge LED 231, the lattice decoration LED 245). Output to the LED of each decoration board.

  Also, the panel drive board 1720 drives each of the first elevation drive motor 175 b and the second elevation drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3 and the drive signal provided in the game board 5 with a drive signal based on the received drive command. Output to motor etc.

6-3 b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. The effect display control unit 1512 is not shown in detail but a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a door frame effect display device 152, an effect display A VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) for display control of the device 1600, an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, and the image ROM And an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display a door frame effect display device 152. The drawing control of the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 as well as various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the door-frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In the nonresident area transfer data, the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the nonresident area of the image RAM. It is prescribed.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 do not receive the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. With this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer This is a method of outputting data to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 or effect display It will affect the speed at which the device 1600 draws. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the door-frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when sprites overlap with each other are set, and the door frame effect display device 152 or effect display device It is drawn at 1600.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially cross the one direction along the main scan for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from the left to the right as viewed from the front It drives by the subscanning which repeatedly performs the main scanning in the direction which When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 as main scanning Output to the pixels for one line sequentially from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, the main scanning is sequentially output from left to right as pixels in one line as viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 as main scanning.

6-4. Implementation of SMD type electronic components]
Next, the measures for discontinuing production will be described. First, with regard to a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, a payout control board, etc. due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, lead type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface which is the front side. It is necessary to solder on the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead type electronic components are important among manufacturers that manufacture game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, but other general electric machine makers can be miniaturized A flat surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production number of lead type electronic components may be reduced due to a decrease in the number. Therefore, it is possible to mount a lead-typed electronic component capable of constituting an SMD type electronic component as a lead type electronic component on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate.

  However, when configured as this lead-typed electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-typed electronic component is larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and the projecting portion is formed in part or more thereof. It may be formed to have a distorted outer shape (shape). When lead-typed electronic components having such an outer shape (shape) are mounted on the mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate, there may be cases where mutual placement in the substrate becomes difficult due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. Because of this, it may be difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead-typed electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-typed electronic components, among the lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, it is possible to use a substrate that exclusively handles SMD-type electronic components as a main substrate. It may be permitted to mount on the mounting side.

  Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control substrate 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate, a view obtained by viewing this enlarged view from the right side of the main control substrate (b) FIG. 64 is a schematic view (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which lead-type electronic components are integrated into a predetermined area of alternative SMD-type electronic components, wherein the SMD is substituted for lead-type electronic components. FIG. 65 is a schematic view (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of a miniaturized substrate obtained by aggregating electronic components of a type, and FIG. 65 is a back surface of the main control substrate 66 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. In addition, in FIG. 63 and FIG. 65, other various electronic components are omitted except for the electronic components necessary for the explanation because of the view of the drawings.

  The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as the lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and this lead type Schmitt trigger inverter Are disposed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control is performed by some illegal means. When being dropped from the substrate 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310 always determines that any of various sensors that convey the ball entry of the gaming ball is not entered, and the fraud is an approach of the magnet or a illegitimate vibration It is always determined that fraudulent activity is being conducted for things that convey fraudulent activity such as. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control substrate 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

  In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate 1310 are green resists, except for various land patterns. It is done.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30"). And a lead type high frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor MC30") capable of removing the noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself in the vicinity of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. In FIG. 63 (a), the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 has six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits integrated and housed in one SMD package. In the present embodiment, SOP (Small Outline Package) having 14 pins is adopted as the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 may be described as “SOP 14”). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposing sides of the SMD package main body are bent toward the outside with a distance between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", 1.27 mm in this embodiment). Of each lead and the main control board 1310 after being mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead. Mounting surface) The rectangular land patterns formed only on 1310 x are soldered respectively. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead, and 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm) It is. In the present embodiment, the size of the SMD package main body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length and 1.5 mm in height, and from two sides of the SMD package main body Including the length of the protruding leads, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 has 7.8 mm.

  Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310, the back surface of the main control substrate 1310 is used as a solder surface in order to mount lead type electronic components on the main control substrate 1310. Described as “the back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate 1310” (the same applies hereinafter).

  In the capacitor MC30, two leads protruding from the main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape have a distance dimension between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", 5 mm in the present embodiment) and protrude in parallel straight form toward the outside And formed on both surfaces (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310 x and back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 corresponding to the two leads. Among the ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through holes, hereinafter the same), the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y Formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control board 1310 after the two leads are inserted toward the ring land pattern. A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder side) 1310Y of the two leads and the main control board 1310 which protrudes from the ring-shaped land pattern are soldered, respectively. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1. 3 mm).

  The surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 is set to ground (GND) except the area where the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. In addition, it is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground), and also on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and an area where various land patterns are formed. The other area except for the above is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) with the ground (GND). The solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 are the same as those of the main control substrate 1310. A plurality of through holes (copper-plated) passing through both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of main control board 1310) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) The same ground (GND) is obtained by electrically connecting through the holes). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-like land pattern. In the through holes, a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 Are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND), and are used to route various wiring patterns to both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. There are also several.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, as shown in FIG. 63A, a region MSLKMIC 30 indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) for arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is white as silk printing. The solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLK MIC 30 and at the lower left. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC 30, the lead serving as the No. 1 terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is located on the lower left side, the No. 7 terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 It is instructed that the lead to be the (GND) terminal be arranged on the lower right side, the lead to be the 8th terminal be on the upper right side, and the lead to be the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) be arranged on the upper left side. .

  Rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 terminals 1 to 6 and terminals 8 to 13 are electrically connected to the wiring patterns transmitting the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead which is electrically connected and becomes the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern for supplying power.

  The surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is imprinted with the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, for example, "ABC") and the product number (number listed in the catalog, for example, "74XXYYZZ") Or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is compact, the package body surface area of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

  Further, although the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later in detail, it prevents the main control board 1310 from a person who acquires illegal gaming balls by performing unauthorized modification. The main control board box 1320 is sealed by being sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is formed of a transparent cover body on which a plurality of heat release vents are formed and a transparent base body. The heat radiation vent can discharge the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  Then, when confirming the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 in a state where the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 Manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) or product number (number listed in catalog) imprinted or printed on the package body surface of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 when viewing the mounting surface side through the transparent cover body Is small and difficult to see.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 in the vicinity of the area MSLK MIC 30 in FIG. Part number of MIC30 (number listed in catalog) MSLK MIC30p is silk so that it is easy to see size compared with the size of number (number listed in catalog) to be stamped or printed on the package body surface of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) for printing. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably viewed.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) as silk printing so as to be easily visible as compared with the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferably printed on Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

  In addition, capacitor MC30 is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of main control substrate 1310 so as to be disposed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In the area MSLKMC30 showing the position (where the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing and in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC30. At the upper right, capacitor MC 30 and the corresponding part number are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, region MSLKMC 30 is on the upper side electrically connected with the wiring pattern for supplying power so that the two leads of capacitor MC 30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. 63 (a). It is instructed that the ring land pattern and the other lead be inserted into the lower ring land pattern paired with the upper ring land pattern.

  The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310.

  Here, the advantages of mounting an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, since SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized as compared to lead type electronic components, the electronic component mounting density when the SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate This can be extremely suppressed as compared with the electronic component mounting density in the case where the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as that of the lead type electronic component on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic components are small, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted can be enlarged, and the lead type electronic components to the SMD type electronic components The area between the parts replaced with can also be enlarged (that is, the mounting aspect of the electronic parts with many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate by the replaced parts). As a result, since SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be viewed from many directions, unauthorized modification of the SMD type electronic components, the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate and the SMD type It is possible to check the state of mounting (soldering state) with electronic components, and the state of various wiring patterns and land patterns on SMD type electronic components. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to detectability of tampering.

  In addition, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be enlarged, and the area between the lead type electronic component and the SMD type electronic component is also enlarged. Therefore, for these areas (surface (mounting surface) of the substrate), the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of SMD type electronic components are imprinted on the package main surface of the SMD type electronic components or It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to be easily visible in size compared to the size of the printed part number (number listed in the catalog), and this part number (listed in the catalog The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the number). Therefore, it can contribute to the easiness of recognition of the electronic component of SMD type.

  When the surface (mounting surface) of an SMD type electronic component is mounted, the distance dimension between the back of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, Schmitt trigger) In the inverter MIC 30, the distance dimension between the back of the main body and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm), the back of the main body of the electronic component of SMD type and the surface of the board ( There is a problem that it is difficult to find such an illegal circuit even if a goto act of forming some illegal circuit between the mounting surface) is made.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing formation of any illegal circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  A configuration was adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal was not disposed at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) In the region passing through, the configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not disposed at all.

  In the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern electrically connected to ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power are not disposed at all . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) In the region passing through, a wiring pattern electrically connected to ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power are not disposed at all.

  A configuration was adopted in which no through holes were disposed at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the through holes MTH are disposed at the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the front surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration is adopted in which no through hole MTH is disposed at all in the area of (mounting surface) (in other words, the area passing through the lower portion of the main body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30). As described above, the through holes MTH are electrically connected by holes (copper plated holes) passing through both surfaces (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control substrate 1310. Thus, the same ground (GND) can be obtained. In addition to the through holes MTH, a plurality of through holes MTH '(not shown) for routing various wiring patterns on both surfaces (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control substrate 1310 Although such a through hole MTH 'also exists, it passes through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). (A region where the through holes MTH 'are not disposed at all).

  The wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding SMD type Adopted a configuration that does not pull out the electronic components of the Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 and the various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not disposed at all in the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but is disposed from above and below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  In order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component The configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not disposed at all in the region of. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 and the various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not disposed at all in the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but is disposed from above and below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  Soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 via each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern In addition, a configuration in which the control signal can not be taken out was adopted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63A, a land pattern is formed by soldering each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal can not be extracted without passing through the wiring patterns electrically connected with each other. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal can not be extracted from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improperly form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a broken circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns for SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, the intention of the fraudster to provide an illegal circuit for the SMD type electronic components is abandoned. Can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on SMD type electronic components.

  In addition, since the respective wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not disposed at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component A control signal to an electronic component of an SMD type so that an illegal other IC (electronic component of an SMD type) is not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding substrate. And a control signal to an illegal other IC can not be used in combination in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate and the corresponding back surface of the SMD type electronic component.

  In addition, since each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not disposed at all in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the other illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) It is easy to arrange control signals between the back of the main body of an SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to select one.

  Further, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads is formed in the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not pulling out to the outside of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal transmitting the wiring pattern to be pulled out to the outside.

  In addition, by soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern is interposed. Without taking out the control signal without being able to take out the control signal from the part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component, the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern can not be used illegally can do.

  Moreover, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the front surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component ( Each wiring pattern electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component is not disposed at all from the upper side or the lower side of the SMD type electronic component by not arranging each wiring pattern transmitting the control signal at all in the region of the mounting surface). By arranging, it can be made impossible to form an illegal circuit around the lead. Among the leads of SMD type electronic components, leads (also referred to as “vacant terminals”) that are not used are electrically connected to a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND), or Alternatively, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern to which power is supplied, it is possible not to form an illegal circuit around the vacant terminal by arranging from above or below the SMD type electronic component. Can.

  Also, by not arranging the through holes at all in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component A control signal can not be taken out through the through hole so that an illegal other IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) It is possible to make it impossible to fix (solder) an incorrect other IC in the through hole, and set the through hole as a through hole for the control signal from the back surface (solder surface) to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It can be made impossible to use as taking out.

  Also, no wiring pattern for electrically connecting to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power are disposed at all in the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. And another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component It is possible not to be a driving source for other incorrect ICs so as not to

6-4a. Measures for Visibility of Part Numbers by SMD Package]
Next, a configuration in which an SMD type electronic component is integrated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be described. As described above, the SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized, so that the size of the substrate itself can be miniaturized by collectively mounting. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as a main board, and when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state of being accommodated in the main control board box 1320, a measure of visibility of the part number by the SMD package is taken. Another configuration (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration for measures of visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the second to third embodiments”) will be described. In FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) (hereinafter referred to as "the configuration of the measure for the part number visibility by the SMD package according to the first embodiment") is described. The same reference numerals are given to elements that perform the same functions as in the above), and the setting display 1310 g, the base monitor 1310 h, and the like described above are omitted from the drawing for easy viewing.

[Comparison with the configuration of the measure for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration for the measure of the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for measures against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicates the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as that of the type electronic component, is indicated by white solid white (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLK MIC 30 and at the lower left.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is information in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 and to the right as described above. The size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) in which the part number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to see in comparison with the size.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various connectors of lead type Except for various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs and other electronic components of the alternative SMD type having the same functions as the electronic components of the main control board 1310 ' ) Is implemented in 1310x '. The outer dimensions (longitudinal dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control substrate 1310 ′ are the same as the outer dimensions of the main control substrate 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

  The main control substrate 1310 'has various electronic components in the region of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control substrate 1310 'on the left side from the center line with a straight line passing through the upper side and the middle point of the lower side. And are formed as a component placement area 1310xa 'for placing various connectors, and in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of the center line, the It forms as parts list area 1310xb 'which is an information area represented like the parts list of the electronic parts comprised in the aspect which put in order with (number).

  Specifically, in the component placement area 1310xa ', the main control MPU 1310a of the ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type included in the lead type, various types of lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other connectors not shown), the resistance MR0 ~ MR4 (other multiple resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other multiple capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other multiple diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (others other not shown) IC) is implemented. In the component placement area 1310 xa ', a region (not shown) indicating the position (including designation of the orientation) at which the various electronic components and various connectors are disposed is a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. In the vicinity of these various electronic parts and various connectors, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Also, although various connectors use lead type connectors, when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to the wiring (this stress leads to wiring in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector) It is because that the reaction force of the wiring which accompanies acts by acting on a connector.

  In the parts list area 1310xb ', the parts list of the electronic parts configured in a mode in which the part numbers and the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa ′. Printed in white (or black) as A delimiting symbol ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being continuous. . By this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog).

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, notes on the gaming machine may be described. For example, the description may be made for the purpose of alerting, such as "The main control substrate is a substrate important for security, and be careful in handling."

  As described above, since the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 'can be divided into the component placement region 1310xa' and the component list region 1310xb ', the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310' It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the

  In addition, it replaces with silk printing printed on surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of main control board 1310', The foil removal area and foil removal in the structure of the visibility measures of the product number by the SMD package concerning 5th Embodiment mentioned later A character may be adopted, or a white resist-removed character using a double-coated resist and a double-coated resist using a double-coated resist in the configuration for measures against part number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment And may be adopted.

[Comparison with the configuration of the measures for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the measures for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for measures against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicates the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as that of the type electronic component, is indicated by white solid white (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLK MIC 30 and at the lower left.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is information in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 and to the right as described above. The size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) in which the part number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to see in comparison with the size.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various connectors of lead type Except for various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs and other electronic components of the alternative SMD type having the same functions as the electronic components of the main control board 1310 ' ) Is implemented in 1310x '. The size of the main control board 1310 ′ can be reduced by integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′. The external dimensions (longitudinal dimension, lateral dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control substrate 1310 'are the lateral dimensions of the external dimensions of the main control substrate 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the size is half (the vertical dimension and the thickness dimension are the same).

  Various electronic components and various connectors are disposed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′. The arrangement of these various electronic parts and various connectors is arranged in the part arrangement area 1310 xa 'formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the measure for the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. (Not shown in the figure) showing the same arrangement (that is, the position (including specification of the orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are to be arranged is the same arrangement and white as silk printing , And black)), and the part numbers respectively corresponding to the vicinity of these various electronic parts and various connectors are also the same arrangement and printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Also, although various connectors use lead type connectors, when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to the wiring (this stress leads to wiring in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector) It is because that the reaction force of the wiring which accompanies acts by acting on a connector.

  Parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310 'in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310 ' The part list of the electronic parts configured in a mode in which the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the area 1310xb 'and the product number (number listed in the catalog) are white as silk printing (or , Black) is printed. The size of the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) is compared with the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiting symbol ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being continuous. . By this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog). In addition, the manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, notes on the gaming machine may be described. For example, the description may be made for the purpose of alerting, such as "The main control substrate is a substrate important for security, and be careful in handling."

  Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′, the leads of the above-described ZIP type main control MPU 1310 a (described as part number “MIC1” in the figure) and electronic components of the lead type Leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5 and MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control substrate 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control substrate 1310' The part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310 'so as not to overlap with (but to avoid) overlapping with the part (shown as a filled circle (●) in the figure). Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the parts list area 1310xb 'formed in the above.

  As described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control substrate 1310' is used as a region for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control substrate 1310' And the back surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310 '. Since the role of (solder surface) 1310 y ′ can be classified, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′ can be easily recognized.

  In addition, since the size of the main control board 1310 ′ can be reduced by integrating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, lead type The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′, the various leads of the lead-type electronic component protrude and the number of parts soldered decreases, thereby reducing the back surface of the main control substrate 1310 ′ The solder surface 1310 y ′ can be formed as a flat surface.

  In addition, since the various leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′ are soldered, they are reflected when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like strikes and feel dazzling Although there may be a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the attached portion, as described above, various leads of the lead type electronic component are projected and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control substrate 1310'. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y ′ of the main control substrate 1310 ′ can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of the portions, even if light from a fluorescent lamp or the like is applied to this flat surface, The parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned It does not occur adverse effects of Kunar.

  Note that, instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control substrate 1310 ', the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment The de-foiling area and the de-foiling character in the configuration may be adopted, or the resist removal area using the twice-painted resist and the twice-painting in the structure of the measure against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. White resist-free characters using a resist may be adopted.

  By the way, a general electric machine manufacturer uses a multilayer substrate on which various wiring patterns can be formed in each layer. However, the main control board and the payout control board used in the game machine are a two-layer board ("double-sided board in which various wiring patterns are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate to enhance security. It is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, regardless of whether it is a lead type electronic component or an SMD type electronic component. For example, in order to enhance security, it is necessary to mount the main control MPU 1310a of the ZIP type included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is advantageous to mount the lead type electronic component In some cases, electronic components of this lead type are mounted without using SMD type electronic components.

  When an electronic component of an SMD type and an electronic component of a lead type coexist on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate or the payout control substrate, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate or the payout control substrate Compared to the case where only the lead type electronic component is mounted, the number of leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate or the payout control substrate is reduced. This makes it possible to increase the area used as an area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board, and to obtain the area used as an area used for other functions. Can.

  Therefore, for example, although not mounted on the main control substrate produced as a mass production machine in the area where the above-mentioned area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate is increased, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are used. It is possible to provide a mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya ′ (see FIG. 64B) capable of forming various land patterns for mounting and forming a pad pattern for extracting a signal. In the main control board manufactured as a mass-production machine, electronic components of SMD type are not mounted on various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya ′, and therefore various lands in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya ′ The patterns and pad patterns become unmounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya ′ becomes an empty area.

  When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate are formed by the region where the unmounted pattern is formed. When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, the surface of the main control board The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate can be effectively utilized without restriction on the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors in the mounting surface) and the routing of various wiring patterns.

  In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate, it can not be viewed from the surface (mounted surface) of the main control substrate, and the presence of the unmounted pattern can be concealed. , Preferred for security.

  Note that a part of such an unmounted pattern may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, when a connector (SMD type connector) is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, the connection with the wiring may be easier.

  In addition, a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead type electronic component or a lead type connector for convenience. For example, the case where soldering strength is required such as a connector with a large number of times of insertion and removal can be cited.

  Next, when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state housed in the main control board box 1320, the package body surface area of the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 which is an SMD package is small, and hence the name of the manufacturing company Other configurations according to the present invention (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth to sixth embodiments”) in which measures of visibility of the part number by the SMD package are difficult to reduce because the part number (number listed in the catalog) becomes small. Description will be made as “a configuration of measures for the visibility of the part number by the SMD package”. In FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) (hereinafter referred to as "the configuration of the measure for the part number visibility by the SMD package according to the first embodiment"). The same symbols are attached to those having the same functions as those in the above.

[Comparison with the configuration of the measure for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration for the measure of the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for measures against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (or the direction) of arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMIC 30 showing the white background (or solid black line) is printed as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed in the vicinity of the region MSLK MIC 30 and lower left Is printed in white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is information in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 and to the right as described above. The size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) in which the part number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to see in comparison with the size.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 as described above. Region MSLKMC30 showing silkscreening indicates the position where capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no specification of the direction because capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it will be arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. Printed in white solid line (or black solid line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC 30 and in the upper right, part number corresponding to capacitor MC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing .

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures against visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 A white dotted line indicates that the area MSLKMIC 30 'indicates the position (including the designation of the orientation) at which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is disposed at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control substrate 1310. The printed part (or the black dashed line) is printed near the area MSLKMIC 30 'and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, it is possible to print by increasing the size of the component number.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the part number MSLKMIC 30p, the part number MSLKMIC 30p is the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided below the area MSLKKMIC 30 ', and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided in this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easily visible as compared with the size of the product number (number listed in the catalog) to be stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably viewed.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p may be the same as the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of measures for the product number visibility by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. May be This is because multiple electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p and to arrange and print it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, it is possible to print by increasing the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30 p.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) as silk printing so as to be easily visible as compared with the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferably printed on Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is further printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMC 30 'showing the position where capacitor MC 30 is arranged at the position corresponding to region MSLK MC 30 (the direction of capacitor MC 30 is not specified because there is no polarity) is shown by white solid line (or solid black line) as silk printing. While being printed, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC 30 'and at the upper left. The part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number is set in the configuration for the measure against the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. The electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control board 1310 while the size needs to be small and arranged near the corresponding electronic component for printing, so the part number is large. For printing.

[Comparison of the configuration of the measures for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the measures for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for measures against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (or the direction) of arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMIC 30 showing the white background (or solid black line) is printed as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed in the vicinity of the region MSLK MIC 30 and lower left Is printed in white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is information in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 and to the right as described above. The size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) in which the part number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to see in comparison with the size.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 as described above. Region MSLKMC30 showing silkscreening indicates the position where capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no specification of the direction because capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it will be arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. Printed in white solid line (or black solid line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC 30 and in the upper right, part number corresponding to capacitor MC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing .

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures against visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The area MSLKMIC 30 'indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) at which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control substrate 1310 As well as being formed, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a foil-cut character in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 'and at the upper left.

  In the foil removal area, in the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, the wiring patterns for supplying power, and the various land patterns, except for various land patterns, The area is formed by removing the copper foil around it. In a region MSLKMIC 30 'formed as a foil removal region, a notch 1310y MIC 30 is formed in a part on the left side in FIG. 65 (b). As a result, the area MSLKMIC 30 'becomes U-shaped in katakana, and the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 via the notch 1310yMIC 30 and the area MLKMIC30 in the U-shape. The 'in' region can be electrically connected. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, so the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to this mounting region By ensuring as much as possible the region of (1), it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 from malfunctioning due to noise (make it resistant to noise).

  In the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, the foil-removed characters are formed as a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil and removing the copper foil around it. The part numbers formed as foil-removed characters are formed as foil-removed characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, so that the part numbers can be enlarged to form foil-removed characters.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the part number MSLKMIC 30p, the part number MSLKMIC 30p is the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided below the area MSLKKMIC 30 ', and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided in this information area. It is formed as a foil-removed character so as to be a size that is easily visible as compared with the size of the product number (number published in the catalog) to be stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. In the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, the foil-removed characters are formed as a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil and removing the copper foil around it. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably viewed.

  The part number MSLKMIC 30p formed as a foil-free character is the same as the part number MSLKK MIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for measures for the part number visibility with the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be large or large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration for the measure against the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. The electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, while the size needs to be small and arranged in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component, and the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is large. It is because it can form as a foil omission character.

  In addition, a manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be formed as a foil-free character together with a product number (a number listed in a catalog). In this case, it is formed as a foil-cut character so as to be easily visible as compared with the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferred. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is further printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMC 30 'showing the position where capacitor MC 30 is arranged (the direction of capacitor MC 30 is not specified since there is no polarity) corresponding to region MSLKMC 30 is formed by a dashed line as a foil removal region, and this region MSLKMC 30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a foil-removed character near the upper left and at the upper left. In the foil removal area, in the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, the wiring patterns for supplying power, and the various land patterns, except for various land patterns, The area is formed by removing the copper foil around it. In the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, the foil-removed characters are formed as a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil and removing the copper foil around it. The part numbers formed as foil-removed characters are formed as foil-removed characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, so that the part numbers can be enlarged to form foil-removed characters.

  In addition, while the foil removal area | region and the wiring pattern which each forms a foil removal character are electrically insulated and formed with various electronic components, the wiring pattern which transmits a control signal, the wiring pattern which supplies a power supply, various kinds It is electrically insulated from the land pattern and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310.

[Comparison with the configuration of the measure for the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration for the measure of the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration for measures against the visibility of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (or the direction) of arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMIC 30 showing the white background (or solid black line) is printed as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed in the vicinity of the region MSLK MIC 30 and lower left Is printed in white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 is information in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 and to the right as described above. The size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) in which the part number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to see in comparison with the size.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 as described above. Region MSLKMC30 showing silkscreening indicates the position where capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no specification of the direction because capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it will be arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. Printed in white solid line (or black solid line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC 30 and in the upper right, part number corresponding to capacitor MC 30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing .

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, green is adopted as a resist of the main control substrate 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 and the back surface (solder surface) 2.) The whole is a green resist and is solidly coated except for various land patterns.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures against visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65C, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control board 1310 further includes The area MSLKMIC 30 'indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) at which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control substrate 1310 is white A white resist is formed by a dashed line as a white resist-extracted area using a resist, and in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 ', the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is double-painted twice on the upper left It is formed as a punctuation character.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. This article number MSLKMIC 30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and near the area MSLKMIC 30 'instead of the article number MSLKMIC 30p. It is formed as a white resist-removed character using a twice-painted white resist so as to be easily visible as compared to the size of (number listed in the catalog).

  Further, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is further printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 Region MSLKMC 30 'indicates the position where the capacitor MC 30 is to be disposed (the direction of the capacitor MC 30 is not specified because there is no polarity). The region MSLKMC 30' is a white resist-extracted region using twice-painted white resist. The part is formed by a chain line, and is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that has a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 and is twice upper near the left side of the region MSLKMC 30 '.

  Specifically, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is covered with the white resist as a first time of the twice-painted white resist (that is, the twice-painted white resist is used) As the first of them, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is coated with a white resist on the whole except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is located at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310 as the second of the twice-painted white resist. An area MSLKMIC 30 'indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged is masked as a white resist-extracted area in a dashed line shape, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is located near the area MSLKMIC 30' and upper left. And the corresponding part number is masked as a white resist-extracted character, an information area is provided in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 'and below, and the product number MSLKMIC 30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is masked as a white resist-extracted character in this information area. The area where the capacitor MC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (the direction is not designated because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity). The MSLKMC 30 'is masked as a white resist-extracted area in a dashed line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC 30 is masked as a white resist-extracted character in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC 30' and at the upper left.

  In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310 is covered with a white resist by solidly coating a white resist except for various land patterns. That is, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is a white resist and is solidly coated except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

  As a result, although a white resist of the second layer is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer, and the white of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the area masked by the area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC 30 'indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) for arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is white. The part number formed with a dashed line as a resist removing area, the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 formed as a white resist removing character, and marked or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in catalog) MSLK MIC 30 p with white resist A region MSLKMC 30 'indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be disposed (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because the polarity is not given) is formed by a dashed line, and the component number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character. Be done. Therefore, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably viewed.

  When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character, it is formed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, and therefore, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-extracted character.

  When forming the product number MSLKMIC 30p as a white resist-extracted character, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for measures against visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be the same or may be larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration for the measure against the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. The electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, while the size needs to be small and arranged in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component, and the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is large. It is because it can form as a white resist omission character.

  In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the name of the manufacturing company (including the abbreviation and the symbol) may be formed as a white resist-removed character. In this case, it is formed as a white resist-extracted character so as to be easily visible as compared with the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferred. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

  When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white-resist-free character, it is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control substrate 1310, and therefore, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-extracted character.

  In the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is a white resist and is solidly coated except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is also white with various lands. It may be configured to be solid-painted except for the pattern. In this case, the area indicating the position (including designation of the orientation) at which the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 are arranged may be silk printing on the surface of the main control substrate 1310 (mounting Printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc., and part numbers corresponding to various electronic Printed as dark letters of. By configuring in this manner, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the other substrate are solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, so that these substrates are mainly used for these other substrates. A feature that the control substrate 1310 can be made to stand out can be provided. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, the product number of an electronic component of SMD type (when the manufacturing company name (including abbreviation and symbol is also included) in addition to this product number) is also described. ) May also be printed as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310.

  The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is configured to be solidly coated with a white resist except for various land patterns, and the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is It may be configured to be printed as silk printing using a twice-painted different-color resist in which the resist color of the first (base) and the second resist are different colors. After printing the whole surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 as silk printing in white except for various land patterns as the first (base), subsequently, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 The main control board 1310 is taken as the second time with the area indicating the position (including specification of the orientation) where the various electronic components to be mounted are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components masked. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the above may be printed as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow and red except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the other substrate are coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, and are solidly coated with respect to these other substrates. A feature that the control substrate 1310 can be made to stand out can be provided. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize an area indicating a position (including designation of an orientation) at which various electronic components are arranged and a part number corresponding to the various electronic components.

  Moreover, in the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is a white resist and is solidly coated except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 is also white with various lands. It may be configured to be solid-painted except for the pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (including designation of the orientation) at which the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 may be provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 The white resist removal region is formed as a solid line, and component numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, the product numbers of electronic components of SMD type (in addition to this product number, the name of the manufacturing company (including abbreviations and symbols)) are also main products. You may form in the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 as a white resist omission character.

6-4 b. Countermeasures against modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component such as an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to replace it with an illegal electronic component and acquire an illegal gaming ball. Explain the point of preventing the act.

  As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension as the size of the SMD package body. , And has a height dimension of 1.5 mm, including the length of the leads projecting from two sides of the SMD package body, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 has a width dimension of 7.8 mm.

  Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who acquires an unauthorized gaming ball by performing unauthorized alteration, The main control substrate box 1320 is formed of a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body, and is sealed. As shown in FIG. 66, in the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimped portion 1303. The caulking unit 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking units. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then, the main control board box 1320 is opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 can not be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is broken.

  However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire in the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegal. If the electronic component is replaced with an electronic component, an unauthorized player may obtain an illegal gaming ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, a plurality of vent holes 1301z having a smaller inner diameter (2 mm in the present embodiment) than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the transparent cover 1301. Adopted the configuration. Thereby, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of the SMD type is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some improper means such as thin wires in the main control board box 1320, the Schmitt of the SMD type The trigger inverter MIC 30 can not be removed from the main control board box 1320 via the vent 1301 z. Therefore, it can be prevented that the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is replaced with an incorrect electronic component.

  Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and is removed from the main control board 1310 by any improper means. Then, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that there are no sensors that transmit the ball of the game ball among various sensors, and the illegitimate means always transmit the fraudulent action such as the approach of the magnet or the illegal vibration. It is determined that cheating is occurring. As a result, when the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is dropped by peeling off the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, a state without entering the ball is presented to an unauthorized person. An illegal gaming ball is not acquired because the state is maintained, and it is transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming character (hall) that the illegal alteration has been performed by the notification of the illegal act being executed. It can also be communicated to the store clerks in the hall. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that fraud among the various sensors that transmit fraud such as the approach of a magnet or fraudulent vibration is always cheating, as described above, the firing permission signal The game logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) so that the game ball can not be launched toward the game area 5a. It can not be done at all.

  In the embodiment described above, the point of mounting the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 as the SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 has been described, but as another SMD type electronic component, For example, when the resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, this SMD type resistance is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 and the main control substrate box 1320 via the vent 1301z. It is necessary to make the inside diameter of the vent 1301 z smaller than the size of the resistance of the SMD type so as not to project from the inside to the outside of the

  Such an SMD type resistance is small, so even if it peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310, it is visually recognized whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 or not. May be difficult to determine. In addition, when the resistance of the SMD type peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 jumps from the inside of the main control substrate box 1320 to the outside through the vent hole 1301 z, Since the trace of the peeled off SMD type resistance disappears, it becomes more difficult to visually identify and determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, when the JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the SMD type resistance, for example, in this 2012 type, the length dimension is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm. In such a small-sized SMD type resistance, even from the inside of the main control board box 1320 even if a defect that the main control board 1310 peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 occurs. The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller dimension (here, 1.2 mm of the width dimension) of the small SMD type resistance so as not to protrude outside. (Here, for example, 1.0 mm).

  As a result, even if a small SMD type resistance peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent holes 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually recognize the peeled small SMD type resistance inside the main control board box 1320. If the main control board box 1320 is shaken in the vertical direction or in the left / right direction, the A small-sized SMD-type resistance that falls off collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310 generates a sound, and this sound gives the opportunity to recognize the peeled-off small SMD-type resistance. You can get it. In addition to electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs in addition to small SMD type resistors, electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are employed. Makes the inside diameter of the vent 1301 z smaller than the smallest of these.

  In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is ensured that the main control board box 1320 jumps out from the inside through the air vent 1301z. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that a defect in which the electronic component of the SMD type peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 due to the deflection of the main control substrate 1310 can be found.

  In the above-described embodiment (including the configuration for measures against visibility of part numbers by the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments), electronic components of SMD type are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 Although the points to be described are described, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of substrates treated as main substrates such as the power supply substrate 630 and the payout control substrate 633.

6-4 c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested at a particular testing organization and can not be shipped to the gaming hall without the approval of this particular testing organization. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310 k for taking out various signals regarding the game. The test connector 1310 k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is disposed in parallel in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). When the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and on the transparent cover 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover body side opening 1301 k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310 k is formed, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to the game hall, the main control board 1310 The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301 which is not mounted on the It is made as to not. For this reason, in the main control board 1310 manufactured as a mass-production machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310 k is formed as a vacant area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, the test connector 1310 k is used as a mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. (See FIG. 64 (b)) and the test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. The configuration to be formed was adopted. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing engine, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to the game hall, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310 k is not formed as a vacant area on the (mounting surface), another SMD type electronic component can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 can be increased.

  Further, by preparing in this way, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the substrate holder 1200 of the game board 5 as preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test organization. Subsequently, a test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in a specific test engine is passed through the test harness base body side opening 1302 k formed in the transparent base body 1302 as a main control board. It is electrically connected to the test connector 1310 k mounted on the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310 ya ′ on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held by the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200 and held (held), so the test connector 1310 k moves toward the test connector 1310 k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to the vibration by the movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1 In addition to the above, it is possible to prevent the test harness for taking out various important signals relating to the game in the test of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and broken.

  In the present embodiment, a connector of a straight SMD type (each pin of the connector is disposed in parallel with the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction as the test connector 1310k. Type), but with a right angle SMD type connector (type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). The side surface (transparent cover 1301) of the transparent cover 1301 mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the control substrate and in the vicinity of any one of the left side, the lower side, the right side, and the upper side Test connector to the test connector 1310k on the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the side wall of the upper side wall facing the test connector 1310k) An arrangement for forming a test harness cover side opening 1301k may be employed for applying Ri. Even with this configuration, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured as a mass-produced machine shipped to a game hall, Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310 k is not formed as a vacant area on the surface (mounting surface) of the control substrate 1310, another SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. It can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 can be increased. In addition, as preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test organization, the test operator first performs a specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the substrate holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. The test harness electrically connected to the test device installed in the engine is attached to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through the test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a game control device (game control board) is provided with a test shot test terminal (testing connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a testing device in a specific testing organization is connected (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-128621 (Paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested at a specific testing organization, but when it is used in the game hall Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and it becomes an empty area, there is a problem that it is not possible to increase the freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the game control board by this empty area.

  Moreover, the game machine which mounts the electronic component of surface mounting type on a board | substrate conventionally is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-144218 (Paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the surface mount type electronic components in the gaming machine described in this document, an identifier such as a part number corresponding to the surface mount type electronic components may be attached, but the size of the surface mount type electronic components And the identifier is difficult to see.

  Moreover, the game machine which mounts the electronic component of surface mounting type on a board | substrate conventionally is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-144218 (Paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic component is formed by some illegal means. There is a risk that the game control board may be removed and replaced with an illegal electronic component to acquire an illegal gaming ball.

  Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a tact switch or the like on the substrate which can sense that the switch is turned on or off with a click feeling during operation by operating the pressing operation unit (for example, Open 2017-023427 (paragraphs [0071] and FIG. 21)). By the way, electronic components such as tact switches described in this document are of a lead type in which each lead is inserted from the front surface to the back surface of the substrate into through holes provided in the substrate and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. It is an electronic component. For example, when such a lead type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board for controlling the progress of a game, the board bends due to the bending of the board due to the operation of the lead type electronic component. There was a possibility that the soldered part of other electronic components mounted on may be peeled off to cause an electrical failure.

  Also, conventionally, there have been proposed game machines in which various control boards are disposed at predetermined positions on the back of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to [0034] and FIG. 3)). By the way, since the game control board for controlling the progress of the game is an important board to determine whether or not to give a profit to the player, it is housed in a board case having a sealing structure, and is illegal Preventive measures are required.

  Moreover, the game machine which mounts a surface mounting component in a board | substrate conventionally is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-144218 (Paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mounted parts in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progression of a game, the surface area of the game control board on which the surface mounted parts are mounted If the wiring pattern is drawn around, the distance dimension between the back surface of the surface mounting component and the surface of the game control board is small, so even if the wiring pattern is modified by any unauthorized means, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting type electronic component There is a problem that it is not possible to prevent cheating against

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a main control board for controlling a game is disposed on the back side in a state of being housed in a case (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031] and Figure 2) By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, the main control board is an important thing to control the game, and thus is housed and sealed in a case as a crime prevention measure It is placed on the back side, and it is required to improve the crime prevention for important things in crime prevention.

6-5. Measures against electromagnetic wave noise intruding through metal case of setting key switch]
Next, measures against electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the metal housing of the setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change substrate 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 and is a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting changing substrate 1311. The main control substrate box 1320 is a game board 5. It is a figure (c) which shows the lower part one part of the left view of the game board 5 in the state attached to.

  In the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the setting key cylinder whose setting key is inserted and rotationally operated is accommodated in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key as described above, and The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of plastic is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder as described above ing.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311 a can take out (output), as a signal, which one of the state in which it is ON and the state in which it is OFF. The signal can be taken out (outputted) from a pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the cylinder and protruding from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. In addition, from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder is rotated by 90 degrees. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces having a predetermined length are formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface). A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is disposed at the center point where the center lines of the two intersect. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which can be inserted is formed on the center line of the setting change substrate 1311 in the left-right direction, A pair of opposing through holes through which a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the rear face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted Hall SLTH1, SLTH2 are formed on the long through hole SLH1, SLH2 90 degree rotation angle has a setting change substrate 1311 on vertical center line of a pair of opposed.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311 a is mounted is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 22 on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) (connection between substrates) Three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2 and SSTH3 are formed, through which various pin terminals (first to third pin terminals) of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 to be inserted can be inserted.

  Among the three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2 and SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1 through which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is inserted is a pair of projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the upper through hole SLTH1 of the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which the lead terminals facing each other can be inserted. The lower through hole SSTH3 through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is inserted can insert a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A pair of opposing Of the holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2, and the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 The middle through holes SSTH2 through which are inserted are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, in the copper plane, the entire through holes SLTH and SLH1 for the setting key switch 1311 a and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311 a are enclosed and the setting change substrate 1311 The foil removal area SINSx which has a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction of is formed. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 are electrically connected from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal region SINSx. It is in an isolated state. In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, a copper plane is formed by removing a copper foil except around the through holes SSTH 1 and SSTH 3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311. A state of being electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 is also formed, and a region which has been foiled is also formed. It has become.

  The back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 is long in the left-right direction of the setting change substrate 1311 at a position corresponding to the foil removal area SINSx formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 in the copper plane. It has a rectangular shape, and except for the periphery of the above-described wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, a foil-removed foil-removed area SINSy formed by removing a copper foil is formed. The foil removal region SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 are the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 by this foil removal region SINSy. It is in the state electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed in

  Through holes STH are respectively formed at the four corners of the surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. These four through holes STH are a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1311 x of the setting change substrate 1311 and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311 y of the setting change substrate 1311 And) are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND).

  The entire surfaces of the setting change substrate 1311 (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) are coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, an area SSLKCN 1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is to be disposed on the resist of the predetermined color is silk printing different from the predetermined color of the resist. The area SSLKSW1 printed as a solid line and indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is disposed is silk-printed as silk printing as an area SSLKSW1 which is a color different from the predetermined color of the resist and indicates the position where the setting key switch 1311a is disposed. Printed with solid lines of the same color. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is disposed in the area SSLKSW1 for mounting (soldering on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311) In the state where the setting key switch 1311a is placed, the boundary line (the solid line of the circular figure) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the boundary line (solid line of the circle figure) of the area SSLKSW1 does not overlap by the setting key switch 1311a. Also in the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is arranged, similarly to the area SSLKSW1, even when the connector SMCN is mounted, the boundary line (U-shaped solid line) of the area SSLKCN1 does not overlap by the connector SMCN It is supposed to be.

  In the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, a reference mark SSTD indicating the rotational position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is turned off is printed ing. When the operator of the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 by this reference mark SSTD, the setting key switch 1311a is not flipped upside down (mistaken) I have to. When the reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, if the setting key switch 1311a is soldered upside down (mistake), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and off. When taking out as a signal which one of the state and the state where the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state, the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF are reversed.

  Here, the reason for forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 will be described. In the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the setting key cylinder whose setting key is inserted and rotationally operated is accommodated in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key as described above, and The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of plastic is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder as described above ing. In the state where the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, as described above, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder It is in an electrically connected state. That is, a state in which the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder which can be a member for the electromagnetic wave noise to enter the setting change substrate 1311 is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control substrate box 1320 It has become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the metal removal key of the setting key switch 1311a is formed by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting changing substrate 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. A pair of opposing long plate shapes along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of a tubular (or rectangular) casing made of aluminum can be inserted The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 There is. In other words, in the present embodiment, the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 (main control substrate 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a. Thus, in a state where a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from the front surface of a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Are prevented from entering solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed in Damping by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder itself. That is, in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic wave noise from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder is prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy can do. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic wave noise can be blocked on the setting change substrate 1311 side from the electromagnetic wave noise intrusion from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder. Can be reliably stopped from advancing to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is an important control substrate for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change substrate 1311 and the ground for transmitting the substrate ground (ground) There is no change to the line. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  Note that the space between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder is filled with a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) to make the setting key cylinder metallic (or rectangular) Even if the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of metal and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but are insulated by adopting a rotatable configuration with respect to the casing of Good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from a cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of metal, the electromagnetic wave noise can be applied to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Metal is prevented from entering solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed in It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. That is, the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. This makes it possible to block the penetration of electromagnetic wave noise from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the penetration of the electromagnetic wave noise is played via the setting change board 1311. Progression to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is an important control substrate for controlling the movement of the substrate, can be reliably stopped, and no fluctuation is given to the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground). Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  A state in which electromagnetic wave noise may enter setting key switch 1311 a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value, so only a limited person, including the game hall manager, is permitted to possess. Being limited to 2-3 people. Therefore, when checking the setting value or changing the setting of the setting value, first, after the clerk of the game hall clerk or the like opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, the setting key is A possessor accesses the setting key switch 1311 a. That is, the person who opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 may be different from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311 a.

  Then, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 charges himself when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotating it. The electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcing unit is connected to the frame earth via the door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the substrate 559. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground line. In other words, a clerk such as a clerk at a game hall who opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 charges himself and electrostatically discharges a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. The electromagnetic wave noise caused by the noise is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via the regular metal key, and the door lock reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground board 559, the island equipment ground wire, and the cylinder lock 127 It can be transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a does not touch the cylinder lock 127, and charges the electromagnetic wave noise by electrostatically discharging it by setting the key switch via the legitimate metal key. It will be communicated to 1311a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is possible to attenuate electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic charge by electrostatic charge by the user themselves by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise due to charging and electrostatic discharge by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with various decorative parts, and when electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via the wiring (not shown), the door frame metal is It is transmitted to the frame earth substrate 559 through the earth wire, and transmitted from the frame earth substrate 559 to the earth of the island facility of the game hall through the island equipment earth wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative parts are for decorating the entire front of the pachinko machine 1 and are disposed substantially throughout the door frame 3. Therefore, a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a is conscious of the door frame 3 when accessing the setting key switch 1311a. If you touch it without touching it, you will touch the various decoration parts provided in the door frame 3, and the electromagnetic wave noise by charging itself and electrostatic discharge will be transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1 as a result It is supposed to be

  In the present embodiment, the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. A long length along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a hole shape is formed, but one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 is connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via a resistor and It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) And each of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the corresponding resistors. May be configured to In this way, the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged with electromagnetic waves due to electrostatic discharge through the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or the setting key cylinder The resistance can be attenuated by this resistance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise due to charging and electrostatic discharge by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  In the present embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic wave noise may be provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the door frame 3 or when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 Of the main frame 4 on which the main frame upper hinge portion 310 and the lower main frame hinge portion 320 are arranged in the vertical direction in a front view left side of the main frame 4 is opposite to the pivoting side (closing side) of the main frame 4 The right side in the front view in the vertical direction may be provided on the open side portion of the main body frame 4. In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, when the main frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2, the one pachinko machine 1 At the back of the other pachinko machine 1 which has become a player, a person in charge of a clerk or the like in the game hall reaches. When a clerk of a game hall clerk opens the main frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2 for some reason, after the other pachinko machine 1 which is opposite to the one pachinko machine 1 There is also a case to access the side. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge in the game hall clerks themselves, so for example, an electrostatic removal pad can be used as a part which can be reached by the staff of the game hall clerks and the like. It may be provided on the rear surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the rear surface side of the interface substrate cover 636, or may be provided on the rear surface side of the cover body of the dispensing control substrate box 632, or the rear surface of the dispensing device 350. It may be provided on the side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 5 may be formed by molding a conductive resin. The main body frame base unit 300 has the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side in a front view, so the main body frame base unit 300 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-described frame earth substrate 559 via a main frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire (not shown). Thus, for example, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, for example, the main body frame base unit 300 on the open side of the main body frame 4 can be accessed The left hand is placed to support the body, and the right hand can be extended to the rear side of the main unit frame 4 or the rear side of the game board 5, so when the left hand is placed on the main unit frame base unit 300 When the electromagnetic wave noise caused by discharging is transmitted to the main frame base unit 300 and transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 through the door frame metal ground wire, and from the frame ground board 559 to the island facility ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the line and removed from the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcing unit is the door frame metal ground The frame earth substrate 559 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 via a wire, and the frame earth substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire. Wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply substrate 630 of the main frame 4 to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply substrate 630 You may Further, the door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front of the pachinko machine 1, and includes various decorative parts, and some of the various decorative parts do not have any decorative plating at all, but the decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), Although the frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, the door frame metal ground wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, the main frame Alternatively, the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply substrate 630 may be electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply substrate 630 of FIG. The power supply substrate 630 is supplied with 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall. The AC 24 V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply substrate 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply substrate 630. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly flows a current, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) intrudes, the resistance value instantaneously decreases and a current flows, and the excessive voltage disappears. , Has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply substrate 630 to the ground side (earth) from the terminal of the power supply substrate 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1 Be done.

  By the way, as described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. As described above, the driving substrate box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5. In the state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the cover 1301 of the main control board 1320 The rear face of the game board 5 is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da to the rear face of the cover of the drive board box 1730.

  The arrangement will be described. On the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, an insertion slot for inserting the setting key is provided. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 in a state where the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When an operator carries out the work of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, temporarily places it on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 removed is temporarily placed on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, the leg of the worker may hit the game board 5 and fall over during the operation of the game board 5 temporarily placed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the back surface of the substrate holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control substrate 1320 is A configuration is adopted in which the distance dimension da is provided with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the game board 5 is disposed close to the front side. As a result, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof, the leg of the worker apologizes to the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 heads toward the floor of the game hall. Even if the main control board 1320 is overturned, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da with respect to the rear face of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Even if the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 and the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320 are in contact with the floor of the game hall by the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 protruding compared to the control substrate box 1320, the setting key The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a prevents collision with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between the front and the floor of the game hall. It is possible.

  In addition, inside the island facilities of the game hall, as described above, multiple types of wires for electrically connecting with the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the top, According to the specification of the pachinko machine 1, there are wires electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wires not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring which is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 is not connected, and is suspended from the upper inside of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a plurality in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, this unconnected wiring is provided on the game board 5 various substrates, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps When a light emitting means such as a light source is touched, a short circuit may occur to cause breakage (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many are bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wire, and the tip of the unconnected wire is caught by the slit 641 and the gaming board 5 is further Since it is hard to infiltrate toward the back side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control substrate 1310 and the setting change substrate 1311 are accommodated in the main control substrate box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover 1301 of the main control substrate 1320 is the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 The front end of the game board 5 is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da with respect to the rear face of the game board. It is blocked by the cover of the board box 1730 and can not enter toward the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wire contacts the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. Can be prevented reliably.

  Even if the tip of the unconnected wire contacts the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change substrate 1311 or the front surface of the setting key cylinder, the present embodiment described above As described above, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, the metal cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a -Shaped (or rectangular) casing A pair of opposing long through holes having a long hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the casing can be inserted Solid ground (substrate) in which SLH1 and SLH2 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Since the substrate ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, the game progress is made via the setting change board 1311. There is no influence on the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310 which is an important control substrate to control the circuit board, and there is no fluctuation to the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground). Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  The cover of the drive substrate box 1730 and the cover 1301 of the main control substrate 1320 are molded of a nonconductive resin. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive substrate box 1730 are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without being in contact with each other. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

  Although the setting key switch 1311a adopted in the above-described embodiment has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder to be accommodated therein, a larger number of tumbler pins may be adopted. In this way, security can be further enhanced, and if mass-produced and widely available in the market, the unit price can be reduced, which contributes to cost reduction. Referring to FIG. 68, the setting key switch 1311a 'accommodating the setting key cylinder having a larger number of tumbler pins is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as compared to the setting key cylinder received in the setting key switch 1311a. explain. FIG. 68 shows a modification 1 (a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the gaming board in a state where the main control board box is attached to the game board, where the main control board box is attached to the gaming board It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part of the left side view of the game board in a. In FIG. 68, the same components as described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, FIG. As shown in the figure, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the front face of the setting key cylinder of this setting key switch 1311a 'is the cover body of the drive board box 1730 Is disposed to project rearward of the game board 5 with a distance dimension db with respect to the rear face of the game board. A protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported by the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 to protect the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ projecting from the rear face of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Provided in A locking projection (not shown) is formed on the protective cover 1304, and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed in the cover body 1301 'of the main control board box 1320. When the locking projection of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301 'of the main control board box 1320, the protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported and opened from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 to set the key switch You can access 1311a '.

  By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof, the operator is accidentally Since the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320 abuts on the floor of the game hall even if the legs of the game board 5 hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'can prevent collision with the floor of the gaming hall by reliably forming a space between the front and the floor of the gaming hall.

  In addition, inside the island facilities of the game hall, as described above, multiple types of wires for electrically connecting with the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the top, According to the specification of the pachinko machine 1, there are wires electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wires not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring which is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 is not connected, and is suspended from the upper inside of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a plurality in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, this unconnected wiring is provided on the game board 5 various substrates, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps When a light emitting means such as a light source is touched, a short circuit may occur to cause breakage (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many are bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wire, and the tip of the unconnected wire is caught by the slit 641 and the gaming board 5 is further Since it is hard to infiltrate toward the back side, a short circuit can be prevented. In a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the front end of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 temporarily through the slit 641, it is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320, and the front end of the unconnected wiring Can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the front surface portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ provided on the setting change substrate 1311. The cover of the drive substrate box 1730, the cover 1301 of the main control substrate 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded of a nonconductive resin.

  When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover of the drive board box 1730 are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the main cover The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 They are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

  Substrate holder 1200 in which the length in a front view back and forth direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in the substrate holder 1200 is shortened compared to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 described above. When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear face thereof, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'is the main control board, as shown in FIG. Although the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ protrudes from the cover body 1301 ′ of the box 1320, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ has a distance dimension dc to the rear face of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. It is arranged side by side. As a result, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof, the leg of the worker apologizes to the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 heads toward the floor of the game hall. Even if the main control board 1320 is overturned, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is placed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear face of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Even if the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 and the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320 are in contact with the floor of the game hall by the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 protruding compared to the control substrate box 1320, the setting key The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a 'prevents a collision with the floor of the gaming hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the gaming hall Rukoto can. In other words, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof, the leg of the worker apologizes to the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 heads toward the floor of the game hall. Of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'so that the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' does not abut on the floor of the game hall The length has been adjusted. In addition, in addition to the length of the front view back and forth direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in the substrate holder 1200 'so that the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' does not abut on the floor of the game hall. A recess is formed on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 to which the substrate holder 1200 'is attached, and the recess is adjusted by the depth of the recess (the length in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the depth direction)). Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) may be adjusted by the recess and the substrate holder 1200 ′.

  In addition, inside the island facilities of the game hall, as described above, multiple types of wires for electrically connecting with the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the top, According to the specification of the pachinko machine 1, there are wires electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wires not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring which is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 is not connected, and is suspended from the upper inside of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a plurality in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, this unconnected wiring is provided on the game board 5 various substrates, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps When a light emitting means such as a light source is touched, a short circuit may occur to cause breakage (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many are bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wire, and the tip of the unconnected wire is caught by the slit 641 and the gaming board 5 is further Since it is hard to infiltrate toward the back side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control substrate 1310 and the setting change substrate 1311 are accommodated in the main control substrate box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 ′, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control substrate 1320 is the cover of the drive substrate box 1730 Since the front side of the game board 5 is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with respect to the rear face of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wire intrudes into the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 It is blocked by the cover body of the drive substrate box 1730 and can not enter toward the main control substrate box 1320, and the front end portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'provided on the setting change substrate 1311 with the tip of the unconnected wire It can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the The cover of the drive substrate box 1730 and the cover 1301 of the main control substrate 1320 are molded of a nonconductive resin.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover of the drive board box 1730 are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without being in contact with each other, and the back cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are disposed substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

[7. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 by the player rotating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously played in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N Thus, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the gaming ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill rotating by the contact of the game ball B is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501. .

  When the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side (left side relative to the upper right peripheral wall 2510) in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, While abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the central discharge portion 2503a is positioned immediately above the first start opening 2002, the first probability is high with a high probability. Acceptable at the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2501, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N. It may be accepted by the general winning opening 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001 or the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 350 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B struck into the upper part of the center character 2500 is on the right side (upper space above the upper right peripheral wall 2510) than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. When entering the portion 2511), it is released above the gate portion 2003 of the center character 2500 through either the first flow passage 2521 or the second flow passage 2522 of the flow passage group 2520 of the center character 2500, and the gate After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the part 2003, the gate part 2003 is passed with a certain probability.

  The flow passage group 2520 of the center product 2500 has a first flow passage 2521 whose inlet is open in the vicinity of the stopper 1006, and an opening is spaced leftward from the inlet of the first flow passage 2521. And a second circulation passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against the stopper 1006 (so-called, right-handed), it enters the first circulation passage 2521 and enters the upstream space 2511 and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (a strength that is somewhat weaker than a right strike), the game enters the second distribution passage 2522 with high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 flows either in the first flow passage 2521 or the second flow passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

  On the other hand, the game ball B which has flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 is guided to the right of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the gate portion 2003. It passes through the right side of the gate unit 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B which has flowed through the second distribution passage 2522 is guided to the left more than the right side of the gate 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the gate 2003 and is higher The gate unit 2003 is passed by probability.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery result is "normal hit" in the attacker unit 2400. The second start port 2004 which is closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuating time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 or the sub function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The game ball B which has passed through the right side of the gate unit 2003 has a very high probability that the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 by a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Enters the right passage 2422 of the On the other hand, the game ball B which has passed through the gate unit 2003 or the game ball B which has passed through the left side of the gate unit 2003 is made of a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left with a very high probability that the right adjacency path 2422 is attached, and enters the left adjacency path 2421 with a high probability.

  It should be noted that a general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is disposed to the left of the right attacking passage 2422. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacking right passage 2422 abuts on the step 1005 a of the right rail 1005, and enters the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425 with high probability, and is closed It distributes on the 2nd starting mouth door 2411. If the game ball B which has entered the right attack passage 2422 does not enter the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, it enters the lower right passage 2426 and is concerned with the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the gaming ball B which has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters on the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the second starting opening door 2411 in the closed state.

  Then, when the game ball B enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start opening door 2411 is When in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game ball B, which entered the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and was not accepted by the second start opening 2004, was discharged to the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is released into the game area 5a and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 and the intermediate passage 2427 is open, the second starting opening guide is The game balls B discharged from the shelf 2423 to the side of the big winning opening induction shelf 2424 enter the middle passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5 a without being associated with the big winning opening 2005.

  From the above, since the game ball B which has circulated the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass the gate part 2003 much, the second start opening 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate part 2003 of the game ball B The result of the ordinary lottery is not often drawn, and the game ball B is not accepted very much in the second start port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B which circulated the 2nd distribution passage 2522 passes gate part 2003 with high probability, the passage of the gate part 2003 of game ball B makes the 2nd starting opening 2004 an open state. There is a high possibility that the “normal hit” will be drawn and the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second start port 2004 is high.

  From such a thing, since the player performs a hitting operation of the gaming ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, the hitting strength that the gaming ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 And, with the hitting strength that the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522, the hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by giving a change to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and for the player to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B to suppress a drop in interest It can be done.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 The lottery of the result of the special lottery to generate ") is performed. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery results drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, there are "loss", "15R big hit A", "15R big hit B", etc. .

  The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 generate the advantageous gaming state In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 350 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  If the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting the game ball B, or a predetermined high winning opening 2005 If any one of the conditions (eg, ten pieces of game balls B) is received, an open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state is Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is "15R big hit", it repeats 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", when the game ball accepted in the big winning hole 2005 is distributed to the second receiving slot 2008 by the distribution piece 2415 when the big winning hole 2005 is opened due to the big hitting gaming state, the big hitting game After the state is over, ST (special time) is generated as the advantageous game state. In this ST, the probability of changing the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn during a specific number of predetermined changes is changed or the time for changing the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result Maintain the state of

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing until the special lottery result drawn is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  As described above, when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the second distribution passage When performing a game ball B hit operation aiming at the entrance of 2522, the player must adjust the hit operation slightly, so some players may feel embarrassed or annoyed by the arrival of such a chance. As a result, there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and the first distribution passage 2521 is made to flow, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and The game ball B can be distributed to the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 (large winning opening 2005 side) through the second starting opening induction shelf 2423, so it is easy even without adjusting the delicate operation. The game ball B can be accepted to the large winning opening 2005 by the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous game state, and the hitting operation of the game ball B is sharp according to the game state. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R big hit game A, 15R big hit game B, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 are set to a longer time.

  Further, in peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of effect operation unit 160 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the unit 161. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised and highlighted by the first elevation driving motor 180a and the second elevation driving motor 182, and the player participation type effect is enjoyed by the operation of the presentation operation section 160. be able to.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. And, it is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, etc. by appropriately using the back third effect unit 3300 etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the interest for the player's game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Further, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result drawn, the back first of back unit 3000 in gaming board 5 It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300 etc. It can be enjoyed and it can control that a player's interest in a game is reduced.

[8. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 62 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
A special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as various random numbers used for game control, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine an initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in deciding whether or not to reach when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400 when generating a big hit gaming state Design random numbers for use in determination of big hit symbols and small hit symbols displayed and derived by symbol display (determination of hit types), and for determination of initial values of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, a random number per standard symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close a movable piece that enables reception of a game ball in the second start port 2004, and this general symbol per symbol determination The initial value determination random for determination per normal symbol for use in determination of the initial value of the random number for the normal symbol and the normal symbol for use in determination of the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for variable display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit makes a first value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs high-speed presetting based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting other values within the defined numerical range one after another and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining the normal pattern. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per round determination is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal determination per symbol.

  In this embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power on processing described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information as a numerical value and the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (when power is off) When not clearing, except for a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it is not the same, the initial value determination random number per normal symbol per judgment is a non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. The initial value is always derived from the fixed numeric range of the counter which updates the random number per pattern usually based on the extracted ID code and derives the same fixed value. Run the physical, fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, in the case of the initial value determination random number for determination per normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the initial value determination random number per symbol normal determination is derived using the ID code, and the manufacturer of the main control MPU incorporates the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU by the manufacturer. The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing except the specific area out of the entire area of the main control internal RAM A second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution and a two-step security measure by the second security measure are prevented from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU, and this taken out ID code is used as an initial value determination random number per determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. A momentary stop is generated at every predetermined interval obtained, and even if the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed so that the gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 Can not be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU, as shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, processing is performed when the main control side power is turned on. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch) sharing the three functions, and here, it is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM Acts as a function of the RAM clear switch to erase information completely. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is not cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated is HI. When it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated while the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the operation is performed, and it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. In addition, since it is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process which is this routine to the determination in step S14, actually, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  When it is determined in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU for a predetermined time after power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation, unpaid award balls, and other information (for example, main award balls number) This flag is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including the information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), etc. It is set to 1 when deleting various information, and 0 when not deleting various information. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequently to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts a setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. And the setting key switch 1311 a is set by the setting key cylinder being turned clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311 a) and turned on. The key is turned on, and this is performed based on the signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a. In addition, since it is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process which is this routine to the determination of step S18, actually, the person who operates the setting key switch 1311a turns on After the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch using the signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and / or a signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). Setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (main area for setting values in a specific area described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of the ON operation of the ON), and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value It is set to a value of 1 when permitting display, and a value of 0 when not permitted to perform setting change of setting values or confirmation display. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state capable of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. In addition, since the delivery control board 633 completes boot in a short time as compared with the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the delivery control board 633 is a main control board 1310 (main control MPU Can receive various commands from).

  Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. When it is determined in step S24 that the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance notification signal, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 1 or not. It is determined (step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  When it is determined in step S25 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 And, it is determined whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). Although the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. It is determined to delete various types of information as in the case where the predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied.

  In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0. And, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key on flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the preset setting display permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g, although the detailed description will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S28, or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG If it is determined that the value is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S29, the main control MPU causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (described at power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the values match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in main control internal RAM in main control side power off processing described later It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the values (sum values) of the checksums do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU does not have the backup flag BK-FLG as the value 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 after turning operation by turning 60 degrees clockwise toward the ON direction, this routine is performed again in this routine. A certain main control side power-on process is started. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. At the same time, in the determination of step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a by the signal of the setting key ON. It is determined that the setting key is turned on, and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. Therefore, in the determination in step S25 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1, and assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, It is determined that the set value change permission condition is established, and the specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S38 described later following the setting change process of step S37 described later. It is possible to clear the RAM error and proceed with the game by clearing the data (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error cancellation method").

  As a method different from the first RAM error cancellation method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power on process, which is the present routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2, and / or the setting key is set by the signal of the setting key ON. Since it is determined that the switch 1311a is not set on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 in step S20B. Therefore, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is determined in step S26 described above. Is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0. That is, although the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, it is determined to delete various information as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and the main control is performed in the process of step S38 described later. It is possible to cancel the RAM error and advance the game by clearing except the specific area in the entire area of the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error cancellation method") .

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines whether If the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display is performed in step S33 and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When it is reported that there is an abnormality (or something that can not be trusted) in the contents stored in, two cancellation methods of the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method Can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the setting of the setting value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error cancellation method using the RWM clear button 633z.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control built-in A work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example, a fraudster is in the hem of an arm) The high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control substrate 1310 to reset the main control MPU itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, since various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific area.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S25 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, that is, changes the preset setting value If it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). In this setting change processing, although the detailed description will be described later, it is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch) that doubles as three functions. Here, the setting change for selecting and switching the setting value Acts as a button function. Every time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (selection switching signal of the setting value) notifying that is inputted, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is turned on from the setting key cylinder, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. .

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0, that is, it is determined in advance. When it is determined that the various information is to be erased as in the case where the set value change permission condition is established in advance although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the specific region is excluded from the entire region of the main control internal RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area among all the areas of the main control internal RAM). In this embodiment, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG does not have a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, in addition to when it is determined to delete various information, the setting control process is always completed. The specific area of the entire area is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the main control internal RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" refers to an area dedicated to the setting value in which the setting value is stored, and counting of the number of balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 And an area dedicated to out-of-sphere counting in which results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value to be changed in setting change processing to be described later, and the out ball count dedicated area is a ball of game balls collected by the out port 1008 counted in a ball count processing to be described later. The count result (total number) of the number is stored.

  The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, the main control MPU is a logic (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. Is an instruction to clear the RAM, and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed, the main control MPU nonvolatile RAM The unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, an initial value derivation process is carried out to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for judgment per normal pattern. The fixed value is used as the initial value determination random number for determination per normal symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. Tosuru.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0, for example. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register”, which is incorporated in the main control MPU to set an initial value to the main control built-in WDT which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register to start the main control built-in WDT and start the timing until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts up, clocking by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built in the main control MPU) is reached until this timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the clocking again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers relating to the game, the special random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state is random number in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU to update by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and acquisition, activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is started by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When all the values in the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract one after another without duplicating other values inside. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit, and the main control internal hardware when this latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to indicate that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created to be transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM Remember to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various kinds of information are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S54). When shutting off the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure notification as described above. Ru. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number per normal symbol judgment, the initial value determination random number per normal symbol judgment, the random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-coincidence random number update process.

  After step S56, the main control MPU returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the main control MPU has determined that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU starts to output a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops the drive signals being output to the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the adder solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310 h, etc. (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the main control internal RAM can not be accessed by the setting of the RAM access prohibition, updating of the contents of the main control internal RAM can be prevented.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU with respect to the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  As described above, the main control MPU is subject to forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU can not perform the determination of step S54 and can not perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power on process. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the value (sum value) of the checksum in the main control-side power-off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the value (sum value) of the checksum stored when the main control side power-off process is executed, and the checksum calculated in step S29 when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit and restarted The value (sum value) can not match, and a check sum (sum value) error occurs in the main control internal RAM without exception, and a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control internal RAM in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  Further, in the determination of step S25, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1. When it is determined, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and the specific area is completely erased (cleared) in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area in the process of step S38. -When FLG is a value 1 and setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0, that is, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied Similarly, when it is determined that the various information is to be erased, in the processing of step S38, identification is made among all the areas of the main control internal RAM. With the exception of the band to completely erase (clear). As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (precisely, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z In the case where the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing) the setting value can be changed and determined (if the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main The control MPU always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the operation of the game hall is ended, the pachinko machine 1 If the player is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, in a state of being per probability fluctuation (certain change)), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information by the start of the next business operation. Therefore, it is necessary for a clerk such as a salesperson of the game hall to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. Further, when the setting value is determined to be changed, when the setting changing process is performed, it is obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is performed even if the current setting value is consequently maintained. It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, since the setting key is an important key that can be used to confirm the current setting value, etc., in addition to changing the setting value, a limited person, including the game hall manager, Only possession is permitted and limited to 2-3 people. In the present embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed by only a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall clerk or the like erases (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information is mainly used. It is possible to erase (clear) from the control built-in RAM.

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting | reporting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting | standby process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure advance signal in step S24, that is, the problem in the case where the process after step S26 is performed after the wait time standby process of step S22 will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU receives a charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. It is designed to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even if the power from the island facility of the game hall is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the island charged with the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as direct current +5 V to make the island of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and an island facility of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed when the power supply from the above is shut off.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the standby time until the system performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment) 2.5 seconds has been set), and if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU Charge is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even when the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S29. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch at the time of power recovery, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a clerk or the like in the game hall and the RAM clear There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly deleted (cleared) even if there is no intention display by a clerk in the hall or the like.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the game can not be progressed. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is performed in step S10.

  Thus, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, the game can not be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) Can be prevented from being updated, and no change occurs in the calculation result of the checksum. Thus, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure advance signal is not input (that is, step S22 Pachinko machine when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process) Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, causes the game to proceed according to the progress of this game, and other information (for example, main prize ball number A step of backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of main control side power supply interruption configured with the processing of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU When rebooting, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the “instant interruption or power supply securing period” of approximately 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is input, the processing returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  Since the progress of the game can not be performed by such software, the step after the step S24 (specifically, the interruption initialization is performed in the step S42, and thereafter, the interruption permission is made in the step S52) Content of main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment) by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later A mechanism was adopted in which it is possible to prevent various information (including information indicating the value of the counter value) from being updated. In this way, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination To ensure that the main control side power-off process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and so on) By dividing the information into two parts, a part to be covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) is not changed at all , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.)) are surely prevented from being changed So that the can.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) To communicate, create a power on state command classified as power on, a power on main control return destination command, and a power on main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command and send it as main information with built-in main control It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, the problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described in the case where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when power is turned on at the time of power on at the time of power on is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, a big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start driving the attacker solenoid 2405, and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will shift to the state open from the state closed by the member.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the big hit gaming state I can not show at all which round of. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening 1 count display command for conveying the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005 is a main control board Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits and transmits to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the effect that the number of balls of the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Although it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral winning control board 1510 from the main control board 1310 a large winning opening 1 closing display command which instructs to shift to the closed state (that is, to start closing the round between the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state (5th round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2405 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. To move to the state of being To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that informs the player that the game state is advantageous (for example, the player that the movable piece is open The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and causes the second start port to open when the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the screen to be transmitted to the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the status 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, thereby starting the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and closing the movable piece So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, it is a gaming state where the gaming ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is realized. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen to be transmitted on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen for instructing a game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing a game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not understand what kind of game they played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power on state command classified as power on in step S50, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts to drive the attacker solenoid 2405 as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it should shift to the state, so the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and the Screen to start driving of 05 and tell that the big winning opening 2005 is in the state of being opened by the opening and closing member (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Enter the game ball in the big winning opening The game of “Please play the game so that the ball is played.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600) to the player and the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine has a big winning opening 2005 Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the game ball, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes an acceptable game state in which the game ball can be received to the second starting port 2004 and a game state advantageous to the player In this state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power returns, the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. (Eg, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening.") The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen to transmit a message to the player, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 after power recovery. It is possible to instruct the game of making a ball.

  As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S29. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the values of the checksums will match, and it is always cleared except for a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38.

  As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at the time of power on is performed in step S50, the power on state command classified as power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power on status command, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball Only three commands, ie, the number information output judgment counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt process described later, these commands are first sent a power on status command, then a power on primary control return destination command is sent, and then the power on main notification ball number An information output determination counter notification command is to be transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power on state command is the RWM clear button of the payout control board 633 at the time of power on (including the case of power recovery due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on). When 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that effect and the time of power on (in addition to the case of power on, Any of the low probability time short status, high probability time short status, low probability non-short status, and high probability non-short status described above, including power recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage. And the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as a pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs).

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on state in step S50, the power-on state command divided into the power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310 Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 71 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Following step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process. The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric symbol control process described later When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has properly received various commands is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, and the second starting opening sensor 2402 Detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, or the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. Signal (The signal from this RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, so it may be masked and reading may be omitted.), Door frame open switch 4a Detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, Read each payment ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 normally receives the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described above, and input information of the main control internal RAM as input information Store in storage area. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read respectively, the starting opening winning command divided into the other corresponding to this is used as the transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. It stores in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting opening sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of (1), the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state (including the case where the vacant terminal process is performed) being input to all the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU is started. First, each reading is performed as a first reading, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, reading is performed again as a second reading. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. The same result is treated as having no game ball entered or ignoring the input.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the states (including those subjected to the idle terminal process) being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are covered for the first to third times. Therefore, false reading due to the influence of chattering or noise can be avoided by performing two readings, ie, two readings to compare and two readings comparing to the second to fourth times. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, an inspection from the vibration sensor 3005 Signal, Signal from RWM clear button 633z of payout control board 633 (The signal from this RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, so mask and read May be omitted), a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the control board 633 has normally received.

  Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the status of the terminal subjected to idle terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as an idle terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is whether the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal process among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW or not. Do based on When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the free terminal processing is not LOW, it is classified into a notification display that indicates that a fault is occurring in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The trouble command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a rapid random number update process (step S106). In the present random number updating process, the above-described symbol random numbers are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number involved in the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number updating process is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the initial value determination random number per normal symbol determination are also updated by this success random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the initial value determination random number for determination per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determination per symbol normally. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the initial value determination random number for collision determination is updated by this success random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal determination per symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 70. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And, it may be a mechanism to update the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process of step S56

  Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball number counting process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a detection signal from the out-port sensor 3032 is input, and a game area 5a is defined in the game board 5 When the out port sensor 3032 detects the game balls collected by the provided out port 1008, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 Perform an operation (increment). The main control MPU sets the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008, to the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. While storing, the output of the lighting signal displayed on the base monitor 1310 h is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of gaming balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, creates a ball collection command to that effect And stores it as transmission information in the output information storage area. In addition, when the main control MPU reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 65535) of the value of the collection ball counter which is the calculation result and further adds (increments) the value of the collection ball counter by the value 1, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value of 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out gaming balls is created based on the input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633. Create a self-check command to check the connection between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and the self check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When a dispenser ACK signal notifying that the dispensing control board 633 has received the command normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is used. It creates and sends it to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the input information. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified as other to convey that effect, is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, that is, the first starting opening 2002 Based on the game balls entered in the various winning openings (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") such as the second starting opening 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 etc. It counts the number of game balls scheduled to be played, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determining counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determining counter The input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added to the value of. When it is over (ie, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls has reached 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and as transmission information The value indicating the number of balls exceeded as well as the value stored in the output information storage area is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, the prize ball scheduled information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above It is adapted to store update.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error cancellation navi command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as the payee serial data, information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM as output information. Also, the main control MPU reshapes the command received normally as the payee serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And frame status 2 command)), and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, although the second start opening door 2411 is not in the open state, there is a ball entry to the game ball B in the second start opening 2004, or the big winning opening door 2413 is not in the open state. It is confirmed that there is an abnormal state regarding the winning balls, such as the game ball B entering the big winning opening 2005, or there is an entering ball. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the abnormal state regarding the winning balls has occurred in the injustice detecting process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 By outputting the security signal, the main control MPU can contribute to the fact that the clerk of the game hall clerk or the like can find an abnormal state regarding the winning ball at an early stage. Note that the security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred is the security signal output when it is determined that the magnet go-off described later is performed, or the vibration described later. This is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that goto is being performed. Also, the security signal is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side through the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 as the main control MPU. However, after the main control MPU transmits a command instructing output of a security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU causes the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. A security signal may be output to a hall computer installed in the computer.

  Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, the fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnetism") It is determined that the value is 1) and the value of the magnet Goto counter is incremented (incremented). The value of the magnet got counter is incremented each time it is determined that the magnet got is performed in the injustice detecting process, and is included in the game backup information, and is cleared to the initial value when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is to be set as. When the value of the magnet got counter reaches the upper limit (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). A magnet magnet notification command divided into a notification display notifying that magnet magnetism has been performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the magnet is performed in the injustice detecting process, the hall computer provided on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly used. By outputting a security signal by the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of a game hall can find a magnet got at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraudulent activity due to vibration (hereinafter referred to as "vibrational vibration") ) Is performed, and the value of the vibration got counter is incremented by one. The value of the vibration got counter is incremented each time it is determined that vibration got is performed in the injustice detecting process, and is included in the game backup information, and is cleared to the initial value when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is to be set as. When the value of the vibration got counter reaches the upper limit (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). And) create a vibration got notification command divided into a notification display notifying that vibration got is being performed, and store it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that vibration got is being performed in the injustice detecting process, the hall computer provided on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly used. The output of the security signal by the control MPU can contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall can find the vibration got at an early stage.

  Further, in the injustice detecting process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not the big hit gaming state (big winning opening When a game ball enters a ball in 2005), etc., for a special winning opening abnormal winning occurrence, create a winning abnormality display command classified as notification display as an abnormal state, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information .

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the magnet goto and / or the vibration goto are detected, the fraud behavior detection flag FD-FLG is set to the value 1 as the detection of the fraud, while the magnet goto and the vibration goto are detected. If not detected, the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is set to the value 0 as no cheating detection. The fraudulent action detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Also, when the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal prize occurrence is detected, the value of 1 may be set to the injustice detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the injustice.

  Following step S112, the main control MPU performs an emission permission signal setting process (step S113). In the launch permission signal setting process, the logic of a launch permission signal is transmitted that transmits a permission to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to launch the game ball B. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the cheating detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the cheating is not detected, based on the above-mentioned cheating detection flag FD-FLG. When the firing permission logic is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the detection of the fire is permitted, the fire permission logic is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the fire permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is set by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function to be set to firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic as an initial value (default). Although configured, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery), it is set to the firing permission logic.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match It is judged whether or not the game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery"), or the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is judged (determined the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are from the first starting opening sensor 2101, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting opening sensor 2402 If it is based on the special figure 2 create various commands related to the tuning effect, store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and determine the variation display pattern of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned random number for variation display pattern First special symbol display or second special symbol of function display unit 1400 to light the first special symbol display or second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, large win) A winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times that the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 Of the lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp to light the round indicator lamp A lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to light up the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 when the power is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information or when the round is 15 times The output of the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the output of the function display unit can be stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or the presence or absence of time reduction is lit in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric combination product control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and an ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In the normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol judgment is extracted and main control built-in as ordinary winning opening winning information It is stored in the normal winning opening winning combination information storage area of the RAM.

  In the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage area, the 0th section to the 3rd section (4 sections) are provided, and the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section in the order of the normal winning opening Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning a prize opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning a prize opening winning information stored in the zero section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning a prize opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning a prize opening winning information of the first section of the ordinary winning a prize winning information storage is in the 0 th section of the ordinary winning a prize winning information storage, a second of the ordinary winning a prize winning information storage. The normal winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is in the second of the normal winning opening winning information storage. It is shifted and the 3rd division of usual winning a prize mouth winning a prize information storage becomes empty space. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the 0th of the normal winning opening winning information storage The second section and the third section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage become an empty area. Here, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third divisions of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary number of the ordinary winning opening winning information stored is taken as the holding ball and the ordinary of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning opening winning processing, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol winning is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into a common figure synchronization effect relationship are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol while storing in the area, and the output information Are stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric part production are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece as information and stored in the transmission information storage area, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. If the value of the random number per symbol judgment does not match the normal symbol judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random symbol display pattern random number pattern , While creating various commands classified in relation to a common figure tuning effect, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to illuminate the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the decided ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember to In this example, the probability of winning in the normal lottery (probability of hitting normally) is one half.

  Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal as the payout control substrate 633 when the various commands from the payout control substrate 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Output a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when it is in a big hit gaming state, and outputs a drive signal to a start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece In addition to 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, starting opening winning information Output various information (game information) related to the game such as output signal to the payout control board 633, or release permission logic The base monitor outputs a release permission signal set in the release stopping logic (release non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or displays the counting result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008. A display signal is output to 1310 h, and a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various commands classified in special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified in special figure 2 synchronous effect related, big hit related Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as related to common drawing tuning effect, various commands classified as related to regular electric circuit production, various commands classified as notification display, various types classified as status display Command, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided on the game board 5 The main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls based on the game balls entered into various winning openings, external The main prize ball number information output command and the like instructing to transmit to the hall computer via the terminal plate 558, and various commands classified into the specific history (for example, the number of balls of the game balls collected at the out port 1008) There is a problem (or can not be relied on) stored in the main control built-in RAM, a ball recovery command to notify that every 10 balls are reached, a setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, or ) An error display command telling that effect, and a setting value telling that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is to be confirmed Sure display command, etc.) are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the various commands are configured as main cycle serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or an instantaneous interruption. The main transmission serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission as main transmission serial data from the transmission shift register It is possible to When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power outage after the power is supplied, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. The power on state command divided into power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information output judgment counter in order to convey that power recovery is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be executed A notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, as the main cycle serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to peripheral control board 1510 and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, status, mode, and sum value Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in turn, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When the ball collection command is sent to peripheral control board 1510 to notify that effect each time the number of gaming balls collected at out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, the peripheral control MPU in peripheral control board 1510 receives the ball. The ball collection information (counted value (i.e. collected by the out port 1008) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) is counted by counting the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008 for each recovery command. (The total number of balls of the game ball) and the updated date and time are updated. In addition, when the operating time of the game hall ends and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off without receiving the ball collection command, the value finally counted (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) as a result The sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). When power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when starting to operate the gaming hall, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 has started the business of collecting sphere information stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the day, and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored as sphere collection information in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) may use the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value 0 (zero) on that day Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the timing by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the main control MPU is not forced to be reset by the main control built-in WDT by starting the timing by the main control built-in WDT again.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 or the adder solenoid 2414 which is an electric drive source by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be done. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 69 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. The power-on state command divided into power-on to indicate that power has been turned on (power-return) based on the power-on time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area. The main control return destination command at power on and the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine. In peripheral control board command transmission processing, a power on state command is configured as main cycle serial data. It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of task, mode, and sum value, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the power-on main control return destination command. Subsequently, when the power is turned on, the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery as the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be displayed on the screen. By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being seen and broken down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  In addition, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In the step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, it is always cleared except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control internal RAM. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 70, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on is performed When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output judgment at power on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information. A state in which only three commands, status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, Transmit power status command as serial data, send to the inspection device of main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure power control main control return destination command, status , The mode, and the sum value are sent to the main control board inspection process inspection order in that order, and then configure the counter notification command for the main prize ball number information output judgment at power on, the order of status, mode, and sum value To the inspection device of the main control board inspection process. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 72 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is acquired, it may be read or taken out, but when the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is used to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control internal RAM as numerical values, and the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69. Is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control power-off process (power-off) in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. 70. It is determined whether or not it matches the value of the checksum (sum value) (step S204). If it is determined in step S204 that the main control MPU matches, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG includes the main control built-in processing in the main control side power-off process to be described later, including game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether the data is stored and held in RAM, and is set to 1 when the main control power-off process has ended normally, and to 0 when the main control power-off process has not ended normally. Be done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the values (sum values) of the checksums do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU does not have the backup flag BK-FLG as the value 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208) . Here, the “normal range” is a value to which the setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting The values up to 6 are preset. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM have an abnormality, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally upon power-off. Because of this, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or can not be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. It is determined whether the value is any of the above, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S208 that the main control MPU determines that the range is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is an initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of setting values 1 to 6 in which the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is a normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is determined, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (the value is 0) in the determination of step S206, that is, it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. At the same time, the process proceeds to step S210, and setting value 1 which is an initial value may be set to the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, determines that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control If the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch) that doubles as three functions. Here, the setting change for selecting and switching the setting value Acts as a button function. In this determination, a signal (selection switching signal of the setting value) notifying that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633 is read, and the setting changing signal from the RWM clear button 633z is read. It is determined whether a detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the selection switching signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is input, while the main control MPU determines the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

  In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value and updating (step S218). ). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g, and updates the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220, or when it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key is turned off. It is determined (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the setting key The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so that the switch 1311a is turned back to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a It is determined that the setting key is turned OFF when the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, while the setting key is turned OFF when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a. It determines that it has not been operated.

  If it is determined in step S222 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, the process returns to the determination in step S216 and determines whether the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. . When it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the processing of step S218 and step S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the setting key is set. When it is determined that the OFF operation is not performed, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned OFF, the setting value is A value of 1 is added, updated, and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the setting value updated immediately before the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated and displayed Displayed on the display 1310g. In addition, until it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF in the determination of step S222, the setting value updated immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure is the main value even if the power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored. Since the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control internal RAM is not stored, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S222 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, the updated setting value is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area Since the setting value set in is updated, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the determination key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control internal RAM Are stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

  Following step S224, the main control MPU stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value to the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting indicator 1310g. Is hidden (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time), and to perform the setting change setting confirmation or the confirmation display Value 1 is set when permission is given, and value 0 is set when permission to perform setting change and confirmation display is not permitted. In the process of step S232, setting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 does not permit setting change of the setting value or confirmation display thereafter.

  Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as in the determination of step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting The values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU normalizes the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is a range, and when it is determined that the range is a normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 70, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is the same as FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, it is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 70. To notify the peripheral control board 1510 that a setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for conveying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of storing the setting value. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, the peripheral control MPU updates setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[8-5. Set value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. The setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the process on power-on of the main control shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 73 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S350, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 in the setting change process of FIG. 88 and the determination in step S233, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5 and set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S 357, the main control MPU re-confirms whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, the setting value acquired in step S 350 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the setting value stored in is in any of the setting values 1 to 6 that is in the normal range, and when it is determined that it is in the normal range, the setting value is used as it is Do.

  When it is determined in step S352 that the main control MPU determines that the range is the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S354).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S352 that the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S356), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Subsequent to step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the setting key The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise 60 degrees so that the switch 1311a is turned back to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder) and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning it off, and the setting key switch It is performed based on the OFF signal from 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key is turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, the setting key is turned OFF It determined not to have.

  If it is determined in step S358 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not turned off, the process returns to the determination of step S358, and repeats the determination in step S358 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S358 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, the setting signal acquired in step S350 is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S360).

  Following step S360, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S361). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time), and to perform the setting change setting confirmation or the confirmation display Value 1 is set when permission is given, and value 0 is set when permission to perform setting change and confirmation display is not permitted. In the process of step S232, setting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 does not permit setting change of the setting value or confirmation display thereafter.

  Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S362), and subsequently creates a set value confirmation display command to set transmission information (step S364), and subsequently, in step S364. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data is performed (step S366), and the present routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 70, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S362, the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S366 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data, but this is performed before reservation of a command to be transmitted upon power on is set in step S50 in the process on power on the main control side shown in FIG. 70. The priority is given to the peripheral control board 1510 by means of a setting value confirmation display command that the setting value has been confirmed. The set value confirmation display command indicates that the set value confirmation display process which is this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). It is a command to convey).

[8-6. Error display process]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69 and the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 69 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 73). Processing performed in

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the emission permission signal as shown in FIG. 74 (step S400). The release permission signal, as described above, informs the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 that the release of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic thereof is set to the release permission logic, the release is generated. Can be signaled that the firing is to be stopped (disallowed) if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which reverses the firing permission logic. .

  A process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69, which is an error display process of this routine, a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69 (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 72) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 69 (specifically, FIG. 73) When the main control MPU starts processing as the process performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 70, the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 70 is performed. Because the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 71 can not be performed, It is not possible to carry out the firing enable signal setting process in step S113 that. The discharge permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with reset function, so that the power is restored with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the fire stop logic (fire non-permit logic) which is the reverse of the fire enable logic.

  Therefore, the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69, the error display process of this routine, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 72) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 69 (specifically, When the main control MPU starts processing as the process performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 73 after the power recovery in step S400, the error display process of this routine is started. Even in this case, the logic of the firing permission signal is issued to ensure that the gaming ball B is not fired. It is set to stop logic (firing unauthorized logic) to the fire control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the reset function main control output circuit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port.

  Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), and subsequently creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets it in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is ended.

  In the serial communication initial setting in step S406, the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 72, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. The same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the periphery of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 in control substrate transmission command transmission processing and setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 73, and peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This is the same process as the command transmission process. 69. The process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69 and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 69 (FIG. 72) When it is started and ended as the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 73 and the processing performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 73, as described above, an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has ended is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting of step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 is used as the peripheral serial data as the peripheral data. It is sent to 1510.

  The error display command is a command that indicates that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or something that can not be trusted). When the peripheral control MPU in peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, error display history information (information in which the error display command is associated with the received date and time) stored in internal RAM of real time clock IC (not shown) is received. Update.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU in peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, a white background of "RAM error has occurred in the blue background image in the display area of effect display device 1600. Please call a staff member." Along with performing control to display the message image of the text, the volume "Adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510" is announced as "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Control to flow from various speakers forcibly by setting the maximum sound volume. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command notifying another error, a RAM error notification is issued. The highest priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on shown in FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

9-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 by the payout control MPU, as shown in FIGS. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage decreases and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 receives a power failure notification signal as a power failure warning . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch) sharing the three functions, and here, it is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM Acts as a function of the RAM clear switch to erase information completely. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM clearing is not performed, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is If it is determined that the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW while it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed, the RWM clear button 633z It is determined that the pressing operation unit is operated.

  When it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the CR communication information storage area is set. This flag is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPU matches, it is determined whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is ended normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not ended normally.

  In step S528, when the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the power is restored when the power is restored. The work area of is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the ROM for payout control) and at power recovery. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when it is determined to clear the payout information, or in the determination of step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the values of the checksums do not match, or when the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is the value 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, If it is determined that the processing at the time of power-off of the payout control unit is not normally ended, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S540). When shutting down the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, as described above, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification when the voltage falls below the power failure notification voltage. Be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  If it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  In the determination of step S 542, when the payout control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S 540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure advance signal. It is judged whether it is done or not.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when it is determined that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, ball number information on the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the game balls, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, a payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game balls is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a counter for judging the number-of-balls information output judgment for judging whether or not to output the number-of-balls information is provided. The ball number of the game balls paid out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the ball number of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. It is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the value of the ball number of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, it indicates the number of balls exceeded). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

  Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch, it becomes an error release signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED display has been released). Detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, BRDY signal and CR connection signal, transmitted by command transmission processing described later A main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 1310 which indicates that the main control board 1310 has normally received the various commands is read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball arm state is generated by the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is transmitted, the ball arm judgment time set as the judgment condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, the lower plate 202 is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game balls stored in the full is full When it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 that is full. Besides performing time management such as the out-of-ball judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of balls of the game ball paid out by being received by the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the distraction blade 589 It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball which is inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeated. At this time, time management of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time set as the judgment condition is performed. For example, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms when the ball set determination time is set to 5005 ms, the ball set determination time is reduced by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result is a value By becoming 0, it is measuring the ball gambling judgment time correctly. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input or not judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. As a result, even when the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 350 is being executed, even if it becomes impossible to continue the payout operation due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Since it is possible, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU exchanges a variety of signals with the CR unit, and while the gaming balls are being paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the instantaneous stop or power failure causes the CR unit to Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it is not possible to continue the payout of the game balls, the number of ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to a value such as a prize ball stock number PBS, a real ball count PB, a drive command number DRV, an inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (delivery control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before stopping or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery With wear, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop upon power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. Various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Also, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. It is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 350 is abnormal, that is, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball game operation determination setting process, As setting of the error status to CR unit, for example, when not communicating with CR unit The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Output to the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 350 is in the abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of the power recovery, so it is very early after the power recovery. At the stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and a payout device 350 can be provided to the CR unit. Can be informed that the game ball payout operation by the player is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible. While the signal logic state is HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the gaming ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 The number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guiding unit 570 is determined by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more. It is determined whether or not the For example, the determination as to whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the gaming balls stored therein uses the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check from the full detection sensor 154 in the current full / full out check process. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns from OFF to ON When transition is made, counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower plate 202 stores the full game information in the above-described state information storage area, which indicates that the game ball is full and it is full. Do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full information is transmitted to the state information storage area to indicate that the lower tray 202 is not full with gaming balls stored therein.

  It is also determined whether the number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check whether the current tank is full or not. When the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball breakage check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, clocking of the ball out determination time described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. Then, when the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When information is stored in the state information storage area while the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operations such as winning balls, lending balls, dropping balls, and ball gloves are set, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of winning balls stock) is monitored. .

  Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-described output information storage area as LED display information. Do. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command and frame state 2 command) to be classified into the state display based on the various information are created. Then, it transmits to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of balls of the gaming ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 or the like.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control MPU returns to step S539 again, sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notification signal is input, and this power failure notification If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, and port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. At step S554, the timer update process is performed. The communication processing is performed, the full tank and ball out check processing is performed in step S556, the command reception processing is performed in step S558, the command analysis processing is performed in step S560, the main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and the LED is A display data creation process is performed, a command transmission process is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control substrate 1310 a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 1310 have been properly received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that the other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has determined that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the interrupt control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Following step S 574, the payout control MPU performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S 576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when the power failure occurs momentarily, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed. Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

9-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 81 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, the RAM, the VDP, the VRAM, the sound source, the SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU itself, but the time taken for the processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. Can be As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, for example, a command or pachinko relating to control of a game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of machine 1.

  Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour, minute, and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown), and the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once at the time of power on. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed; The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later which is executed in response to the event. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after the value V is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 or not. Repeatedly By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Further, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  When it is determined in step S1006 that the peripheral control MPU has determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it has determined that peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to 1 Is set (step S1008). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs rendering operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, etc., the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the like) Operation history information of section 303 etc.) is set based on the RAM of peripheral control MPU to which is set Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the work 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode according to the adjusted brightness Rewrite generation schedule data. Thereby, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect is advanced by the volume and the brightness after the adjustment.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the rendering operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Set each. While the effect is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or the clerk of the game hall or the like) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value The key information can be updated.

  Here, the luminance designation values, the normal pallet values, and the special pallet values that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. The designated luminance value may be set to one designated luminance value within a range of 32 steps ranging from the zeroth designated luminance value which is the minimum luminance (turned off) to the 31st designated luminance value which is the maximum luminance. It is possible values, and a normal pallet value and a special pallet value which will be described later in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value are respectively set in advance. The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated, and the 31st brightness from the first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness One designated brightness value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is the case where the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, and the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (turns off). When the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the value is set, a predetermined equation (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance designation value toward the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. While changing the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve, the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed In the case of rotating clockwise, when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined equation (for example, the first brightness specified value) from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set. Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and press the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the luminance while the effect is in progress. At this time, the player (or a shop clerk of the game hall) And the like) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-like indicator indicating the position up to the designated value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image how much the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is. It can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, a fourteenth designated luminance value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as the gradation information described above for the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. is there. For the normal pallet values, one of 17 steps in 5% steps from the minimum pallet value (20%) which is the minimum value to the maximum pallet value (100%) which is the maximum value is selected, and the luminance described above A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is a designated value Or spline curve-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which are the luminance specification values described above It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and the other pallet values are similarly the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the luminance designation value described above (%) described in parentheses Of the 32 levels ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value, this is the value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side. Among various decoration boards provided on the game board side, which are set as the gradation information described above and which are irradiated as direct light, a pallet (not shown) for a specific decoration board (an LED that feels dazzling to the player) The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information as to the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates used for a light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal pallet value, the special pallet value is present in only one step, and is one of 32 steps ranging from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which are the luminance designation values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  If the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light as described above, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. To visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (turned off). As the lowest possible luminance, the normal pallet value is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value One of the designated luminance values and the corresponding pallet value are set along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each of The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light while being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value The designated luminance value and the corresponding special palette value are set according to the operation 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as direct light is felt to be dazzling, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used as the light. Set the luminance of the LED to be used to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is at a stage where the luminance is higher next to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value for minimum luminance (turned off)) The brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is higher than the 0th (zero) brightness specification value at which the minimum Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is normally set to a value substantially equal to the 18th luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side separately from the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it does not set, the flow of the effect by the light emission aspect of the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side by setting the light emission aspect according to the flow of the effect After setting the palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) usually for a particular decoration substrate that is too dazzled (or a slightly darker luminance can exhibit more rendering effects), By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission aspect can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a clerk in the game hall or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designated value 31st Even if one luminance designation value ranging up to the luminance designation value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one luminance designation value is set for a specific decoration substrate. For the other decorative substrates, one luminance specification value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set respectively, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark) It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the indirect light by the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the luminance as compared to the direct light, it is different from the normal pallet value for the LED used as the indirect light (that is, a special pallet value different from the ordinary pallet value) The brightness can be set by the Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the luminance of the LED used as direct light is normally managed by the pallet value, so the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in display data creation processing to be described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen of the peripheral control MPU generated on the VRAM ( The drawing data of one frame is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thus, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed which exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, outputting of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. Although this can prevent the delay of the processing time, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but due to the effect sound such as music or effect sound from various speakers by sound data output processing described later It is a mechanism that can give priority to the production.

  Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct the screen data of the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU from the head screen data among the screen data arranged in time series that configures the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate which light emission data is to be output starting from the light emission data at the top among the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In the scheduler update process, of sound command data for instructing sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series configuring the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to indicate which sound instruction data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU from the head sound instruction data.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, it is assumed that the drive data of the first one is output target Update the pointer to indicate what to do. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the data is forcibly updated so as to designate the driving data to be originally designated in the scheduler updating process.

  Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the various commands received are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for the play-ahead-related effect). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU Analyze the various commands The peripheral control MPU reads out screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands (extraction And) in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp pallet setting processing. The player (or a staff member of the game hall or the like) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the above-described first brightness designated value When one luminance designation value ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of reserved normal symbols Normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), variation pattern command for instructing start of variation effects such as variation display of decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with variation display of special symbols, Analyze the symbol storage command that is output when the number of start pending changes, analyze whether it is a large winning a prize opening 1 count display command that is output each time the game ball is accepted in the large winning a prize opening 2005, currently in which gaming state Recognize

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyze various commands. The various commands include various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effects, various commands classified into big hit relation, various commands classified into power on, Figure: Various commands classified into a related to the tuning effect, Various commands classified into the common electric wave production related, Various commands classified into the notification display, Various commands classified into the status display, Various commands classified into the test related, There are various commands divided into others. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing for notice etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging the light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of the various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification display, they are set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, time, minute, second, which is time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is updated, and it is calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed in the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) the image data on the effect display device 1600 ( The drawing data of one frame is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, among the sound command data arranged in time series that the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and that is the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It reads out (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM and sets it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound according to the track number defined in the sound command data and outputs Set the output channel to use according to the channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed). Are identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, from the output channel set in the sound data creation process Output sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers according to various effects.

  Specifically, the resistance value is changed by turning the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value 0 It has been converted to 1024 levels up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch is set as a sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation at all. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display For a certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the container (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Or 0.5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the variation pattern command is received, or 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decoration symbol after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit The adjustment can be made by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the above.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A fixed period (the peripheral in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) After the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit, 0.5 is determined after the decorative symbol is displayed. The resistance at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the lapse of seconds). The voltage divided by this is converted into seven levels of values of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is further converted to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the substrate volume value can be increased or decreased to set the substrate volume so that the subvolume value of the effect sound can be adjusted. It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include a plurality of built-in sound sources of the peripheral control MPU. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, it is configured to amplify up to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from various speakers, and to serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the volume flowing from various speakers is allowed maximum volume by being amplified to the master volume value. It is set to be Specifically, for the effect sound, of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the used track and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the used track The volume adjustment switch set as the sub volume value to adjust the is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by the rotation operation, and the volume of this combined effect sound actually becomes the volume flowing from the various speakers It amplified up to the master volume value, serialized this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data, and for the notification sound, it was incorporated into the sound data of the notification sound incorporated into the track to be used and the track to be used It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound, and Synthesized and volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound, indeed, amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from various speakers, and outputs the amplified notification sound as the audio data serialization.

  Here, in order to notify the store clerk in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is flowing from the various speakers, a brief explanation will be given of the control of making a notification sound flow. The sub volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set in the mute, and the notification sound are incorporated. The sound data of the track and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volumes flowing from the various speakers The amplified effect sound and the notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the various speakers. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although the effect sound does not flow from the various speakers, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data.

  In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period elapses, the progress is made according to the sound generation schedule data which has been forcibly set to mute. The substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch is set again as the sub volume value (at this time, the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the operation, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound) and flows from various speakers.

  As described above, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 when the presentation sound flows from the various speakers, the volume of the presentation sound is Although the notification sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the various speakers, this muffled effect sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation, so when the notification sound has not passed through the various speakers after a predetermined period of time, the effect is The sound does not start to flow again from the beginning of the notification sound, but it starts to flow again from the progress according to the sound generation schedule data until the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU controls the peripheral volume control MPU by programming the volume from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to be able to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume small, the pachinko machine 1 is reduced in the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers. An alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow when a failure occurs or when the player is performing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for a clerk such as a salesperson in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied to a backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and backed up, and the content stored in the SDRAM is provided in the SDRAM Copy to the regular processing backup area and back it up.

  Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to the value 0 as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value in FLG is set to 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to S1008 are performed. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The process of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, starting from setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing, and in step S1010 the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing , And step S1036 and finally, in step S1038, when the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU as a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is triggered by an event. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU can receive screen data can be received from VDP of the peripheral control MPU is described. Do. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 80, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 79 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  When it is determined in step S1045 that the peripheral control MPU is not executing the steady process flag SP-FLG at the value 0 (ie, having the value 1), that is, when determining that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine is ended. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being performed. If the value of 1 is set to V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process is currently executed, assuming that peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. 79 is provided for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V which is this routine is that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value 1 in step S1008 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to the blank signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. By notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine that execution has been completed, the flag SP-FLG in steady processing is a value at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not it is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. . In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing is not completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control power on processing of FIG. 79 determines the next time. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 81, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  In step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. Sometimes, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, the peripheral control MPU adds the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of peripheral control MPU. Drive an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, update the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and update the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed Do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, an electric drive source provided to the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided to various effect units provided to the game board 5) , Driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to determine history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, the original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various rendering units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The mobile position is grasped by moving or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs rendering operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors is determined by determining whether detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 are input (for example, a rotation operation unit The rotation (rotational direction) history information 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted, or a plurality of them can be mounted on various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The brightness of various LEDs can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM Copy and backup to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effect of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as progress of effect within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 79, various processing relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

10-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. Peripheral control MPU starts transmission of various commands from main control board 1310 as serial data, and triggers main cycle serial data to be 1 byte (8 bits) of serial I / O port of peripheral control MPU. Information is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines, as shown in FIG. 82, whether or not the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. If it is determined that it is within the acquisition period, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204) ). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, If it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1 byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status when the reception counter SRXC is the value 3, that is, the first byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212) . In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they electrostatically discharge and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the reception environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In the determination of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is received, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216), End this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the peripheral control MPU has 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period for which reception is possible has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, If it is determined that the calculated sum value does not match, the routine ends.

10-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing that is executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control substrate 1310 is input from the main control substrate 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first starts a 2 microsecond timer as shown in FIG. It is determined (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1302 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure advance signal is not input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure advance signal is input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In step S1304, when 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure notification signal is input, and determines that a power failure notification signal is not input. Sometimes, this routine is ended as it is, but if it is determined that the power failure notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When it is determined in step S1304 that the peripheral control MPU has continued to receive the power failure notification signal for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the power saving processing is performed ( Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the turning off of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, the turning off of various LEDs, etc. By restraining, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is secured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up to a steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the peripheral control MPU determines that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. judge. That is, it will be judged infinitely whether the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing determination in this manner, the peripheral control MPU can not output the clear signal to the external WDT when the peripheral control MPU determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure notification signal is not input, and the peripheral control While the MPU is reset, when it is determined in step S1312 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure notification signal is input, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 79 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure state is caused by the execution of the WDT clear process in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 84, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is firstly controlled by the first starting opening sensor 2101. The first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the first start opening 2002 is entered) (step S2031) A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S2032). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number under the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2402 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (step S2033) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S2035), and if the big hit running flag is set, control of the big hit gaming state is performed A big hit control process (step S2039) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "15R big hit A", The large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the distributing piece 2415 for distributing the gaming ball B accepted to the large winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 The drive control is performed, and processing is performed to set the gaming ball B to a valid state in the 15th round where it is possible to distribute the gaming ball B to the second receiving port 2008. In addition, when it becomes the mode which suggests “15R big hit B”, opening and closing control of large winning a prize opening 2005 according to 15R big hit gaming state B, gaming ball B which is accepted to large winning a prize opening 2005 first entrance The distribution piece 2415 distributed to either 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is drive-controlled, and processing is performed to set the gaming ball B to the enabled state in the 15th round where it is possible to distribute the gaming ball B to the second receiving port 2008.

  Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the "effective state" is provided as a state when the gaming ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008. Here, in the 15th round where it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second reception port 2008, the "effective state" is high after the big hit game state is ended by the game ball B being received in the second reception port 2008 It is a state that is permitted (enabled) to control to the probability state. Therefore, by the gaming ball B being received in the second receiving port 2008 in the “effective state”, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008, it has an “ineffective state” different from the “effective state”. Here, the “ineffective state” is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second reception port 2008 in principle, such as the first to fourteenth rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first reception port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008, it is not permitted (disabled) to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the "inactive state", the game is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Also, in the "invalid state", when the gaming ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 due to the occurrence of an anomaly such as a fraudulent act, information on the occurrence of such anomaly can be notified to the hole management side Therefore, it is set as the period monitored as to whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008. In the present embodiment, the "effective state" is set for a predetermined round (15th round) that enables the game ball B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and the second receiving port 2008 is played for the game. Whenever the ball B is accepted, it is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Moreover, although it sets to the "invalid state" to the predetermined | prescribed round (1st-14th round) which does not distribute the game ball B to the 2nd receiving port 2008, you may set to a "valid state." As described above, even if the game is set to the "effective state" in all rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the game ball B can not be accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the first to fourteenth rounds in principle. It is important whether the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set in the "valid state", as in the case of the "invalid state" in the 14th round.

  Further, in the big hit control process (step S2041), after the release control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of a high probability flag, a short time flag, and a short time counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is a high probability state. During the execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second receiving port 2008 among the first to fifteenth round opening the big winning opening 2005 If the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008 during the 15th round in the active state, the high probability flag is set because the high probability state (high probability time short state) is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state If it is set, but the gaming ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the 15th round of the effective state, it is controlled to the high probability state (high probability time short state) after the end of the big hit gaming state The high probability flag is not set because it does not. Then, when the high probability flag is set, or when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time reduction counter becomes "0" first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 95 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which is controlled to the time short status (high probability time short status, low probability time short status) after the big hit gaming state ends. It is set when ending the jackpot gaming state based on. And, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the count value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 95 described later or the second special symbol not shown shown in FIG. It is reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and the time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the big hit gaming state When ending the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) to control to the short time state, low probability time short state), the number of continuation times of the short state is set, and the short time counter The countdown is performed each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes “0”. However, when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. 95 described later It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S2036) The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S2037), and the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol storage area The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036) Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S2032).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S2031 that the first starting opening sensor 2101 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002, this is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is “4”, which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S2042). In the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to S204 are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S2044, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S2041 Store in

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S2041. Whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach type as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit After the effect pre-determination process of determining prior determination information such as the type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning combination (step S2045), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S2042 that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of step S2043 to step S2045.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended for the first The command is updated so as to correspond to the number of memories, and a command (first number of pending designation commands 0 to 4) instructing the first number of pending storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) and sent to peripheral control board 1510 It is supposed to The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first hold storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first hold number specification commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect predetermination process, the predetermination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S2041 (specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation) Whether it will be a big hit by comparing it with a random number, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it does not become a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S2061).

  Then, the identified prior determination information (whether or not to be a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or According to the type of game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of held memories (value of the held number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the pre-decision command. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first number of pending storages (the A first special symbol predetermination command according to one special suspension number counter) and the first special symbol predetermination command are set (step S2062).

  Then, by transmitting a priori determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first starting opening 2002 where the start winning is generated. Whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the start winning combination is made a big hit or not, in the case of a big hit the type of big hit, if not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 executes Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting variable display according to the start winning combination, such as executing reach effect as the played game effect or the type type of the game effect to be executed Will be able to understand.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Also, the first pending storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the pending storage number, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (first) prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area according to the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (in the pending storage area Shift stored pre-decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  As described above, when the variable display control is put on hold, although the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (pending), the jackpot expectation of the variable display control (pseudo-winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold termination. .

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S2034).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S2033 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, this is shown in FIG. 87. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. It is judged whether or not it is "4" (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following step S2053 is performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S2053, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S2054, each random number acquired in step S2051 corresponds to the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM Store in

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S2052 that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by ending the process without executing the process of steps S2053 to S2054.

  In addition, when the number of second reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended second The command is updated so as to correspond to the number of storages, and a command (second number-of-holdings designation command 0 to 1) instructing the second number of pending storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) It is supposed to The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second hold storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process processing (step S2037). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special motorized symbol control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric symbol controlled processing are the same. The program module is different from the above in that only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, so only the special symbol and the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special electric symbol combination control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing etc. for the display mode at the time of stop of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S2080)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S2081 )
3. The fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuation random number, and the fluctuation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process where the lottery process etc. for the subject is performed (step S2082)
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2083)
5. The mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 First special symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S2084)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080) should be performed in the process of step S40 described above (see FIG. 69).

  FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 89, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control MPU as the processing of step S2102 next. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special number-of-holds counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S2105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S2081) (step S2106), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S2105).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) at the present gaming state (step S2111), the high probability time shown in FIG. The big hit determination table is selected (step S2112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S2111), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 91A is selected (step S2113) and selected The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 91 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) And a high probability big hit determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time reduction state). In the jackpot determination table with low probability, 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value 2, 1/299 when the set value 3 and 1/3 when the set value Matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number is won by the big hit probability with 1/289, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random numbers other than the first special random numbers coincide with a deviation determination value indicating that the above is a deviation. In the special symbol and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special motorized symbol control process, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the second special random number, the first As in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared to the special random numbers, 1/319 in the case of the set value 1, 1/309 in the case of the set value 2 and in the case of the set value 3 If the second special random number is won with a big hit probability of 1/299, 1/289 if the setting value is 4, 1/279 if the setting value is 5, and 1/269 if the setting value is 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating. And the second special random numbers other than the above match the deviation determination value indicating that the above is a deviation.

  Further, in the big hit judgment table at high probability, 1 / 31.9 for the setting value 1, 1 / 30.9 for the setting value 2, 1 / 29.9 for the setting value 3, The first special random number (at low probability) with a big hit probability of 1 / 28.9 for setting value 4, 1 / 27.9 for setting value 5, and 1 / 26.9 for setting value 6 Of the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table of the same as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other first special random numbers match the outlier determination value. Special random numbers are associated with each other. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state)) for each set value. And 10 times the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the special symbol and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S2038 of the special motorized symbol control process, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, Similar to the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared to the special random numbers, 1 / 31.9 for the set value 1 and 1 / 30.9 for the set value 2 The big hit of 1 / 29.9, 1 / 28.9 for the set value 4, 1 / 27.9 for the set value 5, and 1 / 26.9 for the set value 6 The second special random number (including the second special random number same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at low probability) with the probability matches the jackpot determination value, and the other second special random numbers are lost The second special random number is matched to the judgment value. It is associated.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined to be a big hit (step S2115 ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is big hit is set, it ends processing (step S2116), the first special which it reads out with step S2102 of the selected big hit decision table and the 1st special symbol normal processing As a result of comparison with the random numbers, when it is determined to be out, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random numbers read out in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random numbers read in step S2102, when it is determined that the reach is out (step S2118), the reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set and processing is performed. The process ends (step S2119).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 92, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S2105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S2121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 91 (B). (Step S2122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the variation stop state (step S2124).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in a form associated with each determination result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the gaming state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening where the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. In the big hit gaming state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 when 5 seconds) and long time opening (the game ball B can enter (easy) opening, for example, 20 seconds) If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the 15th round, it is set to the state to be controlled to the high probability state after the end, special after the end of the big hit gaming state The game ball B is controlled at the second receiving port 2008 during the 15th round of the effective state while controlling to the high probability time short state until the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times. Not accepted When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
2.15R The opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is controlled according to the big hit gaming state B, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. Set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state) when 5 seconds), and it is valid in the 15th round If gaming ball B is received in second entrance 2008 during the state, after the end of the jackpot gaming state is high until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times If the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the 15th round of the effective state while controlling to the probability time short state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the first after the end of the big hit gaming state Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R big hit gaming state A of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 second) as an operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, and a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) It is set to open the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds) after the lapse of seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of distribution piece 2415 is started And when the long opening (20 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005 is started, the long operation (10 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started, and the second inlet 2008 during the operation period of the distribution pieces 2415 The game ball B is set to be acceptable. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state that it will be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is ended by the game ball B being received in the second entrance 2008) Is set to).

  On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round. In addition, as the operation schedule of distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of distribution piece 2415 is started The game ball B is set to be receivable in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state that it will be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is ended by the game ball B being received in the second entrance 2008) Is set to).

  As described above, both the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B are valid in the 15th round (The game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 and the big hit state after the big hit gaming state ends. In the 15R big hit gaming state A, it is set to be controlled, but the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) at the second opening of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and furthermore, since the distributing piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the long opening time (20 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005, It is extremely easy for the accepted gaming ball B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, since the probability that the game ball B will be accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of doing so is also very high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the big winning opening 2005 is only opened for a short time in the 15th round (0.5 seconds), so it is extremely difficult for the gaming ball B to be accepted in the big winning opening 2005. The game ball B accepted by the big winning prize port 2005 is the second because the distributing piece 2415 is only activated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during a short opening time (0.5 second) of the big winning prize port 2005. It is extremely difficult to be assigned (accepted) to the reception port 2008. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, it is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of doing so is also very low.

  In addition, as an operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415, the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) elapses, the distribution piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10 The operation of such a distribution piece 2415 when it has a single operation schedule set to be seconds) and starts the 15th round in the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B I am trying to start the schedule. Thus, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data concerning the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is not increased as much as possible.

  In addition, in the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B of this example, the big winning prize port 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as an operation schedule of the big winning prize port 2005 in each round of 1 to 14 rounds. Is set as. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each round of the 1st to 14th rounds, the distribution piece 2415 is not operated, and during that period, the game ball B is sent to the first reception port 2007 instead of the second reception port 2008. Is set to be acceptable. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the 2nd entrance 2008 in each round of 1st-14th round, invalid state (In principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the 2nd entrance 2008, after the end of the big hit game state It is set to the state which will not control to a high probability state. Thus, in the 1st to 14th rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 like the 15th round is opened. Without playing the game (acceptable), it is designed to play a game whether the game ball B is accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, 15R big hit A (15 rounds, which is relatively advantageous to the player among 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B) Distribution of 50 judgment values for the jackpot B) which has a high probability that the game ball B will be accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the eye active state, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the jackpot gaming state is high. Is set relatively badly for the player 15R big hit B (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the 15th round effective state is low, the end of the big hit gaming state The distribution of 50 judgment values is set for a jackpot) in which the probability of controlling to a high probability state is low. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, of the 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, the distribution of 65 judgment values is set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the distribution of 35 judgment values is set for the 15R big hit B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. As described above, when the jackpot on the first special symbol side is determined which of the 15R jackpot A or 15R jackpot B with which the player's degree of advantage differs, what kind of jackpot is determined at the time of the first jackpot Can be noticed. In addition, in the time reduction state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the game of the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004 is played) is performed, but the second special At the time of big hit on the symbol side, it is decided to 15R big hit game A with a higher probability than the big hit on the first special symbol side, so that it is possible to pay attention to what amount of winning balls can be obtained at consecutive villas. it can. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game nature changes between the first big hit time and the consecutive time time.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, if it is decided that 15R big hit A is decided as big hit symbol, it is decided to be 15 R big hit A symbol, and if it is decided to be 15 R big hit B, it is decided to be 15 R big hit B symbol as big hit symbol. In addition, in the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting processing which is not illustrated, when it is decided to be 15R big hit A, it is decided to be 15 R big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol.

  And after the decision processing about the stop design is done in this way, as the processing of step S2125, these drawing results (the type of big hit, reach out indication, indication of either out (the form of the stop special pattern of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510). After that, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first variation pattern setting process (step S2082) as the process of step S2126, this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU starts variable display of left, middle and right decorative symbols based on the received judgment result notification command and fluctuation pattern command, and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, is 15R out of the big hit related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command. When the big hit A is specified, it is decided on the 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R big hit B is identified it is decided on the 15R big hit B symbol (common to the 15R big hit A symbol) When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the reach effect is ended), the stop symbol determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped changing at either the 15R big hit A symbol or the 15R big hit B symbol, it can be determined that a big hit is made from the stopped symbol of the decorative symbol. Although it is possible, since 15R big hit A symbol and 15 R big hit B symbol are used as common symbols, it is not possible to distinguish either 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the out of reach from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the out pattern with the reach is (A combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same.) A combination of non-identical outlying designs (not identical), but with left and right decorative designs if outliers are specified. Is determined to be non-identical, and display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 93, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S2141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the current gaming state is selected (step S2142) If the reach flag is set (step S2143), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S2144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag When it is not set, that is, when it becomes the usual out-of-line (out-of-reach effect is not performed) Selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S 2145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S2147). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S2148). As a result, effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol process flag described above is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S 2083) as the processing of step S 2149 next. When updated, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of short is associated with the above special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the time is short, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. That is, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-short time, the variation pattern at the time of short time selected as the time-short can be extremely short in time required for the variable display control of the special symbol. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

  FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 94, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S2084) in the processing of step S2173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 95, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol stop symbol, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time counter is "0" while the time shortening flag is set and the number of continuation times of the time saving state is set. (Step S2183). Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S2184), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S2185). . As a result, if the same counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). If it is determined in the process of step S2183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S2185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S2187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S2187), a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started is set (step S2189), and the big hit gaming state is started (big hit round start command is set) The standby time (period for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) until it is set is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Then, next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time shortening flag is set, the time shortening flag is reset, and the count value of the time reduction counter is If it is not "0", the same counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process is executed. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S2192), this processing is ended.

  The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S2039).

  In the above step S2189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state starts is set in the interval timer, but after the waiting time set in this interval timer has elapsed in the processing of step S2401, the same figure 96 is entered. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and the effective state in the 15th round (the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 so that the big hit gaming state Large winning opening opening and closing process (step S2402) to be set in a state to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the game ball B received in the fifth winning opening in the 15th round to the second entrance 2008 While controlling the distribution piece 2415 so that it becomes possible to distribute, and at the 15th round Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring the second receiving port 2008 in effect state whether the game ball B accepted (step S2403), in this order.

  FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening / closing process (step S2402).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S 2411 that the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the big winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. 97. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state of the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of (step S2412) When the game ball B wins the maximum winning number (for example, nine) in the open special winning opening 2005 (step S 2413), the open special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S 2414). When it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the large winning opening 2005 in the closed state (step S 2415), the type and the number of rounds of the big hit as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 The big hit round end command according to is set (step S2416), and it transfers to step S2428.

  If it is determined in step S 2411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 97, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives the special winning opening 2005. When it is determined that the new winning opening 2005 is to be opened by controlling the opening of the big winning opening 2005 when it is time to open the big winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of (step S2417). (Step S2418), a big hit round start command according to the type of big hit and the number of new rounds is set as the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, when it is determined that it is the timing to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds of opening the big winning opening 2005 If it is the start time (step S 2420), the valid state flag is set (step S 2421). When the valid state flag is set at the start of the fifteenth round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the fifteenth round. Then, the big winning opening 2005 in a closed state or the big winning opening 2005 is controlled to an open state (step S2422), and the process shifts to step S2428. When it is determined that the new round is not to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state (the second open in the same round, etc.) (step S2418), or the valid state flag If it is determined that it is not the timing to set the key (if it is not the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the big winning prize port 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S2422), step S2428 Migrate to As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. can execute effects according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command and the current number of rounds.

  It should be noted that the valid state flag is set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is to be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends) It is a flag to indicate. In the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds of opening the big winning opening 2005, the gaming ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening and closing process (step S2403) to be described later Alternatively, the game ball B can be received by the second receiving port 2008 by driving control of the distribution piece 2415 distributed to any of the second receiving port 2008, and the game ball B can be set in the valid state.

  Further, if it is determined in the process of step S2428 that gaming ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. A special winning a prize entry command is set as a command to be sent to 1510 (step S2429), and this processing is ended. Thereby, when the special winning opening entry ball command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like according to the acceptance of the gaming ball B to the special winning opening 2005 Can be performed by

  If it is determined in the process of step S2417 that it is not time to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 97, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives the command. When all the round numbers have been completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S2424). Then, if it is determined that the second reception port passing flag described later is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), and the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuation times of the time saving state (step S2427), this process is ended. If it is determined that the second reception passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, and the time saving flag is set and the count value of the time saving counter is short When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of continuation (step S2427), this process ends. Thus, when it is determined that the second receiving passage passing flag is set (the game ball B is received in the second receiving passage 2008 during the 15th round valid state), the high probability flag And the short time flag is set, and the high probability time short state is controlled, but the second entrance passing flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round) If it is determined that the flag is determined, only the short time flag is set to control to the low probability time short state.

  FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening and closing process (step S2403).

  If it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distributing piece 2415) in the process of step S2431, the same figure 98. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 for a predetermined time from the open state of the second receiving port 2008 (for , When 0.2 seconds when opening for a short time has elapsed (step S 2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the big winning opening 2005 closed (step S 2432) S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is in the closed state (the game ball B swings to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distribution piece 2415) Controlling the state) eclipsed (step S2434).

  If it is determined in step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 98, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the distribution piece. When it is time to put the second receiving port 2008 in the open state according to the operation schedule of 2415 (step S2435), the second receiving port 2008 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S2436).

  Next, in step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 98, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is It is determined whether the gaming ball B is accepted at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round while the valid state flag is set (step S2438). Then, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the 15th round active state (step S2438), the second reception is received during the 15th round active state. When the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball B is received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed. When the second reception port passing command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this processing ends. As described above, as long as the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the 15th round valid state, the second receiving port passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. Is not set, so there is no control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, when the second reception passage passing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the LED, the speaker and the like according to the reception of the game ball B to the second reception port 2008. Can be performed by

  FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric product control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state in the process of step S2801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol hold storage area of RAM. Run.

  Then, in the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the ordinary symbol process flag.

1. The ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, the normal symbol normal processing is performed in which the lottery process or the like is performed for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol (step S2803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing etc. for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S2804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2805)
4. The pattern of the normal symbol at the time of the fluctuation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display pattern at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Normal symbol stop processing to stop variable display of symbols (step S2806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated and the game to the second starting opening 2004 The ordinary electric part opening process which executes the process which controls the acceptance of the ball B (step S2807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 described above (see FIG. 69).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S2802).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state in the process of step S2801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the ordinary random number and the common drawing fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2811.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the ordinary suspension number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, the number of suspension of normal symbols is the maximum value "4" It is determined whether or not (step S2812). If it is determined in the process of step S2812 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S2813, the above-mentioned normally reserved number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number obtained in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU .

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S2812 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S2813 to step S2814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S2821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, then, as the processing of step S2822, the ordinary stored in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, while counting down the above-mentioned normal number-of-holds counter, at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of RAM of the main control MPU The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area Store in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage The various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the current game state is a short time state (a low probability time short status, a high probability short time status) (step S2826), a time-saving chart per common drawing determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is the non-short time state (low probability non-short time state) (step S2825), the non-short time common drawing hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S28) S2827), the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out at step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing are compared (step S2828).

  It should be noted that the determination table for the common drawing is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the common determination table for the common time during the short time to be used when the gaming state is short (low probability time short status, high probability time short status), The game has a non-time-shorting common drawing determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (a low probability non-time-short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, the 251 common random numbers correspond to the common-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the common random numbers were selected per common diagram, The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball B passes to the gate unit 2003 in the time saving mode, the player always wins the game, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004. It is possible to control the reception of the game ball B.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 kinds of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if there is the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003, the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated because the win is not made per winning. There is no possibility to control the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2829) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S2830), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol If the symbol is determined (step S 2831), while the result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the normal random number read out in step S 2822 of the normal symbol normal processing, it is determined that it is off, the fluctuation of the normal symbol A common figure as a mode (a stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a shift symbol (step S2832). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2804), this processing is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol always becomes a hit, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is extreme. Is shortened to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.3 seconds). And when the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal design becomes a hit, it controls with the opening and closing pattern which closes the above-mentioned 2nd starting opening 2004 as an open state for a very long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of the lottery result of the normal symbol being hit is extremely high, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. The game ball B is significantly easier to win in the second starting port 2004 because of the longer time of the game, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002 more efficiently. You can win B. In the control of the non-short time state, the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the above normal symbol does not always hit, and it is assumed that the second starting port 2004 is targeted. Also, the game ball B can not be won in the second start port 2004.

  As described above, during the control of the non-short time state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B can not be won in the second start port 2004, so the first start port 2002 In order to win the game ball B, the game ball B must be fired (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center character 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted on the front face of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail By abutting on N, the game ball B is given various motions to flow downward. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it is not limited to winning in the first start opening 2002, but winning in the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during control of the time saving state, it is more efficient to aim the game ball B more effectively when aiming at the second starting opening 2004 than the first starting opening 2002, so the second starting opening 2004 is played In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called "right-handed") by aiming at the right side of the center character 2500. In addition, when the second start port 2004 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, the game machine B is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004. The game ball B which has passed is made to win the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B struck into the right side of the center combination 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time saving state As compared with the first starting opening 2002 in the middle, the gaming ball B comes to be awarded to the second starting opening 2004 extremely efficiently.

  Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will hit is extremely high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol Since the time required for control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 2004 is long, etc., the game ball B is likely to be won in the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds in the control of the non-time-short state, so a short time The variation display control of the special symbol (the suspension of the variation display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when the control is made to the above time reduction state after the end of the big hit gaming state, hitting the gaming ball B on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004 makes a big hit again in a short time. It is possible to control the jackpot gaming state and expect to obtain many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls B to be paid out by the winning of the gaming ball B in the second starting opening 2004 is one, the game for the second starting opening 2004 Even if the ball B is frequently hit, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while enhancing the interest of the player.

[12. Behavior of pachinko machine at power on]
In the present embodiment, as a function of the pachinko machine 1, a function of changing the setting of the setting value and a function of confirming and displaying the setting value are provided. Specifically, execution of the setting change process of step S37 described above enables setting change of the set value to be performed, and execution of the set value confirmation display process of step S28 described above causes confirmation display of the set value. It is possible to be done. When such setting change of setting value is performed, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a besides operating the power switch 630a when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. If the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the power switch 630a is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is also operated. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311 a without operating. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z doubles as the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when initializing the main control built-in RAM when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. 102 (B) is a power-on of the pachinko machine 1 FIG. 102 (C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when changing the setting of the set value at the time, and FIG. 102 (C) shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when confirming display of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Is a time chart showing

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and subsequently performs the power failure clear process (step S12). In the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notification voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, and in the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following the step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). When it is determined in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch using the signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and / or a signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is determined whether the opening of the main body frame 4 and the ON operation of the setting key are performed. The determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as operation information. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pressing the pachinko machine It is necessary to turn on the power of 1. The person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

  After the operation information is stored at timing tx, subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait processing of the wait time. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure notification signal is input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). When it is determined in step S25 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is By being satisfied, the setting change processing (step S37) is performed. In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is determined whether the opening of the main body frame 4 and the ON operation of the setting key are performed. Although the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as operation information, the operation is continued until timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes wait time waiting processing, arrives thereafter. It is supposed to maintain the storage of information. Then, at timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step It is decided to decide whether to carry out S28).

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. While the setting key switch 1311a does not have to be turned on. Thus, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is not turned on, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time of timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is initialized ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the RWM clear button 633z is The pressing operation unit does not have to be operated. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, so that the RWM clears even before the timing ty arrives. It is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the button 633z is operated to the state in which the button 633z is not operated.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to the value 0 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed from the timing ty.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (B), when changing the setting of the setting value, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. It is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Thus, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is turned ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the time of timing ty. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty, the setting change process (step S37) is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and then turned off. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting of the setting value, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at time tx, and the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON. However, at the time of timing ty, it is not necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, and similarly, the setting key switch 1311a does not have to be turned on. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, so that the RWM clears even before the timing ty arrives. It is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated, and similarly to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and then turned off. It is possible to However, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty comes, the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty. It is necessary to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state, and to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state. This is because the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key in the determination in step S222 of the setting change processing, but in this determination, the state where the setting key switch 1311a is ON. Therefore, when the OFF operation is performed, the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty until the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37). As long as it is Further, in this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37) from the timing ty. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the process.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a Is turned ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is to be performed based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed from the time of timing ty. I will do it. Further, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty, the setting value confirmation display process ((when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) is turned OFF. Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  In addition, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at time tx, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at time ty. There is no need. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. It is possible to change from the state in which the switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the switch 1311a is turned off. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty comes, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty. After that, it is necessary to make the setting key switch 1311a be turned OFF again from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and to turn the setting key switch 1311a turned ON in the state turned OFF. This is because the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key in the determination of step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process, but in this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is because the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311 a when the OFF state is set from the ON state.

  Further, in this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 at which the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is between the timing ty and the timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. What is necessary is to reset to the value 0.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, it is assumed that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In the conditions, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 102 (B) and 102 (C), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is premised that the situation is continuing. In this respect, the main frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the main frame 4 is against the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted not to set the value 1 as the second operation information (as the value 0 is set). There is. This is illegally set or changed illegally under the situation where the main unit frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where the administrator of the game hall is not easily noticed) within the business hours of the game hall, etc. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in the present example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or in the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the RAM is cleared. By setting the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG, the initialization (step S38) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from becoming unexecutable. And, even if any abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the game start itself from occurring.

  In this embodiment, at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag as the second operation information The values of CS-FLG are set, and their operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, and at the time of the timing ty, the operation information is stored. It is determined based on the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the setting change process (step S37), or the setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the determined process To do. That is, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed until the timing ty comes. Even if it exists, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the hole manager erroneously operates the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a. It is not necessary to newly turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 again by maintaining the operation information stored at the timing tx so as not to change even when the operation mode is changed. Execute the processing intended by the hall administrator after power-on of 1 (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) promptly can do.

  In addition, when initializing the main control built-in RAM when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z without operating the setting key switch 1311a. When changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a. When the confirmation display is performed, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, in addition to operating the power switch 630a. Then, at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. The operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and at the time of timing ty, the hole manager can be determined depending on which combination of the operation information is. It is arranged to execute the processing intended by (initializing the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), and setting value confirmation display processing (step S28). For example, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, when changing the setting of the set value, or when the operation unit is provided corresponding to each of the confirmation display of the set value, other than the power switch 630 a It is necessary to provide three operation units in the control unit, but by changing the process to be executed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on depending on the combination of operation information, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a. And two operation parts of setting key switch 1311a may be provided, and the number of parts concerning the operation parts can be saved.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, it is assumed that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Under the conditions, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. 102 (B) and (C), for the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, The set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, so that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 without any problem. That is, in the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 can be repeated many times with respect to the outer frame 2. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is in the period until the timing ty arrives. When it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx is reset, and at timing ty, the setting change processing (step S37) and the setting value confirmation display processing The setting change process (step S37) is performed at the timing ty without stopping the process (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, even when main frame 4 is open with respect to outer frame 2 at timing tx, main frame 4 is closed with respect to outer frame 2 within the period until timing ty arrives. May be limited so that the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value can not be performed. According to this, as described above, under the situation where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 within the business hours of the game hall etc. (under the situation where the administrator of the game hall is not easily noticed) It is possible to prevent the setting being checked incorrectly.

  Further, in the present example, the RAM clear notification flag as the first operation information on condition that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is temporarily operated even at step S14 of the main control side power-on process. Although the value 1 is set to RCL-FLG, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is long pressed It may be a condition that Similarly, at step S18 on the main control side power-on process, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 as the second operation information on condition that the setting key switch 1311a is temporarily turned ON even temporarily. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if the hole manager accidentally touches the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a temporarily, the process not intended by the hole manager is It can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are limited. . That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the hole manager changes the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated from the operating state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. It is possible to switch off from the off state to the off state, but it is limited so that monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. . As a result, when operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, even if the hole administrator has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration, it is detected as a fraud. It is possible to prevent being done and to suppress the inhibition of regular work.

12-1. Modification of behavior of pachinko machine at power on]
In the embodiment described above, pressing the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is performed when initializing the main control built-in RAM, when changing the setting of the setting value, and when confirming the setting value. The timing to determine whether the unit is being operated and the timing to determine whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on are the same. The timing at which it is determined whether or not there is a key ON operation may be different from the timing at which it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. A modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a variation of the main control side power-on process. Further, FIG. 104 (A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case where initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. FIG. 104 (B) is a pachinko machine FIG. 104 (C) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of changing the setting of the set value when the power of the machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of performing. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z doubles as the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  As shown in FIG. 104, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and subsequently performs the power failure clear process (step S12). In the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notification voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, and in the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S14). When it is determined in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. ing. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pressing the pachinko machine It is necessary to turn on the power of 1.

  After the first operation information is stored at timing tx, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22), following step S16A or step S16B. In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait processing of the wait time. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notification signal is input (step S24). If it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch using the signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and / or a signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at the time of timing ty1, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key, and the determination result is stored in the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. doing. As described above, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time waiting process, while the timing at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process And the second operation information is stored. The setting key switch 1311 a is set to at least 10 seconds (s) which is a standby time (boot timer) until boot in the wait time standby process (step S22) as a period from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. The person who turns ON may turn ON the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but after turning on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the main The setting key switch 1311a may be turned on until the timing ty1 at which the control MPU completes the wait time waiting process comes.

  At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU sets the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG, and the setting key ON flag CS. It is determined which combination is the value of FLG (steps S25 to S27). When it is determined in step S25 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is By being satisfied, the setting change processing (step S37) is performed. In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, comes thereafter. On the other hand, at the time of timing ty1, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key, and the determination result is stored in the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, comes thereafter. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38) or the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process ( It is decided to decide whether to carry out step S28).

  As shown in FIG. 104 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Needs to be manipulated. Thus, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes wait time waiting processing after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the timing ty1, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is mainly output. It is stored in a general purpose memory element (general purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the initialization of the main control built-in RAM ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty1 or timing ty2, RWM clear There is no need for the pressing operation unit for the button 633z to be operated. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, and therefore before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, from the state where the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it is possible to make the state not being operated.

  In addition, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at timing ty1, but at timing tx and timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a It may be turned ON. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 comes, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311 is turned off in the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to the value 0 during the period from the timing ty 2 to the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

  As shown in FIG. 104 (B), when changing the setting of the setting value, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. It needs to be done. Thus, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, in the case of changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. Thus, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is It is stored in a general purpose memory element (general purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined that the setting change process (step S37) is to be performed based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the time of timing ty2. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty2, the setting change process (step S37) is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and then turned off. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting of the set value, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty1 or timing ty2, the RWM clear button 633z There is no need to operate the pressing operation unit of. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, and therefore before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, from the state where the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it is possible to make the state not being operated.

  In addition, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing tx and timing ty2. It does not have to be done. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 comes, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311 is turned off in the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to the value 0 during the period from the timing ty 2 to the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1 and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37) from timing ty2. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the process.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. It should not have been. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting processing after timing tx. Thus, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is It is stored in a general purpose memory element (general purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed from the time of timing ty2. I will do it. After the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty2, the setting value confirmation display process ((when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) is turned OFF. Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  In addition, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at the time of timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the time of timing tx or timing ty2. It does not have to be done. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 comes, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311 is turned off in the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

  Further, in this example, at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0 during the period from the timing ty2 to the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (step S28). What is necessary is to reset to.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, it is assumed that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In the conditions, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 104 (B) and (C), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is premised that the situation is continuing. In this respect, the main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing ty1 arrives, or the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted not to set the value 1 as the second operation information (as the value 0 is set). There is. This is illegally set or changed illegally under the situation where the main unit frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where the administrator of the game hall is not easily noticed) within the business hours of the game hall, etc. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in the present example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or in the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the RAM is cleared. By setting the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG, the initialization (step S38) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from becoming unexecutable. And, even if any abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the game start itself from occurring.

  In this embodiment, at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the first operation information is controlled as the main control. The first operation information stored at timing tx is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU until the timing ty2 arrives. Also, at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main control MPU. The second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives until the timing ty2 arrives. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38) or the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process ( It is determined whether or not step S28) is performed, and the determined processing is performed. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and OFF during the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored comes. It is possible to freely change the state of Then, at the time of timing ty1, the second operation information is transferred to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed in the period from timing tx to timing ty1. It stores, and at the time of timing ty 2 thereafter, based on the storage of the operation information, whether the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed (step S38) or the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value confirmation It is determined whether the display process (step S28) is to be performed, and the determined process is performed. Thereby, when performing setting change of the setting value or confirming display of the setting value, the hole manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Even if you forgot to operate the pachinko machine 1 anew, by changing the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state during the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored comes. There is no need to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and after the power on of the pachinko machine 1, processing intended by the hall administrator (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing Any one of (step S28) can be performed promptly. When initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hole administrator erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing t3 after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF during the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored comes, there is no need to change the setting of the setting value again, and the pachinko machine 1 Execute the processing intended by the hole manager after power-on (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) promptly. be able to.

  As described above, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 for a period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored comes. It is configured to be longer than the time until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored comes. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, there is no need to simultaneously operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a, and after operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a It is possible to perform the ON operation, and the hole manager can easily operate the plurality of operation units.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if it is necessary to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting of the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. The timing at which the pressing operation unit 633z is operated is a timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is not a timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. This is because the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is configured by a pressing switch whose operation state is not maintained, and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the time until the timing ty1 comes The operator of the RWM clear button 633z operates the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, even if it continues to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, because it is unclear whether the timing ty1 has arrived. It may stop. Therefore, with regard to the timing at which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated over a long period of time It is not necessary to continue the process, and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) can be reliably executed as the hole manager intends.

  Also, as mentioned above. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait processing of the wait time. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. When such an initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command specifying that it is awaiting determination of whether or not the setting key is ON at the timing ty1 is a command specifying the main control board 1310 (main control MPU After the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, the setting key switch 1311 a is output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 during the period until the timing ty1 arrives. The setting key operable notification is issued to notify that it is possible to change the state to the ON state. As the notification that the setting key can be operated, a voice repeating “setting key can be operated”, a message “setting key can be operated!” Is displayed, and the setting value setting key switch 1311 a of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process is turned on. It is assumed that lamp light emission is performed in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are limited. . That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty2, the hole manager changes the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated from the operating state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. It is possible to switch from the off state to the off state, or from the off state to the on state, but monitoring fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 It is limited to not execute fraud monitoring using. As a result, when operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, even if the hole administrator has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration, it is detected as a fraud. It is possible to prevent being done and to suppress the inhibition of regular work.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the change permission of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG. 105 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the setting value, and FIGS. 106 and 107 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the confirmation display of the setting value. In the state in which the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different compared to the state in which the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. It has become a thing. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the setting value is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the setting value, but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the RWM clear button 633z Since the pressing operation unit is not operated, it is different in that it holds various information at the time of turning off the power even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 105, when changing the setting of the setting value, first, it is checked whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). Then, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (a state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the outer frame Perform work to open the main body frame 4 for 2 (timing t1), insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a (timing t2). Then, the power switch 630a is operated while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3) It becomes a state where it is possible to change the setting of the value (change permitted state). In such a change permitted state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) may be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operating as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. It is possible to turn the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees and then turn it OFF so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off (timing t4). That is, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (the change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is set. It will be in a state where it is impossible to change the setting (unchangeable state). The player can play the game by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). State.

  When setting of setting values is changed, the main control MPU starts processing when the main control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The setting change process in step S37 is not completed until (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and thereafter in the period from timing t3 to timing t4. In order to prevent the interrupt permission setting in step S52 from being performed, the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to the normal power-on. Then, since the main control timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing, the special symbol in step S114 and the special electric role control are performed. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, and the normal motorized product control process, etc. are not executed yet and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be changed (the change permission state). However, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005 Etc. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the gate unit 2003, the input of the detection signal is not made effective, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and the second starting opening A special period of time during which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the special winning opening door 2413, and the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415 are not performed is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 106, when the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. If it is in the state where it is in the state, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). Then, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (a state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the outer frame Perform work to open the main body frame 4 for 2 (timing t1), insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to operate the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), a state where confirmation display of the set value can be performed ( It becomes a confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, in the setting display 1310g, the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is turned ON) Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position (timing t4 ), The setting display is switched to the non-display state from the state of displaying the setting value on the display 1310g. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is set. The confirmation display can not be performed (the confirmation can not be made). The player can play the game by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). State.

  In addition, when the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, the main control MPU starts processing when the main control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, but is set at timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 is not ended (in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process, it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF). In the period up to the timing t4, the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to the normal power-on. Then, since the main control timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing, the special symbol in step S114 and the special electric role control are performed. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, and the normal motorized product control process, etc. are not executed yet and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, although it is a state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005 Etc. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the gate unit 2003, the input of the detection signal is not made effective, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and the second starting opening A special period of time during which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the special winning opening door 2413, and the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415 are not performed is performed.

13-1. About special symbol, various entering ball detection, payout device]
As shown in FIG. 105, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process in step S114) is not started, A state (variation) in which it is not possible to perform variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 It becomes impossible state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. , It becomes a state (variable possible state) which can perform change display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of function display unit 1400.

  In addition, after setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when a big hit game is started at timing t6, when gaming ball B wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the detection signal is It becomes a state (immutable state B) in which it is impossible to perform variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 while making the input effective. As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that it is impossible to perform the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, but the non-variable state In A, when the game ball B wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the input of the detection signal is not made effective, while in the non-variable state B, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B has won in the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, when the power is turned off at timing t0, the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, or the variation display of the special symbol is stored as hold At timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then in step S38, the specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM Because it clears except for, the information regarding the fluctuation indication of the special design will be lost. For this reason, although it becomes a changeable state after the end of the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, it does not restart the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted at the time of cutting off the power, In addition, when the power is turned off, the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold is not performed.

  Also, in the variable state, a fraud related error (for example, a serious error at the time of magnetism detection or vibration detection) occurs in which it is impossible to play a game such as a fluctuation display of a special symbol by performing some fraudulent acts In this case, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud related error information for notifying that effect on a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600), or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of light emission devices). The LED 121a, the plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) are subjected to the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode for notifying that effect, or the fraud is notified for that to a predetermined sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a, etc.) Although incorrect related error output processing is performed to output related error sound, it is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. The change permission state, but is an inability to perform the variable display of the special symbols state (variation disabled state A), it is not carried out the fraud-related error output processing described above. It is assumed that the hall clerk is opening the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and changing the setting of the setting value in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is to emphasize the work efficiency of the hall clerk and to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work rather than the need for the fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to. In addition, as for the point that the fraud related error output process is not performed, all of the display process of the fraud related error information, the light emission process of the fraud related error mode, and the output process of the fraud related error sound described above are not performed. Although it is preferable, at least a part of the fraud related error output process may not be performed in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk. For example, it may be exemplified that other processing is performed as usual while the output processing of the fraud related error sound that may lower the work efficiency of the worker at high volume is not performed.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is not started, so the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the special winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc. and the gate unit 2003, main detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each are mainly controlled. The MPU does not input, and the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection itself of the gaming ball B may not be performed by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation (the variation of the special symbol) (Displayed) and payout of the game ball B will not be performed either, and thereby, the game ball B will be the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening for any reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value Even if the player enters 2004, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is made. The game ball B will not be performed for any of the high probability state, and thereby the gaming ball B will be displayed for the winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the second entrance 2008 is entered, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Note that the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gate portions (gates) in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310 h for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5 a in the change permission state It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid the situation where it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the first starting port 2002 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, etc. from the detection sensor corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs a detection signal of {circle over (1)} to treat the detection of the gaming ball B as effective. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, lottery, symbol fluctuation (variation display of special symbol) , It is possible to be paid out of the game ball B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is paid out, and the height is high. It is possible to perform the provision of the probability state (in the case where the "effective state" is set as the state when the gaming ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as being effective, but at the timing t5 On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective when the main unit frame 4 is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game It is because there is.

  Further, in the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts processing when the payout control power is on, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. That is, in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is possible to pay out the gaming ball B from the payout device 350. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to the various winning openings and gate portions (gates). For example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B is not paid out, for example. .

  When the game ball B enters the various winning openings at the time of turning off the power at timing t0 and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 while operating the main control board 1310, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input to the payout control board 633. Since the entire area is cleared, the information on the payout of the game ball B is lost. For this reason, although it becomes possible to pay out the gaming ball B from the payout device 350 after powering on the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, the payout of the gaming ball B which is unpaid at the time when the power is shut off. It is designed not to resume.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (special symbol and special motorized role control process in step S114) as in the change permitted state. To display the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400. It becomes impossible state (non-variable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. , It becomes a state (variable possible state) which can perform change display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of function display unit 1400.

  In addition, after setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when a big hit game is started at timing t6, when gaming ball B wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the detection signal is It becomes a state (immutable state B) in which it is impossible to perform variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 while making the input effective. As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that it is impossible to perform the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, but the non-variable state In A, when the game ball B wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the input of the detection signal is not made effective, while in the non-variable state B, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B has won in the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, when the power is turned off at timing t0, the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, or the variation display of the special symbol is stored as hold When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (when setting of the setting value is changed), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then, in step S38, the special pattern is changed except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. While information related to display is lost, timing t without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z If it is the case that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (if the confirmation display of the set value is performed), the set value in step S28 of the main control power on process at the time when the set key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The confirmation display process is ended, but the process of step S38 which clears except the specific area out of the whole area of the main control built-in RAM as in the setting change process of step S37 is not executed, therefore the variable symbol display Information will be retained. For this reason, after the end of the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the variable display of the special symbol being interrupted at the time of turning off the power is resumed when it becomes the changeable state. In addition, when the power is turned off, the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the variable state, it is impossible to play a game such as a variable display of a special symbol by performing some fraudulent acts (eg, severeness at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection) When an error occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud related error information to notify that to a predetermined display (for example, effect display device 1600), or a predetermined light emitting device (For example, the plurality of LEDs 121a, the plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) are subjected to the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode notifying that effect, or for a predetermined sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a etc.) Although the fraud related error output process is performed to output the fraud related error sound notifying the effect, from timing t3 to timing t3. In the confirmation display state, which is the period until the same as in the change permitted state, although it is a state where it is not possible to perform variable display of special symbols (impossible state A), the above-mentioned fraud related error output process I do not try to do it. In this confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and performs the confirmation display of the set value. This is to emphasize the work efficiency of the hall clerk and to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work rather than the need for the fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to. In addition, as for the point that the fraud related error output process is not performed, all of the display process of the fraud related error information, the light emission process of the fraud related error mode, and the output process of the fraud related error sound described above are not performed. Although it is preferable, at least a part of the fraud related error output process may not be performed in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk. For example, it may be exemplified that other processing is performed as usual while the output processing of the fraud related error sound that may lower the work efficiency of the worker at high volume is not performed. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized related error output processing, processing that is prohibited according to the difference between events that obstruct the work of the hall clerk and the control performed in the change permission state described above. The type, number, etc. of the may be made different. For example, in the change permission state, when any illegal related error occurs, the entire incorrect related error output process is not performed, while in the confirmation display state, the incorrect related error output when any incorrect related error occurs. Check that only part of the processing is not performed, or in the change permission state, while all the incorrect related error output processes are not performed when any incorrect related error occurs, the confirmation display state In the above, it can be exemplified that part of the fraud related error output process is not performed when any fraud related error occurs.

  Further, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is not started as in the change permitted state, so the first starting opening Detection sensors corresponding to game balls B entering various winning openings such as 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, first receiving port 2007, second receiving port 2008 and the gate portion 2003 The main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the control signal, and the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection itself of the gaming ball B may not be performed by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation (the variation of the special symbol) Display) and payout of the game ball B will not be performed, and thereby, the game ball B will be the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening for any reason during the regular operation of confirming the setting value. Even if the player enters 2004, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is made. The game ball B will not be performed for any of the high probability state, and thereby the gaming ball B will be displayed for the winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the second entrance 2008 is entered, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Note that the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gate portions (gates) in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-described base monitor 1310 h for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5 a in the confirmation display state It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to ball clogging or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid the situation where it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the first starting port 2002 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, etc. from the detection sensor corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs a detection signal of {circle over (1)} to treat the detection of the gaming ball B as effective. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, lottery, symbol fluctuation (variation display of special symbol) , It is possible to be paid out of the game ball B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is paid out, and the height is high. It is possible to perform the provision of the probability state (in the case where the "effective state" is set as the state when the gaming ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first inlet 2007 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as being effective, but at the timing t5 On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective when the main unit frame 4 is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game It is because there is.

  Further, in the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts processing when the payout control power is on, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. That is, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 350 as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gate portions (gates). For example, even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out, for example. .

  When the game ball B enters the various winning openings at the time of turning off the power at timing t0 and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z And when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 (when changing the setting of the setting value), the main control board 1310 operates the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 at that time. Since the signal (detection signal) is input and the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared, the information on the payout of the gaming ball B is lost, but the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at time t3 (if confirmation display of the set value is performed), the payout control internal RAM is Because it does not execute a process of clearing the area, so that the information about the payout of the game ball B is held. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the gaming ball B is unpaid out when the power is shut off when it becomes possible to pay out the gaming ball B from the dispensing device 350. It will resume the payout of

  In the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value at the time when setting key cylinder of setting key switch 1311a is turned on in setting indicator 1310g) In the confirmation display state in which the payout of the game ball B, which is unpaid, is being performed when the power is shut off as described above, the payout such as a broken ball is displayed. When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies a display (for example, 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) other than the setting display 1310g to that effect. The error information is displayed, or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) And to perform a payout associated error output processing for light emission processing notifications to payout related errors manner. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, whether or not the payout of the game ball B which is unpaid is completed when the power is shut off, a payout related error such as out of the ball occurs and the payout of the game ball B is performed. It is possible to determine whether it is not and to prevent the player from generating a loss. In addition, since the payout-related error processing is an important event to play the game smoothly later, emphasis is placed on the payout maintenance regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk, as in the above-mentioned fraud-related error processing. The same processing as normal is performed without setting any restrictions and without performing any suppression.

  As described above, when the power is turned off at the timing t0, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, the RWM clear button 633z If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit (if confirmation display of the set value is performed), the gaming ball which is unpaid at the moment when the power is shut off at that time The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 And the second special symbol) is in a state where it is not possible to perform variable display (non-variable state A), therefore, when the power is shut off at timing t0, the special symbol changes in the special symbol display of function display unit 1400 In the case where the display is performed, or in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is stored as hold, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. (When confirming display of the set value), at that point, the fluctuation display of the special symbol that has been interrupted at the time when the power is shut off can be resumed or Never or performs variable display of the special symbols are stored as pending at the time of the cut off. That is, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted at the time of shutting off the power is restarted or stored at the moment of cutting off the power. It is a period in which it is possible to only pay out the game ball B which is unpaid at the time of shutting off the power, even while preventing the progress of the game due to it without displaying the variation display of the special symbol. . For example, at the time of closing the store, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 350, if the power is shut off, the power is shut off In the game, a loss occurs to the player for the game ball B which is unpaid, but after that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the confirmation display state is made to prevent the game progress after the power is shut off. At the same time, when the power is shut off, only the payout of the game ball B which is unpaid can be made, and the player can be prevented from generating a loss.

  In the above modification, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned OFF, it is not possible to perform the variable display of the special symbol, and while stopping the game progress after the power is turned off, the game ball B that is unpaid at the time when the power is turned off While the period during which only the payout can be made is set, the confirmation display of the set value may not be performed. In addition, when an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the operation of the hall clerk turns on the other operation unit, the period until the operation is turned off , It is not possible to perform the variable display of the special symbol, and while the hall clerk prevents the game from proceeding after the operation is turned on, only the payout of the game ball B which is unpaid when the hall clerk is turned on It may be a period during which it is possible to Even in such a case, for example, at the time of closing the hall, while preventing the game progress in the period in which the hall clerk has made the operation ON, the payout of the game ball B which is unpaid when the hall clerk made the operation ON It is possible to prevent the player from generating a loss.

  As described above, after the end of the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, although it becomes a variable possible state which can perform the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 When the power is turned off, the special symbol stored as a hold is not displayed in a variable manner, but after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it becomes a variable possible state At the moment when the power is shut off, the special symbol stored as a hold is displayed in a variable display. More specifically, when entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol, the special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM, but at time t0 the power supply When a special random number is stored as a hold in the main control internal RAM at the time of turning off the main control side power off process, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power-off process. When the pachinko machine 1 is switched on after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM at the time of terminating the change permission state. Since the game backup information being cleared is cleared, the special random number stored as a hold will also be lost.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off is deleted, the function display unit 1400 in addition to the pending display in the effect display device 1600. The hold display on the hold number display of is hidden. Also, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 enters the ball, the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid. No special random number is stored as a new hold.

  By the way, at the end of the change permission state, if the special random number stored as a hold before power-off is not deleted, the following problems will occur. In this example, the higher the setting value among the setting values 1 to 6, the larger the number of big hit determination values set in the big hit determination table so that the big hit probability becomes high, but, for example, change When changing the setting of the setting value in the permission state, when changing from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the big hit judgment is considered as a big hit Since the special random numbers increase and the jackpot probability becomes high, there is a possibility that the special random numbers which were out of the setting value before the power-off become the big hit at the setting value after the end of the change permission state. On the other hand, when changing the setting of the setting value in the change permission state, when changing from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of the big hit determination is Since the special random number considered as a big hit decreases and the big hit probability becomes low, the special random number that was a big hit with the setting value before power off may be removed with the setting value after the end of the change permission state . In this respect, in this example, when the change permission state is ended, the result of the big hit determination is changed before the power is turned off and after the end of the change permission state by deleting the special random number stored as the hold. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an unfair situation. In particular, when a person who is not the hall administrator changes the setting of the set value in the change permission state due to a fraudulent act, the user tries to change the set value to a high set value (for example, set value 6). For example, even when the setting value is changed to 6), the result of the big hit determination is not changed to a big hit, and it can be suppressed so that anyone other than the hole manager does not cheat. When the hole manager changes the setting of the setting value in the change permission state, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is turned off is erased, so that the player is not disadvantaged. It is preferable to shut off the power supply in a state where there is no hold and then to change the setting of the setting value in the change permission state.

  In addition, when changing the setting of the setting value in the change permitted state, not only when changing from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) before power shut down to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) Even when the set value before power-off is maintained, the special random number stored as the hold is deleted at the end of the change permission state. For example, when a person who is not a hall administrator tries to change the setting of the set value in a change permitted state due to a fraudulent action, the user tries to change it to a high set value (for example, set value 6). The setting value of is a high setting value, and it may not be necessary to change the high setting value. Even in such a case, by deleting the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off at the end of the change permission state, the special random number that is likely to be a big hit with a high set value before the power is turned off Since the opportunity to perform the big hit judgment based on it is lost, it can be deterred so that only a hole manager does not conduct fraudulent acts.

  On the other hand, when the state changes to the confirmation display state after powering on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM at the time of ending the confirmation display state. Since the game backup information is not cleared, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is held. In the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid even if the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is entered, No special random number is stored as a new hold. In such a confirmation display state, only setting confirmation of the setting value is performed, and the setting value is not changed as in the change permitted state. That is, even if a person who is not the hall administrator checks the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state due to a fraudulent action, the special random numbers stored as pending are in the confirmation display state before the power is turned off. Since the result of the big hit judgment will not be changed after completion and the profit from fraudulent activity will not be obtained, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is turned off should be held also at the end of the confirmation display state And

  In addition, when a person who is not the hall administrator checks the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state due to a fraudulent act, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is accessed in some way while pretending to play the game normally If it is predicted that an unauthorized setting check will be performed, and the setting value that is checked improperly is an adverse setting (for example, the setting value 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), an advantageous setting ( For example, it is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 of the setting value 6) having the highest jackpot probability is sought and immediately left. In this respect, in this example, when the setting confirmation of the setting value is performed in the confirmation display state, since the holding is not deleted without being deleted, after the incorrect setting confirmation is performed, “the holding is left It is difficult to take an unnatural action such as leaving the seat, and by monitoring such an unnatural action, it is possible to make it easy to catch a person who performs unauthorized setting confirmation. As a result, it is possible to prevent all persons other than the hole manager from making unauthorized setting confirmation.

  In addition, in addition to the hold display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit while holding the special random number stored as hold before power-off in the confirmation display state, in order to further enhance the deterrence of fraudulent activity The pending display in the pending number display of 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and is displayed as if the special random number stored as a pending as in the change permitted state no longer exists. As a result, it is possible to cause the fraudster to misunderstand that the suspension has been cancelled, and to give up the continuation of the game after the setting has been confirmed illegitimately. In addition, in order to exert such a deterrent effect of fraudulent acts effectively, not only in the confirmation display state but also after the end of the confirmation display state, a predetermined return timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is closed or a predetermined time) The hold display may be in a non-display state over the period until the passage of time, etc.).

13-2. About the jackpot game and launcher]
As shown in FIG. 105, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process in step S114) is not started, A large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a distribution piece 2415 for distributing the gaming balls B accepted by the high winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 It becomes impossible state. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. , The special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. By this, after setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when a big hit game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the big winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 as the big hit game. The game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008.

  In addition, at the time of shutting off the power at the timing t0, when the big winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating during the execution of the big hit game, at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Since the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then the specific area is cleared out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38, the big hit game is being executed ( Information on the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 is lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, although it becomes possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415, it is interrupted when the power is shut off. There is no need to restart the big hit game being played, and the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are not operated.

  As described above, the main control side timer interrupt process (the switch input process in step S104) is not started in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc., the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, It will not be performed for any of the payout and the high probability state, and thereby the gaming ball B will be the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. Even if the second entrance 2008 is entered, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end time of the change permission state. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time passes after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operated. It may be possible to This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game It is because there is.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (fire permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, but the firing by the handle 182 is performed in the change permission state. In consideration of performing an inspection of the operation, etc., the logic of the release permission signal to transmit permission to release the game ball B to the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 is set in that period, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B can be fired. In addition, when setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt processing (the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, when the handle 182 is operated, the state where the game ball B can be fired is continued. As described above, it is possible to prepare the firing of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing the

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (special symbol and special motorized role control process in step S114) as in the change permitted state. The game ball B accepted by the large winning hole 2005 is distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 because the large winning hole 2005 can be opened and closed. The distribution piece 2415 can not be operated. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. , The special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. By this, after setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when a big hit game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the big winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 as the big hit game. The game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008.

  In addition, at the time of shutting off the power at the timing t0, when the big winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating during the execution of the big hit game, the timing while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at t3 (if the setting value is changed), the setting of step S37 of the main control power on process is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Since the change process is ended, and then the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38, the big hit game is being executed (the operation of the big winning port door 2413 Information is lost, but the pachinko machine 1 does not operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z at timing t3. If it is determined that the power is turned on (if the confirmation display of the set value is performed), the set value confirmation display process in step S28 of the main control power on process is ended when the set key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. However, since the process of step S38 which clears except for the specific area in the whole area of the main control built-in RAM is not executed as after the setting change process of step S37, the big hit game is being executed (big winning opening door 2413 Information on the operation of the distribution piece 2415). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 107, after the end of the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As an opportunity, when the power is shut off, the interrupted big hit game is resumed, and the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. Also, as described later, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before resuming the big hit game which has been interrupted at the time when the power is shut off at the timing t5. Immediately after resuming the game, the game ball B can be made to enter the big winning opening 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 efficiently.

  As described above, the main control timer interrupt process (the switch input process at step S104) is not started in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc., the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, It will not be performed for any of the payout and the high probability state, and thereby, the gaming ball B will be the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, for some reason during the regular operation of confirming the setting value. Even if the second entrance 2008 is entered, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end time of the confirmation display state. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time passes after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operated. It may be possible to This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game It is because there is. In addition, when you resume the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was turned off from when the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end point of the confirmation display state, before restarting the big hit game. It is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, but it is possible to resume the big hit game by delaying the resumption of the big hit game being interrupted at the time of turning off the power. It is easy to prepare the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182, and the game ball B can be made to enter the big winning opening 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 efficiently immediately after restarting the big hit game. .

  Also, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is not started as in the change permission state, but confirmation display In consideration of inspection of the firing operation by the handle 182 in the state, a release permission signal for transmitting permission to release the game ball B to the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 in that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be fired when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt processing (the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, when the handle 182 is operated, the state where the game ball B can be fired is continued. Thus, it is possible to operate the handle 182 before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B. The game can be started immediately after closing the

13-3. About the production device and the production member]
As shown in FIG. 105, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts processing upon peripheral control power on, and the predetermined screen on the effect display device 1600 It is possible to display an image. Then, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp or speaker Notification is being performed during setting change to notify that setting change of the setting value is in progress. As notification during this setting change, sound to repeat "setting change in progress", message display "setting change in progress!", And lamp emission with colors corresponding to the setting values of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process It is supposed to be. In addition, notification during setting change is notification (effect) performed only in the change permission state, and is executed prior to main body frame opening notification performed in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 . That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display or voice of "frame is open") is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification In the setting change notification is given top priority without performing the above. The main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification is prioritized over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. The form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, until the predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image from the effect display device 1600 or the output from the lamp or the speaker changes the symbol or the big hit game The game start notification is executed to notify that it is possible to start a game such as.

  In addition to the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also notified as the setting change notification described above in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special In addition to the symbol indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting change is in progress (change permitted state), of the setting The confirmation display indicator which consists of one LED which displays that it is in a confirmation display (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change-in-progress indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it can be grasped by the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, various winnings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008 Even when the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when the game ball B enters the mouth or gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates can be obtained even though the game should not be performed in the change permitted state by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. A warning effect A is issued to notify that the game ball B is entering the club. The warning effect A is executed prior to notification during setting change and notification of main body frame opening. That is, at the time of execution of the warning effect A, the warning effect A is to be executed with the highest priority without notification during setting change or notification of main body frame opening.

  Also, in the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is a period during which the setting key switch 1311a is not in the setting key ON state, but in such a setting key ON state In this case, warning effects B and C are issued to notify that the setting key is turned on improperly by the image, the lamp and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbol variation is performed at the normal time, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, The warning effect B is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbol variation is not performed at the normal time, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. Also, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the current effects are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed, and the warning effects B and C are performed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects B and C execute the effect in the same manner, the effects may be performed in a different manner so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts processing when the peripheral control power is turned on, and detects the operation of the rendering operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). It is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. That is, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the rendering operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust stepwise the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the screen of FIG. Specifically, by long-pressing the rendering operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing five stages of adjustment status depending on the time for which the pressing is performed, and the light amount) After displaying any of the gauge images, the volume and light quantity are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is short-pressed. , And the volume and light amount can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during a period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed while the symbol is changing, the effect operation unit 160 is waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for the effect. Even if it operates, it is considered as the prohibition period which can not adjust volume and light volume.

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU starts processing when the peripheral control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, and the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main body is in a state in which it is not possible to perform the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect members, the effect members normally operate from the initial position toward the operation position It is supposed that the confirmation of the position, the accurate alignment, etc. are performed so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using a rendering member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol At a predetermined timing during the movement, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed, the fluctuation permitted state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 as in the above, the function display unit is turned on immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It becomes a state (variable possible state) which can perform change display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of 1400. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the initial operation of the effect member, when the fluctuation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol fluctuation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern In some cases, the operation opportunity of the rendering member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to perform the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (variable state A Since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when transitioning to the changeable state after the end of the change permission state is performed. There is a high possibility of Thereby, after the change permission state is ended, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol change, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. The effect member can be operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern, and information obtained from the effect contents can be prevented from being missed.

  However, for the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 and the game board 5, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is required to complete. Therefore, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the rendering member is completed, the initial position of the rendering member After completion of the operation, execution of the effect using the effect member is enabled. That is, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, and in either case, the setting key switch at timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in this example, the peripheral control MPU starts processing when the peripheral control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, and a predetermined screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display an image. Then, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased as in the change permission state, and the image of the effect display device 1600 or Notification is issued during confirmation display to notify that the confirmation display of the setting value is being performed by the output from the lamp and the speaker. As notification during this confirmation display, sound to repeat "during confirmation display", message display of "during confirmation display!", And lamp emission in colors corresponding to the set values of 1 to 6 set are executed. It is supposed to be. In addition, the notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed prior to the main body frame opening notification performed in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 . That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and sound of "frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification During the confirmation display, it is assumed that the notification is given top priority without performing. The main frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, giving priority to the confirmation display notification over the main frame opening notification, and performing the main frame opening notification after the confirmation display notification is completed. The form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, until the predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image from the effect display device 1600 or the output from the lamp or the speaker changes the symbol or the big hit game The game start notification is executed to notify that it is possible to start a game such as.

  In addition, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the big hit that is interrupted at the time when the power is cut off triggered by the fact that it is possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 It is possible to resume the game and operate the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415, but as shown in FIG. 107, when such a big hit game is resumed, the image or lamp of the effect display device 1600, By the output from the speaker, a big hit game restart notification is issued to restart the big hit game being interrupted when the power is shut off and to operate the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. In addition, before the resumption of the big hit game, while waiting for the execution of the big hit game which has been interrupted at the time of shutting off the power by the output from the image and the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the speaker A big hit game standby notification may be executed to notify that the operation of the piece 2415 is in progress. Thereby, it is possible to operate the handle 182 before the resumption of the big hit game and prepare for the launch of the game ball B, and immediately after resuming the big hit game, the game is played on the big prize port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 efficiently. The ball B can be made to enter.

  In addition to the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600, the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is notified as the confirmation display described above as in the change permission state. The notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special In addition to the symbol indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting change is in progress (change permitted state), of the setting The confirmation display indicator which consists of one LED which displays that it is in a confirmation display (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LED of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it can be grasped by the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  In addition, various confirmations such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, etc. are displayed in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Even when the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when the game ball B enters the mouth or gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates can be obtained even though the game should not be performed in the confirmation display state by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. A warning effect A is issued to notify that the game ball B is entering the club. The warning effect A is executed prior to notification during confirmation display and main body frame opening notification. That is, at the time of execution of the warning effect A, the warning effect A is to be executed with the highest priority without performing notification during confirmation display or body frame opening notification.

  Also, in the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is a period during which the setting key switch 1311a is not in the setting key ON state, but in such a setting key ON state In this case, warning effects B and C are issued to notify that the setting key is turned on improperly by the image, the lamp and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbol variation is performed at the normal time, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, The warning effect B is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbol variation is not performed at the normal time, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. Also, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the current effects are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed, and the warning effects B and C are performed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects B and C execute the effect in the same manner, the effects may be performed in a different manner so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts processing when the peripheral control power is turned on, and detects the operation of the rendering operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). It is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the operation of the rendering operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker It is possible to adjust stepwise the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a lamp or a screen of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, by long-pressing the rendering operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing five stages of adjustment status depending on the time for which the pressing is performed, and the light amount) After displaying any of the gauge images, the volume and light quantity are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is short-pressed. , And the volume and light amount can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during a period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed while the symbol is changing, the effect operation unit 160 is waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for the effect. Even if it operates, it is considered as the prohibition period which can not adjust volume and light volume.

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU starts processing when the peripheral control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, and the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is impossible to perform the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 similarly to the change permission state While in state A), an initial operation of a rendering member (for example, the rendering operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the effect members, each of the effect members is sequentially or simultaneously performed with a predetermined operation pattern. By making it operate, it is decided to check whether the rendering member normally operates from the initial position toward the operating position, and to perform precise alignment so that the rendering member stands by at the initial position. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using a rendering member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol At a predetermined timing during the movement, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed, the fluctuation permitted state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 as in the above, the function display unit is turned on immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It becomes a state (variable possible state) which can perform change display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of 1400. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the initial operation of the effect member, when the fluctuation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol fluctuation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern In some cases, the operation opportunity of the rendering member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the state where the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can not be performed (variable state A Since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when transitioning to the changeable state after the end of the confirmation display state. There is a high possibility of Thereby, after the confirmation display state is ended, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol change, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. The effect member can be operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern, and information obtained from the effect contents can be prevented from being missed.

  However, for the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main unit frame 4 and the game board 5, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is required to complete. Therefore, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the rendering member is completed, the initial position of the rendering member After completion of the operation, execution of the effect using the effect member is enabled. That is, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, and in either case, the setting key switch at timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  In addition, when the effect members are mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 respectively, the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the game board 5 is performed in advance in advance and mounted on the main body frame 4 The initial operation of the effect member may be delayed to “after closing of the main body frame 4 at timing t5”. This is because the body frame 4 is opened during the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value, and the body frame 4 is closed after the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is completed. An impact is generated on the frame 4. For this reason, at the time of closing operation of the main body frame 4, situations may occur such that the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 does not operate normally or positional deviation occurs in the initial position, etc. The initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 can be coped with even when such a situation occurs by starting after the closing of the main body frame 4.

  When each of the effect members mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5 is initially operated either sequentially or simultaneously, the initial operation of each of the effect members is not completed normally (each effect member When there is a rendering member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time, or when there is a rendering member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined timing, another initial position is performed. If there is a rendering member not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after the operation or retry operation, etc.), the rendering using the rendering member which is not completed normally is executed during the symbol variation Not to limit. Here, as described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. Immediately after the power of the machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol display of the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be changed (changeable state) and the initial operation of the effect member is performed. . In this example, when the initial operation of the effect member in such a situation is not completed normally, the player feels uncomfortable that the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position during the variation display of the special symbol. Change the setting value and confirm the setting value without setting the setting key switch 1311a to ON when setting the pachinko machine 1 to the power on. If the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on, one of the effect members is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (when it is assumed that the initial operation of each effect member is finished and the initial position is located). When not being output, an initial position error notification to the outside is performed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, if the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation during setting change of the set value (change permitted state) or during confirmation display of the set value (confirmed display state), normal setting change or confirmation display In order to avoid the hindrance of the operation of the above, even if the effect member is stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is not performed. Then, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial position error notification to the outside is performed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Note that although the initial position error notification is started after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, this is a specification that is started in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation. It may be In addition, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation, notification of a mode that does not disturb the operation of normal setting change or confirmation display among the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 For example, only the lamp) may be executed in advance.

  In addition, as a modification, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, special In a state in which it is impossible to perform the variable display of the symbol, and while preventing the progression of the game, of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 While the initial operation is performed, the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value may not be performed. In addition, when an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the operation of the hall clerk turns on the other operation unit, the period until the operation is turned off , It is not possible to perform the variable display of the special symbol, and while the hall clerk prevents the game from proceeding after the operation is turned on, the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main unit frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. It may be a period of Even in such a case, after the hall clerk turns off the operation, the initial operation of the effect member is affected even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol change. It is possible to operate the rendering member from the initial position to the operating position based on the fluctuation pattern without being lost, and to avoid missing information obtained from the content of the rendering.

  As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the volume output from the speaker or the light amount output from the light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust the More specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value or checking the setting of the setting value, the main control MPU starts processing when the main control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Before starting the setting change process of step S37 and the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs an initialization process for starting (booting) the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. The process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. As described above, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization processing for starting (booting) the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume of sound output from the speaker or the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted It has become.

  Further, with regard to the volume output from the speaker and the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, The information regarding the light amount is not held, and the initial state (for example, the state in which the volume and the light amount become the median value) is returned. For this reason, the volume and the light amount after the power is turned on change to a state different from the volume and the light amount which are adjusted before the power is shut off.

  In addition, when setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is special. It has shifted to the variable possible state where it is possible to do the fluctuation indication of the design. That is, prior to the player being able to start playing the game in the variable state, the sound volume is output from the speaker, the light is output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust the amount of light. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation is If it is being transmitted, during symbol variation, sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set in the effect, or light is emitted from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. When such an effect is started before the adjustment of the light amount or the volume, the volume or the light amount is outputted in the initial state, and the player may feel uncomfortable. In this respect, in this example, the player can start playing the game by enabling adjustment of the volume and the light amount prior to the player being able to start playing the game in the variable state. In the meantime, the volume and the light amount can be changed from the initial state, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the volume and the light amount in the initial state after the start of the game by the player.

  In this example, by long-pressing the rendering operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing five stages of adjustment states depending on the time for which the pressing is performed) on the effect display device 1600; After displaying any of the light amount gauge images, the volume and light amount are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 →) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is short-pressed. 2), and the volume and the light amount can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. Then, in the changeable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and the light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, although it is possible to change the volume and the light amount when the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) is operated, predetermined from the speaker I try not to output the change sound. It is assumed that the hole manager performs setting change of the set value or confirmation display of the set value in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is to emphasize the work efficiency of the hole manager and to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work rather than the need to output the change sound notifying that the volume or the light amount has been changed. When the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, light is output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 with the changed light amount as the light amount is changed. Since the event is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are not prohibited.

  Further, in the present example, when an operation to change the volume and the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) in the variable display state, the volume and the light amount after adjustment are output at that time. It is reflected immediately to do. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, although it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume or the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161), at that time, It does not reflect to output in the volume and light quantity after adjustment, but reflects to output in the volume and light quantity after adjustment after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. That is, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as described in detail later, alert notification is given to the outside so that no one other than the hall administrator performs cheating. With regard to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 being executed as such alert notification, although it is being performed, it is not possible to set the volume or amount of light after adjustment to a fixed volume or amount of light. It is like that. As a result, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if an operation to change the volume or the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), a situation in which the alert notification during execution becomes difficult to notice Can be prevented, and the fraud monitoring system can be prevented from becoming weak.

  As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the alert notification is performed to the outside so that no one other than the hall administrator performs an unfair act, but as described in detail later, the change is made. Even after the end of the permitted state or the confirmation display state, the alert notification can be extended and executed. Then, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the volume and / or volume of the alert operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161) is used even while the extended alert notification is being executed. Although it is possible to perform an operation to change the light amount, it is not reflected so as to output the adjusted volume or light amount at that point, and the volume or light amount after adjustment after the end of the extended alert notification It reflects to output in. That is, the alert notification is extended, and the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 being executed is also set as the fixed volume and the light amount, making it impossible to set the volume and the light amount after adjustment. . Thus, similarly to the change permission state or the confirmation display state, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the volume and / or the volume can be changed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). Even when the operation to change the light amount is performed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to notice the alert notification that is being extended, which is being performed, and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from being weakened.

  In addition, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume or the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (the pressing operation unit 161), and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. Although it is reflected to output by the volume and light quantity after adjustment, for some of the lamps, when the operation to change the volume and light quantity is performed, by the volume and light quantity after adjustment It may be reflected to output. For example, among the plurality of lamps, the lamp used for alert notification is reflected so that the volume and the light amount after adjustment are output to maintain the fraud monitoring system when the operation to change the volume and the light amount is performed. If the operation to change the volume or the light amount is performed, all or some of the lamps not used for alert notification may be reflected to be output as the volume or the light amount after adjustment.

13-4. About fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent activities are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning openings and gate portions (gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 by changing the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a which is divided into the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 The magnetic sensor 2470 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering the ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. The monitoring result is sent to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform the fraud related error processing. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates or strikes the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a defined in the game board 5 by applying vibration to the game board 5. The main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor by providing a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity such as entering into various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided. The fraudulent action due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform the fraud related error processing. With regard to monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the normal state (setting change of setting value or confirmation display of setting value is not performed) and the state where setting change of setting value or confirmation display of setting value is being performed. And the manner of monitoring is different.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting a fraudulent action by a magnet, it is a part of the game board 5 where magnetism has occurred (is it around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5? One magnetic sensor is provided which can specify whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side. Under normal conditions, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates a magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not occur in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It monitors whether it occurred (whether the magnet has approached), and monitors fraudulent activities such as setting change and confirmation display, except those who perform setting change and confirmation display of the setting value, and also in front of the game area 5a The game board monitors whether the magnetism (unauthorized access magnetism) which should not occur originally is generated (whether the magnet approaches) to the area, and changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to change the game board It monitors fraudulent acts such as entering various winning openings and gate parts provided on 5. In addition, as an illegal act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, metal illegal equipment in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) , A magnet for indirectly operating the metal fraudulent device, and a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening that partially breaks the pachinko machine 1 is loaded with magnet and metal fraudulent It is conceivable that the appliance is operated to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, in the injustice detecting process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, it is determined that the injustice using the magnet is performed. Then, when it is determined that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 To allow the store clerk to understand that the fraud is being conducted.

  Further, although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of this example is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is a first magnetic detection having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to one side surface Magnetic detection within the region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the opposite side surface on the other side can be performed. ing. The term "strong in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 2470 is disposed such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the front-rear direction in a front view of the pachinko machine 1, and one magnetic detection area Includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and the magnetic detection area is a first start opening 2002, a second start opening 2004, a normal winning opening 2003, a winning opening such as the big winning opening 2005 on the front side of the pachinko A plurality of locations among the main parts of the ball flow channel can be monitored, and the other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to monitor the provided area. With such a configuration, it can be monitored whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311 is provided, or whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Also, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting cheating due to vibration, vibration capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A sensor 3004 is provided. The vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity only during the big hit game during the normal time, and the fraud sensor using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed except for the big hit game. In the big hit game, this is to distribute the game ball B, which is received by the distribution piece 2415 at the big winning opening 2005 and circulates the inside, to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. If the distribution piece 2415 is vibrated, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and make the game ball B enter the second receiving port 2008. , To prevent such cheating. That is, during the big hit game during normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 adds vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) which is not supposed to occur to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005 It is monitored whether or not the game ball B is inserted in the second receiving port 2008 by changing the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and the like.

  When the detection signal from vibration sensor 3005 is input in the fraud detection process in step S112, it is assumed that the fraud due to vibration is being performed on the periphery of distribution piece 2415 inside big winning opening 2005. Deciding. Then, when it is determined that an illegal act due to vibration is being performed on the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005, it is installed on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer thus processed so that a hall clerk can know that the fraudulent activity is being performed.

  In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that the cheating by vibration is performed is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that the cheating using the magnet is performed. . However, in the case where a security signal is output by judging that cheating by vibration is being performed, and when the security signal is output by judging that cheating using a magnet is being performed, The notification modes are different when the external notification is performed in the fraud related error process controlled by the control MPU. That is, when it is determined that the cheating by vibration is performed and the security signal is output, the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are output in a mode corresponding to the cheating by vibration. When a security signal is output while it is determined that a fraudulent action using a magnet is being performed while a notification by output is performed, the effect display in a mode corresponding to the fraudulent action by a magnet The notification by the image, the lamp, and the output from the speaker of the device 1600 can be made to distinguish which of the fraudulent acts are being performed.

  Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of the set value and confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of the setting value, and FIG. 109 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during confirmation display of the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of the cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311 or the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for fraudulent acts using magnets, except for authorized workers who perform setting changes. In addition, when performing setting change of the setting value, even if the authorized worker who performs the setting change has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of the regular setting change work.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button function, and the setting This is because there is no room for tampering due to vibration other than the authorized worker who makes the change. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the setting change changes the setting of the setting value, it is prevented from being detected as cheating due to the vibration, and the regular setting changing operation is performed. The inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to operate the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z to set the setting value. It will be in the state where it is possible to change (change permitted state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the change permitted state is started, via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. In addition to this, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, even when ending the change permission state, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 On the other hand, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when the setting of the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hole computer after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. When a security signal from a magnetic sensor 2470 is input while monitoring the fraudulent activity by a magnet using the magnetic sensor 2470, it is determined that a fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed, or In the state where the cheating by vibration is monitored using the vibration sensor 3005, when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input and it is determined that cheating by vibration is being performed, It is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of the cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of the cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. Even when not monitoring such fraudulent activity, by outputting a security signal to the hall computer, it warns the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, and the set value is properly set. It is possible to make it possible for a store clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change is being performed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor, through the hall computer, that the setting change of the setting value has not been performed by the person performing the fraudulent action through the hall computer. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU outputs the second security signal, and the setting change of the setting value is completed by the second security signal. Can be made known to the store clerk through the hall computer.

  The security signal may be output to the hall computer for a time that can be recognized by the hall computer, and the time from the timing t3 to the timing t3 'is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output at the time when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state starts, is subsequently performed. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, the change permission state may not be completed. That is, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the timing t3 'at which the output of the first security signal ends. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is ended, if the first output of the security signal is not completed, the first security is performed. After the output of the signal is completed, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, one second). That is, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the first output of the security signal is completed. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, at the end of the change permission state, even if the first output of the security signal is not completed, the hall computer is not Thus, the security signal can be reliably output twice.

  As another example in the case where the above-described predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be performed. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is ended, if the first output of the security signal is not completed, the security signal is newly added from that time. The timing may be started (the timer for counting the signal output time may be set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output continuously. In this case, the security signal is output over a long period exceeding the predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal), and the setting value is the same as when the second security signal is output. The store clerk can be made aware of the completion of the setting change by outputting the security signal over a long period of time. If there is no need for the store clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the output mode of the security signal due to the environment of the game hall, etc., based on the operation of the predetermined changeover switch etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permitted state, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because in the confirmation display state, a regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a non-authorized worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value uses the magnet for fraudulent activity. There is no room to In addition, when performing confirmation display of the setting value, even if the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of the regular confirmation display operation.

  Further, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state, monitoring of the cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display to perform the cheating by vibration. It is because there is not. In addition, even when a regular worker who performs the confirmation display adds vibration when performing the confirmation display of the setting value, it is prevented from being detected as cheating due to the vibration, and the regular confirmation display operation is performed. The inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. It will be in the state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display can be performed, but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state is started, the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the side of the game hall through. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 While the control MPU outputs a security signal, when the setting display switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 when the confirmation display state is ended, the game hall side is set via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU does not output the security signal to the installed hall computer. That is, while the security signal is output twice to the hall computer when changing the setting of the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed. It will output only once. Thereby, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of the cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the monitoring of the cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. Yes, even while not monitoring such fraudulent activity, by outputting a security signal to the hall computer, it warns the monitoring of the relevant pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, and sets it to regular It is possible to have a store clerk know that the confirmation display of the value is being performed through the hall computer. That is, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer that the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed by the person who performs the fraudulent action through the hall computer. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the security signal for the second time as in the change permitted state, and thus, the setting change and the setting value of the setting value. It is possible to distinguish which has been done with the confirmation display of.

  In addition, when it is judged that an illegal act due to magnet or vibration is performed and a security signal is output to the hall computer, peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. While the notification by the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker is performed as the external notification in the error related processing controlled by the MPU, the setting change time (change permission state) or the setting value When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information related to the monitoring result is sent to the peripheral control MPU, and an error related to control by the peripheral control MPU As notification from outside of the process, any notification by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 is performed It is as in no. This also makes it possible not to disturb the operation of the regular setting change and the confirmation display.

  In the above modification, setting is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the setting key switch 1311a is the setting key ON and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. While the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed until the key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. You may do so. In addition, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the operation by the hall clerk turns on another operation unit, the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is provided. It may be a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activity is not performed. Even in such a case, even when a regular worker who performs the inspection work approaches the magnet or applies vibration when performing inspection work of the pachinko machine 1, it is detected as a fraudulent act due to the magnet or the vibration. It can prevent the inhibition of regular inspection work. Also, at least at the start of a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activity is not performed using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, a security signal is output to the hall computer as well as at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Thus, it is possible to warn the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, and make it possible for the store clerk to know that the inspection work is being properly performed.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting a fraudulent action by a magnet, a portion where magnetism is generated (a setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 or a setting key switch 1311 a Although one magnetic sensor capable of specifying the front of the game area 5a located on the front side of 5 is provided, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, for example, on the front side of the game board 5 Each of the magnetic sensors may be capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located and around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5. In such a configuration, as in the configuration of one magnetic sensor 2470 described above, monitoring of fraudulent activity using a plurality of magnetic sensors is normally performed, while a change permission state or a confirmation display state is performed. In the above, monitoring of fraudulent activity using a plurality of magnetic sensors may not be performed, but in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, some magnetic sensors (for example, setting change) among the plurality of magnetic sensors The monitoring of fraudulent activity may be performed using only the substrate 1311 and a magnetic sensor provided around the setting key switch 1311a.

  Similarly, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal act due to vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors are provided, for example, a large winning opening located on the front side of the game board 5 in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005 Each vibration sensor may be capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration also around the entrance other than 2005 and around the setting change board 13111 and the setting key switch 1311 a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, monitoring of cheating using a plurality of vibration sensors is normally performed (however, for the vibration sensors provided around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005, While in the jackpot game only), in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible not to execute monitoring of fraudulent activity using a plurality of vibration sensors, but in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, It is also possible to execute monitoring of fraudulent activity using only some vibration sensors (for example, vibration sensors provided around the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a) among a plurality of vibration sensors.

  In addition, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibrations during transmission of security signals immediately after the change permission status or confirmation display status has ended (immediately after monitoring of fraudulent activity has been started), and in such a case There is a concern that the fraud monitoring system may be weakened due to the inability to output an important security signal based on the detection of an action. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, to delay until the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state elapses, delay the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity. It can be illustrated that the output timings of the security signal based on the detection of the fraud are not overlapped. Specifically, although the monitoring of the fraudulent activity is started immediately after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended, the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state When a new security signal is output (due to detection of fraud) within the output period of, the output of the security signal that has been output in advance without discarding the new security signal output The output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until the completion of the above, and the new security signal may be output in a form delayed from the original output time. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the fraud monitoring system is weakened because the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded. As another example, the start time of the fraud monitoring itself is extended until the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. It may be According to such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent behavior is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation where the fraudulent monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, Each control is shared. Among them, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects in the game based on a command from the main control board 1310. Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses predetermined information of the main control built-in RAM as a variety of commands with information regarding control of game effects and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 (stores commands Information on the control of the game effect and the information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 by the peripheral control board 1510 by sequentially setting the commands to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be grasped. However, when the setting value is changed or the confirmation value is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control built-in RAM uses various commands as information on control of game effects and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands. While setting in the predetermined storage area, only some commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 while the change permission state or confirmation display state is being executed, and the remaining commands are displayed in the change permission state or confirmation display state. After completion, the data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, the transmission timing of the command when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 (A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the command at the time of normal power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (when the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed). These are time charts which show the transmission timing of the command in the case where setting change of a setting value and confirmation display of a setting value are performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing is started, and the game ball B is displayed in the various winning openings and the gate portion 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when entering the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 110, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power on process shown in FIG. Then, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, as described in [the behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power on], the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power on process is executed. When the ty arrives, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). When it is determined in step S25 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is By being established, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S37, and the setting is permitted. When it is determined in step S26 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control internal RAM in step S38. After initialization of, make it variable. Further, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 to make a confirmation display state. When it is determined in step S27 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control internal RAM in step S38. It is possible to make it variable without initializing it. In the variable state, as described above, the main control timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special motorized product control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, thereby displaying the function. It is a state where it becomes possible to perform the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol indicator of unit 1400.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait processing of the wait time. Since the initialization processing for booting (booting) has been completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after the timing ty.

  As shown in FIG. 110A, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the time of timing t3, and the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed assuming that the power is turned on normally. In this case, if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is also operated at the timing t3, the variable RAM can be changed after initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38 from the timing ty. On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing t3, the variable RAM 21 is made variable without initializing the main control built-in RAM at step S38 from the timing ty. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information on control of game effects and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM, and those commands Is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  For example, when the main body frame 4 is open at the time of timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door open time command specifying that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer and opens the door As soon as the time command is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door open command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and the effect display device is in a period until the timing t5 at which the main frame 4 is closed comes. The door open notification is performed to notify that the main body frame 4 is open by the image of 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. As the notification when the door is open, it is assumed that a sound repeating "the door is open", a message display "the door is open!", And lamp light emission with luminance higher than that of the normal time are performed. In this manner, while the main body frame 4 is opened, the hall manager can immediately grasp that the main body frame 4 is open by executing notification when the door is opened toward the outside, and the main body frame It is possible to strengthen the surveillance system so that no one other than the hall administrator can do fraudulent activities during the opening of 4.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at time t3, and the setting change of the set value or confirmation display of the set value is performed, RWM is also performed at time t3. When the pressing operation unit of the clear button 633z is operated, from the time of timing ty, the setting change setting can be made to be changeable, while the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z is performed at timing t3. If the unit is not operated, the confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed is made from the timing ty. Then, in the change permission state, the change permission state is ended at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and after the timing t4 the initialization of the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is performed. Make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is ended at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the time t4. Make it possible.

  In the change permission state or the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information on control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control internal RAM. The storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set is made different depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first storage area (first command buffer) and the second storage area (second command buffer) as storage areas (command buffers) of the main control internal RAM. If a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, while if a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is set. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311 is turned OFF comes immediately without transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the timing t4, the second command buffer Is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. . That is, while at least in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a command that needs to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state in the second command buffer is After finishing the confirmation display state, a command that needs to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set.

  In addition, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information on control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 in the first command buffer as various commands, and the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, although the command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, all commands are set except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state. The command is set only in the first command buffer so as to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. However, if the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not divided except for the change permitted state and the confirmation display state, and the command is set in the non-classified command buffer, the command is immediately set. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a command set in the second command buffer, a door open command for specifying that the main body frame 4 is open, a command for various winnings opening, When the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. or the gate unit 2003, the detection itself is detected while the input of the detection signal is invalid (abnormal entrance Abnormal ball entry command etc to identify that there was a Specifically, the door open command is set in the second command buffer when the main body frame 4 is open at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the second command When the door opening command is set in the buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes, and at timing t4. The door open command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the abnormal entry time command is set in the second command buffer when the game ball B is detected (abnormal entry) in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. If the abnormal entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal entry command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311 is turned OFF comes. At timing t4, an abnormal entry time command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a door open command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the period until the timing t5 at which the main frame 4 is closed comes. The door opening notification is performed to notify that the main body frame 4 is opened by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. As the notification when the door is open, it is assumed that a sound repeating "the door is open", a message display "the door is open!", And lamp light emission with luminance higher than that of the normal time are performed. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal entry time command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, whereby an image, a lamp, and a speaker of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from the timing t4. An alarm is issued at the time of an abnormal ball entry to notify that there is an abnormal ball entry to the various prize winning openings and the gate unit 2003 by the output from the above. As the notification at the time of the abnormal entering, it is decided to execute a voice repeating “abnormal entering”, a message display “abnormal entering!”, And lamp light emission with luminance higher than that at the normal time. As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the main body frame 4 is open, and whether or not there is an abnormal ball entry in the various winning openings and the gate portion 2003, and the change permission state or confirmation After the end of the display state, the main unit frame 4 is open by executing notification when the door is open or notification when the door is abnormal for the outside, and an abnormal ball is inserted in the various winning openings and the gate portion 2003. A hole manager can grasp what happened. In addition, it is also possible to simultaneously execute notification at the time of door opening or notification at the time of abnormal ball entry after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, but a notification that a heavy fraud is suspected (for example, at the time of abnormal ball entry) Notification may be given priority and executed.

  As described above, commands related to improper monitoring such as a door open command and an abnormal prize command are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The command set in the second command buffer is held until transmission of the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF without transmission, and at the time of timing t4, the command set in the second command buffer is peripheral It is made to transmit to the control board 1510. As a result, when the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, it is prevented that notification when opening the door or notification when entering an abnormal opening is performed by the fraud detection not intended by the hole administrator. Inhibition of

  On the other hand, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a command set in the first command buffer, a setting change command that specifies that the change permission state is started, or a start of the confirmation display state There are a setting confirmation command that specifies that it is time, a setting change completion command that specifies that it is time to end the change permission state, and a setting value confirmation display completion command that specifies that it is time to end the confirmation display state. . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state, and the setting confirmation command is at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state. , And sets any command, and immediately transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is at timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, the command is set in the first command buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes. During the period, the alert notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. That is, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the alert notification corresponding to the type of the command is executed by the image or the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker. . As alert notification corresponding to the setting change command, display the sound of repeating "setting change in progress", the message "setting changing!", And execute the lamp emission in the corresponding color while changing the setting of the setting value. And Also, as the alert notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed", a message saying "setting is being confirmed!", Lamp light emission in the color corresponding to the setting value setting confirmation (setting value It is supposed that the light emission mode different from the lamp light emission in the corresponding color is performed during the setting change of. As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hole manager can perform the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value by executing the alert notification toward the outside. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that it can be grasped immediately and the unauthorized person or persons other than the hall administrator do not perform fraudulent actions in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As described above, commands related to settings such as the setting change command and the setting confirmation command are set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, and the set command is It is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even when the main body frame 4 is opened or there is an abnormal ball entry in the various winning openings and the gate portion 2003, the door open notification is made until the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. And because it is delayed that notification at the time of entering the ball is executed, it is a situation that is not a normal fraud monitoring system, but prior to the command set in the second command buffer, a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, etc. By sending a command related to the setting of the alarm (specific command for warning) to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that unauthorized persons other than the hall administrator do not act in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. be able to.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU executes alert notification corresponding to the type of command. In the change permitted state, it is a state where it is possible to change the setting of the set value, and compared with the confirmation display state, particularly the monitoring system so that the setting change of the set value is not illegally performed by persons other than the hall administrator. However, by executing alert notification corresponding to the type of command, the hole manager can accurately determine whether it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring system.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU executes notification when the door is opened or notification when an abnormal entry occurs when a door open command or an abnormal entry command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. However, in these notifications, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the image and the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the speaker, but also the warning sound such as "BB" is added to the sound from the speaker Output ("Door is open, BB, door is open, etc."), and is executed by the combination of "message + warning sound". On the other hand, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the alert notification corresponding to the type of the command is executed. In the notification, the content of the predetermined message is notified by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600, but the sound output from the speaker is executed only by the sound without outputting the warning sound. ing. As a result, when performing setting change of the setting value or confirming display of the setting value, even if the alert effect corresponding to the type of command is executed, it is directed to the outside compared with the notification at door opening or notification at abnormal ball entry Appeal can be suppressed and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. About transmission timing of game information command]
In the embodiment described above, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the set value confirmation display process of step S28. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), various information is read from the game backup information in step S34, and the game information command corresponding to the various information is built in By setting it in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set gaming information command to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp information about the game before the power is shut off. be able to. As a result, after the end of the confirmation display state, the current gaming state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted at the time of turning off the power, the number of reservations stored at the time of turning off the power, etc. The peripheral control MPU grasps the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU restores the effect by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. For example, the variation of the decorative symbol interrupted at the time of power off The display can be resumed, or the display of the stored number of holds can be resumed when the power is turned off.

  In this respect, with regard to the game information command, the second command buffer is not at the end of the confirmation display state (at the time t4 when the setting key switch 1311 is turned OFF) but at the start time of the confirmation display state (at the time ty). When the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311 is turned OFF comes. The game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when transmitting such game backup information as a game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 112A is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). FIG. 112 (B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command in the case where the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  In this example, although the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the case of transmitting the game backup information as the game information command is described. In the case of performing initialization of the main control built-in RAM or performing setting change of the setting value by operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the time of power on, identification is made in step S38 among all areas of the main control built-in RAM. Since the game is cleared except for the area, the game backup information is lost, and the game backup information is not transmitted as the game information command.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in the main control power-on process of this example, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 in the determination of step S26. If it is determined that the value is not 0, first, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. In the process of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. There is. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the preset setting display permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the processing of step S32 is performed before the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, various information is read out from the game backup information, and the game information command corresponding to the various information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM. It is set in (command buffer). When the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 or the value (sum value) of the checksum in step S30 is Resumption of the game will be delayed by the amount of time to determine whether it matches the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the main control side power off process (power off). By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, shortening the time until the game is resumed after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28. Will be able to

  As shown in FIG. 112 (A), when normal power is on, that is, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at timing t3, the timing ty is From the point of time, the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is made variable without performing initialization. The main control MPU sets game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM at a timing ty at the start of such a variable state, and immediately sets the game information command. It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (the output from the effect display device 1600, the image, the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of turning off the power at timing ty, which is the start of the changeable state. be able to.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, a rendering member (for example, rendering operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the portion 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is performed. That is, from the time point of timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main unit frame 4 and the game board 5 is It has been done. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect members, the effect members normally operate from the initial position toward the operation position It is supposed that the confirmation of the position, the accurate alignment, etc. are performed so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is at a position shifted from the initial position at the time of timing ty which is the start of the variable state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation, When the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the control for the effect member to return to the initial position is repeated several times, and the effect member stands by at a position deviated from the initial position. It can be prevented. And, after the end of the initial operation of the effect member, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the rendering member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined symbol variation is The timing at which the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (B), when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing t3, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If not, from the time of timing ty, the confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed is made. Then, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is ended at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the time t4. Make it possible. In such a case, the main control MPU sets game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty at which the confirmation display state starts, and the game information command in the second command buffer. The game is set in the second command buffer until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives without immediately transmitting the set game information command to the peripheral control board 1510. The information command is held, and at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control MPU may restore the effect (the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600) at the time of turning off the power at the timing ty which is the start of the changeable state. it can.

  As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start time of the confirmation display state, without immediately transmitting the set game information command to the peripheral control board 1510, The game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes, and peripheral control of the game information command set in the second command buffer is performed at timing t4. Transmission to the substrate 1510 is performed. Thereby, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, it is prevented that the effect at the time when the power is shut off (image from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker) is restored, and the normal operation is inhibited. It can be suppressed. In addition, since the game backup information is already set in the second command buffer as a game information command at the timing ty at the start of the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. Even if noise is generated and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start time of the confirmation display state, and the setting confirmation command thus set is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, a rendering member (for example, rendering operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the portion 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5 Has been done. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect members, the effect members normally operate from the initial position toward the operation position It is supposed that the confirmation of the position, the accurate alignment, etc. are performed so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is at a position shifted from the initial position at the time of timing ty which is the start time of the confirmation display state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. When the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the control for the effect member to return to the initial position is repeated several times, and the effect member stands by at a position deviated from the initial position. It can be prevented. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the rendering member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined symbol variation is The timing at which the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As described above, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, it is possible to transmit the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while it is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4. In the confirmation display state, the fluctuation pattern is not transmitted. For this reason, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the effect member does not operate by transmitting the fluctuation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol fluctuation. It can not be determined whether or not it is not operating due to a failure of the effect member. In this point, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the initial stage of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 By performing the operation, it can be notified to the outside that "the effect member is normal but not in connection with the game", and it can be determined that it is not a malfunction of the effect member. In this example, the initial operation of the effect member is performed in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but the operation is performed to notify that the effect member is not a failure. For example, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, only the temporary operation of the effect member is performed separately from the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed. The provisional operation of the effect member may be an operation different from the initial operation or may be the same operation as the initial operation.

  When setting change of the setting value is performed, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the set change command is immediately set to the peripheral control board 1510. Sent to. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5 as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the rendering member (for example, the rendering operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) is being performed. As described above, even in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it can be notified to the outside that "the effect member is normal but not in a state accompanying the game", and it is not a malfunction of the effect member It can be determined.

[14-2. About extension of alert notification after the end of change permission state and confirmation display state]
In the embodiment described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the alert notification corresponding to the type of the command is performed by the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. Although it is executed, the alert notification may be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case where the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a time chart showing the case where the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the details are described above, but at the start of the change permission state at timing ty, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and at the end of the confirmation display state at timing ty, the first command A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as it is set. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes. During the period, the alert notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, at the end of the change permission state at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. When any command is set, it is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command and a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and then a predetermined time (for example, During the period until the timing t4 'when 30 seconds has elapsed, the alert notification in progress is continuously executed from the timing ty by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. There is. That is, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the alert notification corresponding to the type of command is executed, but the timing is also after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. The alert notification is extended and executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) which is a period from t4 to timing t4 '. The extension of the alert notification is set by setting an extension end condition of the alert notification and satisfying the set extension end condition. Specifically, when ending in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) as an extension period of alert notification, the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit counts a predetermined time And end by the expiration of time. Also, as another example, when ending with a predetermined number of voice announcements (for example, a loop of 5 message voices) as an extension period of alert notification, the predetermined number is set in a specific count unit, and the count The program may end when the unit starts counting a predetermined number of times and becomes expired.

  As described above, at the time of execution of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also a timing t4 'where a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4 comes. Until the period, alert notification is extended and executed. For example, in the case of executing alert notification only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, in a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty at which the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts. If the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the time for executing alert notification, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, becomes short. When the confirmation display is performed, the hall administrator may not notice. In particular, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, since it is not necessary to change the setting of the setting value, it is possible for the person other than the hole manager to perform the confirmation display of the setting value improperly in a short time. People may not notice. On the other hand, when alert notification is extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a short time (for example, 1) from the timing ty at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF in 2 seconds), a period from the timing t4 to the timing t4 'is secured as the time for executing alert notification. For this reason, even if a person other than the hole manager illegally changes the setting of the setting value or confirms the setting value in a short time, the hole administrator is easily noticed and the person other than the hole administrator performs the wrongdoing Can strengthen the surveillance system so that there is no

  Further, as described above in detail, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the alert corresponding to the type of the command by the output from the image, the lamp and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. The notification is being performed. As alert notification corresponding to the setting change command, display the sound of repeating "setting change in progress", the message "setting changing!", And execute the lamp emission in the corresponding color while changing the setting of the setting value. And Also, as the alert notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, a voice of "setting is being confirmed", a message of "setting is being confirmed!", And lamp lighting in the color corresponding to the setting confirmation is performed. It is supposed to be. When the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the message content of the alert notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained, but the change permission is permitted. The message content may be different from the status or the confirmation display status. For example, in the alert notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the message content different from the message content in the change permission state or the confirmation display state is “setting change completed” or “setting confirmation completed It may be configured to loop and output a message such as "I have done it." As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the hole manager to notice that the case is regularly ended in the change permission state or the confirmation display state as well as the countermeasure against the above-mentioned fraudulent activity. Moreover, when maintaining the message content of the alert notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is made to prevent a temporary disconnection of the notification at t4, which is the switching timing with the extension of the alert notification. It is also good. For example, at least the sound output from the speaker in the alert notification executed corresponding to the type of the command in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the continuous output until the sound is completed so as not to end halfway As to the voice in the alert notification to be extended and controlled, it can be exemplified to execute again from the beginning of the voice after completion of the voice of the alert notification that has been continuously output.

  In addition, for alert notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the speaker, but for the sound output from the speaker, the notification when opening the door and the notification when abnormal entering the door It does not output warning sound such as "Bee Bie" which is output as, and is executed only by voice. Moreover, in the change permission state or confirmation display state which is a period from timing ty to timing t4, it is impossible to change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from timing ty to timing t4, it becomes a changeable state capable of performing the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, For example, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effect sounds are output from the speakers. In this respect, even when warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the speaker is provided in a limited manner to output sound by not outputting the warning sound from the speaker as the warning notification. When there is room in the limited channels provided for the purpose of outputting various effect sounds, there is no space (unused channel) in the limited channels. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  In addition, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU receives a command at the time of opening the door from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at time t4, The time command is received, but the door is opened from timing t4 'which is the end time of the alert notification executed and extended without executing notification at door opening or notification at abnormal ball entry at timing t4. We are performing notification when it is time and notification of abnormal arrival. That is, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the extended alert notification is executed with priority over the notification at the door opening or the notification at the abnormal ball entry. As a result, even if a person other than the hole manager illegally changes the setting of the setting value or confirms the setting value in a short time, the hole administrator can give priority to the extended alert notification. It is easy to notice that you can strengthen the surveillance system so that no one other than a hall administrator can cheat. In addition, about notice (for example, notice at the time of abnormal ball entry) which is suspected of severe fraud, it is not in time of timing t4 'which is the end time of the alert notice executed by extension, but in the execution of extended alert notice However, it may be performed at timing t4.

  In addition, for notification when the door is open or notification when an error occurs, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the image or lamp of the effect display device 1600 or the speaker, but also the warning sound such as "Bee Bie" from the speaker Is output and executed by the combination of "message + warning sound". The notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormal are continuously output during execution of the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormal, but the configuration is such that the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is output. It may be However, in this example, since notification at the time of door opening or notification at the time of abnormal entry is executed from the time of timing t4 ′ at the end of the alert notification performed and extended, for example, extension time of the alert notification (timing If the period from t4 to timing t4 ') is longer or the same as the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door open notification and abnormal lock notification, the door open notification and error Notification when entering will not be output. In consideration of the problem caused by the decrease in the notification frequency, the extension time of alert notification (period from timing t4 to timing t4 ′) is longer than or equal to the output time of warning sound (for example, 10 seconds) You may be configured to output the notification at the time of opening the door or notification at the time of abnormal entering of the door only for the remaining time after the extension time of the alert notification among the output time of the notification at the door opening and the notification at the abnormal entering. . Further, the notification at the door opening or the notification at the abnormal entering may be newly started after the extension time of the alert notification.

  Also, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the door open notification is executed from time t4 'when the extended alert notification ends. When the timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed comes before the timing t4 ', notification at the time of opening the door is not performed. That is, when the main unit frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended alert notification, notification when the door is opened is not performed. However, if the main unit frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended alert notification and the main unit frame 4 is opened again before the timing t4 ′, the extended alert notification is ended and notification when the door is opened Running. Normally, after the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value, the main body frame 4 is only closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If a mysterious situation occurs in which the main unit frame 4 is opened again immediately after the setting change of the setting or the confirmation display of the setting value occurs, alert notification at the door opening consisting of a combination of "message + warning sound" It is easy for the hole administrator to notice that the main frame 4 is open due to a mysterious situation in which there is a suspicion of fraud etc., and the situation where the main frame 4 is open is continued by priority execution. Can strengthen the surveillance system so that there is no

  Further, although the details are described above, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4. In contrast, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is performed (however, regarding monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005) , Only during the jackpot game). Then, when it is determined that the injustice due to the magnet or the vibration is performed, the informing of the injustice by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 is executed as the external notification. At this time, even in the case where the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the unauthorized notification is executed with priority over the extended alert notification. In this way, it is easy for a hole administrator to notice by giving priority to an extended alert notification that a fraudulent notification such as a magnet or vibration is suspected to be a serious fraud, and it is possible for other than the hole administrator to perform fraudulent activity. Can strengthen the surveillance system.

  Also, in the alert notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image or the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, but for example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display The image of the device 1600 may not be output. As described above, in the configuration in which alert notification is performed using a part of the plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker), alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In the case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as an alert alert during extension, but is output as an alert alert during extension if it is determined that a cheating by magnet or vibration is being performed. The fraud notification may be performed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 (in the notification using only the notification members not in use among the plurality of notification members). Thereby, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hole administrator may be made aware of the injustice notification suspected of being unfair, without stopping the extended alert notification. it can. In addition, also about notification at the time of door opening and notification at the time of abnormal prize similarly (only the notification member which is not used out of a plurality of notification members by only the image of the effect display device 1600 which is not output as a warning notification under extension) The notification at the time of opening the door or the notification at the time of abnormal winning may be executed by the notification used.

  Also, in this example, the alert notification is extended and executed regardless of whether the change permission status or the confirmation display status has ended, but the alert alert is extended and executed only after the confirmation display status has ended. It may be configured to For example, when changing the setting of the setting value, initialize the main control internal RAM after the end of the change permission state (in step S38, clear the specific area of the main control internal RAM except for the specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. During the period until timing t4 'arrives, the configuration is such that the RAM clear notification is performed to notify that the RAM clear has occurred instead of the alert notification extension by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. It may be Thus, after the end of the change permission state, the hole manager can grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. About the case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state]
In the embodiment described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 or a plurality of effect members) mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5. Although the initial operation of the rotary decorative body 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a time chart showing a case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at the end of the change permission state at timing t4, and at the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the set value confirmation in the first command buffer is performed. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main unit frame 4 or the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. The initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210) is started. That is, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, without performing the initial operation of the effect member, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4 or the confirmation display state The initial operation of is performed.

  The effect member described above includes the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 as members that can operate between the initial position and the operation position. In such an initial operation of the effect member, return processing for performing accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position, and confirmation whether the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position The confirmation process is performed in order. For example, if the effect member is in operation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the effect member stops at a position deviated from the initial position, and even when the power is turned on thereafter, the effect member is initial It is at a position shifted from the position. In this respect, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the return processing is performed even if the effect member is at a position deviated from the initial position at time t4, which is the end time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Thus, the effect member can be returned to the initial position, and when the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the process for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times. The standby of the effect member at the position deviated from the initial position can be prevented. In the confirmation process, after the effect member moves from the initial position to the operating position, it can be checked whether the effect member operates normally by returning to the initial position from the operating position. If the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not operate normally to the operating position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the effect on the effect member is abnormal. Is externally notified that a problem has occurred. And, after the end of the initial operation of the effect member, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the rendering member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined symbol variation is The timing at which the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  Further, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of emitting and decorating the first pattern and the second pattern by light irradiation. In the initial operation of such a light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process is performed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is properly illuminated and decorated. That is, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light to decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light to decorate the second pattern are repeated several times. Thus, it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is properly illuminated and decorated. The initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are performed in parallel from the timing t4 at which the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. I have to. Then, after the end of the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, effects using the light guide plate 3110 can be performed. For example, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during symbol variation is transmitted as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the symbol variation is in progress. At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is configured to emit and decorate the first pattern and the second pattern.

  As described above, in this example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, is set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, and the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4. For example, in the case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the setting change of the set value or the set value At the same time as confirmation of whether the confirmation display functions properly, it is necessary to confirm whether the effect member operates normally by the initial operation of the effect member, and it is difficult for the person who performs the confirmation work in the factory to confirm . However, by performing the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the setting value is set to the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4. Only after confirming the setting change and setting value of the setting, and after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, only confirming whether the effect member operates normally by the initial operation of the effect member Since it can be done and it is not necessary for the person who carries out the confirmation work at the factory to check at the same time, the certainty of confirmation can be increased.

  In the above, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial operation of the effect member when receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at time t4. However, apart from the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, an initial operation command for performing an initial operation of the rendering member was received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. At this time, an initial operation of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, and is set to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial operation command is set. I assume. On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives, the initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the timing t4, the initial operation command set in the second command buffer May be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, while setting the initial operation command at the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes. The initial operation of the effect member can be delayed, and the initial operation of the effect member can be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  In addition, when executing the change permission state or the confirmation display state, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but also a period until a timing t4 'when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the timing t4. When the alert notification is extended and executed, the extension time of the alert notification is set to be longer than the time when the initial operation of the effect member is performed. That is, the initial operation of the effect member to be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended before the end of the alert notification that is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. . As described above, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the state shifts to a changeable state where it is possible to change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the player plays the game. Although it is possible to perform, during the period when the alert alert is extended and executed, the alert by the image and the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker is executed, and the state where external alert is heightened And For this reason, the period in which the alert notification is extended and executed is not a period in which the player is about to start playing the game after the player is made to hesitate to start the game. In this regard, by terminating the initial operation of the effect member during the period in which the alert notification is extended and executed, the alert notification executed by the extension is ended, and the player tries to start the game. , The initial operation of the effect member has already been finished. For this reason, after the end of the alert notification that is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member. It is possible not to miss information obtained from the contents of the effect. In addition, during the period in which the alert notification is extended and executed, the content of the alert notification to be extended and executed in order to promote the player not to start playing the game, "Please wait a little more for the start of the game", etc. It may be executed in such a manner as to include a special message for prompting the game stand by.

  In addition, when performing the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or the effect member If it does not operate normally at the operating position or the initial position, the anomaly of the role by the image of the effect display device 1600 or the output from the lamp or speaker so that the occurrence of the abnormality in the effect member is notified to the outside The notification is being performed. At this time, even when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the bonus item alert notification is executed with priority over the extended alert notification. As described above, by giving priority to the alert notification for a bonus item over the extended alert notification, the hole manager can easily notice and easily confirm whether the effect member operates properly.

  Also, in the alert notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image or the lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, but for example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display The image of the device 1600 may not be output. As described above, in the configuration in which alert notification is performed using a part of the plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker), alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, although not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as alert notification during extension, if it is determined that an abnormality occurs in the effect member, an effect that is not output as alert notification during extension The bonus item anomaly notification may be executed only by the image of the display device 1600 (by notification using only the notification members not in use among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hole administrator can be made aware of the bonus abnormality notification without stopping the extended alert notification.

  Also, in this example, as an initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a return process of performing accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position, and the effect member operates from the initial position Although the confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the device normally operates toward the position is sequentially performed, the return processing may be performed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. That is, from the start of the change permission state at the timing ty or the start of the confirmation display state, only the return processing of the initial operation of the effect member is executed, and after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4 or the confirmation display state The confirmation process may be executed among the initial operations of the above. Here, as for the return process, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for the effect member to return to the initial position is repeated several times, so a long time is required. May be In this point, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, by performing the return processing in advance, even if a long time is required for the return processing, the change is made. It does not affect the time until the confirmation processing as the initial operation of the effect member is completed after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member can be completed relatively quickly, and then the effect using the effect member based on the fluctuation pattern can be executed.

  Further, in this example, when transitioning to either the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing ty, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4 or the confirmation display state. In the case of transition to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, when transitioning to the change permission state, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4 or the confirmation display state, while the timing is transitioned to the confirmation display state The initial operation of the effect member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state in ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, since the setting change of the setting value is not performed as in the change permission state, and only the setting confirmation of the setting value is performed, the confirmation display state is ended in a relatively short time. Is possible. In this point, when transitioning to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member is performed in advance in the confirmation display state, and the initial operation of the effect member is completed until the confirmation display state ends. It can be done. For this reason, after the end of the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member based on the fluctuation pattern, and while the confirmation display state is ended in a relatively short time, the initial operation of the effect member is completed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult for the player to start playing a game by not playing the game.

[14-4. About modification of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting the fraudulent action by the magnet, the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is the periphery of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located behind the gaming board 5 One magnetic sensor that can identify the front of the game area 5a located on the front side of 5) is provided, but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided to be located on the front side of the game board 5 Each magnetic sensor may be capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in the front of the game area 5a or around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. Then, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, an illegal act using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, the magnetic sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a) Monitoring may be performed. A modification of the monitoring of fraudulent activity during such setting change of the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a time chart showing a modification of the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of the set value and confirmation display of the set value.

  In this example, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a located on the rear side of the game board 5 as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. At normal times, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, at normal times, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a does not generate magnetism (unauthorized access) that should not occur in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It monitors whether or not magnetism has occurred (whether the magnet has approached), and monitors fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or confirming display, except for those who perform setting change of the setting value or confirming display. Examples of fraudulent actions against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include metal fraudulent equipment in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) and A magnet and a metal illegal device are inserted through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening that has partially destroyed the pachinko machine 1 by storing a magnet for indirectly operating the metal illegal device. It is conceivable that the operation is performed to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. When the detection signal from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is input in the cheating detection process of step S112, the cheating using the magnet for the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided Is determined to have been done.

  Similarly, at normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470 b is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, at normal times, it is monitored by the game area magnetic sensor 2470b whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) which should not occur originally is generated (whether the magnet approaches) to the area in front of the game area 5a. In addition, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to monitor illegal activities such as entering various winning openings and gate portions provided on the game board 5. In the injustice detecting process in step S112, when the detection signal from the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is input, it is determined that the injustice using a magnet is performed on the area in front of the gaming area 5a. doing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting a fraudulent action by the magnet, but these two magnetic sensors are provided. The sensors 2470a, 2470b may have the same performance. That is, although these two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are not shown, they are formed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and the first magnetic sensor has directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to one side surface. To be able to perform magnetic detection in the magnetic detection area and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection area having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side surface opposite to the magnetic detection area It has become. The term "strong in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is disposed such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the left-right direction or the up-down direction in a front view of the pachinko machine 1 , A wide range of the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path Point) can be monitored. On the other hand, in the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a, the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the above-mentioned sensor body expand in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1 One magnetic detection area is disposed so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided can be monitored.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing ty to timing t4, monitoring of a fraudulent act on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a. While the game area section magnetic sensor 2470 b is used to monitor the fraudulent activity on a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who performs setting change of the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a. While there is no room for fraudulent acts using magnets, except for such regular workers, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is in a position where it can not be viewed by the regular workers, This is because there is a possibility that a non-authorized worker such as this may make a fraudulent act using a magnet. In addition, if the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value or confirms the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, the possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism Although the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a has a high possibility of detecting the generation of magnetism, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraud using a magnet. It is possible to prevent the restriction of the setting change and the confirmation display operation.

  Further, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, monitoring of the cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because the setting key switch 1311a is a pachinko machine when the authorized operator who performs setting change of the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Although it is provided on the back side of 1, the vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, even if a legitimate worker who performs setting change of the set value or confirms display of the set value adds vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting occurrence of vibration as cheating by vibration, which is normal. It is possible to suppress the setting change of and the inhibition of confirmation display work. In this example, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is performed only during a big hit game during normal times, but, like the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activity with a magnet, a big hit game is in progress Not only in the variable state but also in the variable state, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 may be performed. And, even in the case of executing fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 in the variable state or the big hit game, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state before shifting to the variable state The monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. That is, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the monitoring of the fraudulent activity regarding magnetism using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is executed, while the vibration sensor 3005 It does not use the monitoring of fraudulent activity regarding vibration.

  In this example, although two magnetic sensors of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are provided, only the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is provided, and the front side of the game board 5 is provided. It may be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located in In such a configuration, in the same way as the above-described two magnetic sensors, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to use the gaming area portion magnetic sensor 2470b It monitors fraudulent activity against a given area In addition, as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, not a single magnetic sensor but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, and the plurality of magnetic sensors make it possible to set the entire area in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 It may be monitored. For example, at a plurality of locations among the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the winning opening such as the large winning opening 2005 on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and other major parts of the ball flow path. On the other hand, occurrence of magnetism can be detected so that each magnetic sensor of a plurality of magnetic sensors corresponds, and fraudulent activity is monitored. In such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used for the entire area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 Monitor fraudulent activity. However, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, only a part of the magnetic sensors among the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used, and an important area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, It is also possible to monitor only the injustice with respect to the portion of the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005).

  In addition, in a change permission state or a confirmation display state which is a period from timing ty to timing t4, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. It is judged that cheating is being done. In addition, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing ty to the timing t4, at that time, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is magnetic. When the magnetism generation time command specifying the detection of the occurrence of magnetism is set in the second command buffer and the magnetism generation time command is set in the second command buffer, timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF comes. The magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is held until this time, and the magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives the magnet generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, and thus from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. With the output of the above, notification on magnetism generation is performed to notify that the generation of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. As the notification when magnetism occurs, it is assumed that sound repeating “magnetic detection abnormality”, message display “magnetic detection abnormality!”, And lamp light emission with luminance higher than that at normal time are executed. Thus, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. By executing notification at the time of detection of magnetism toward the outside, the hole administrator can detect that the main body frame 4 is open or that generation of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be grasped. In addition, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to simultaneously execute the notification at the door opening time and the notification at the abnormal entering time as described above, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism In this case, it is possible to give priority to notification when magnetism is generated, on the assumption that serious fraud is suspected.

  As described above, with regard to commands related to improper monitoring such as magnetism generation commands, the second command buffer is set in the change permission state or confirmation display state as in the door open time command and abnormal prize time command, as described above. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311 is turned OFF arrives without immediately transmitting the set command to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the timing t4, The command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, when performing setting change of the setting value or confirming display of the setting value, even when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as an illegal act using a magnet, notification at the time of magnetism generation is executed. It can prevent the inhibition of regular work.

  In the above, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is performed without executing notification at the time of magnetism generation at that time. Although notification is made when magnetism occurs after completion, notification may be made prior to the change permission state or the confirmation display state if the notification does not hinder normal work. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU, etc. is suppressed, etc. While the notification by the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker is delayed on the) side, the error is not output from the speaker but the error is displayed only on the 7 segments provided on the payout control board 633 It can be exemplified that the simple notification on the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side is executed without being delayed.

  Further, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, monitoring of the cheating on the predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is executed using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b, but only the confirmation display state The game area portion magnetic sensor 2470 b may be used to monitor the fraudulent act on a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the confirmation display state, since the confirmation display of the setting value can be performed by a short-term operation, there is a low possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism due to the authorized worker. While monitoring of cheating on the predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is strengthened using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, in the change permission state, setting change of the setting value is performed by long-term work. Because there is a high possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism due to the regular worker, the pachinko machine 1 using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b with emphasis on the workability of the regular worker It is also possible not to monitor fraudulent activity on a predetermined area on the front side of the

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 62 as the game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progression of the game. A control board 1310 is provided. This main control board 1310 can be electrically connected to a test harness as a wiring for taking out an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test apparatus for testing the pachinko machine 1 as a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. It can be equipped.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x which is the surface side of the main control board 1310, while the test connector 1310 k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y which is the back surface side of the main control substrate 1310.

  As described above, since the test connector 1310 k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, and the pachinko machine 1 is a game hall Even in the case of being manufactured as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to, the area for mounting the test connector 1310 k on the surface side of the main control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the main control substrate 1310 can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 'of FIG. 64 (a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . The plurality of electronic parts are a lead type electronic part and a ZIP type main control MPU included in the lead type of FIG. 64 (a) (denoted as part number “MIC1” in the figure) and a surface mount type. As an electronic component, it comprises the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of FIG. 64A and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control substrate 1310'.

  The main control board 1310 'is provided with a parts list area 1310xb' of FIG. 64 (a) as an information area. The parts list area 1310xb 'can represent information corresponding to an identifier of a surface mount type electronic part. Examples of the information written in the parts list area 1310xb 'include the name of the manufacturing company (including abbreviations and symbols) of the surface mounting type electronic component, the product number of the surface mounting type electronic component, and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the parts list area 1310xb ', the parts list of the electronic parts configured in such a manner that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are aligned. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa ′. Printed in white (or black) as A delimiting symbol ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being continuous. . By this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog). In addition, the manufacturer's name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (the number listed in the catalog).

  As described above, even when the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control substrate 1310 ′ is difficult to visually recognize, information (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) Is displayed in the parts list area 1310xb 'of the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mounting type electronic component can be reliably viewed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 62 as a game control board capable of controlling the progression of the game, and The control substrate 1310 is accommodated in the main control substrate box 1320 of FIG. 66 as a sealing substrate box having sealing means.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of vent holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 66 as a hole having a smaller shape than the shape of the surface mount type electronic component among the plurality of electronic components. It is done.

  As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of vent holes 1301z, which are holes having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface mount type electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component is formed by any illegal means. Can not be taken out from the vent 1301z, which is a hole provided with a plurality of main control board boxes 1320, even if it is attempted to peel off the main control board 1310 and replace it with an illegal electronic part. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the replacement of the surface mount type electronic component with an incorrect electronic component.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a winning probability control circuit, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of winning probabilities by an external operation.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a big hit determination table in which a percentage of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won is defined, a big hit symbol) A big hit symbol determination table in which the percentage of the determination value of the determination is defined, a small hit determination table in which the percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won is defined, the percentage of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined Small hit symbol decision table, a normal transition decision table etc. where the ratio of the judgment value of transition decision from definite variation to normal time is specified) or used at various distribution rates associated with setting value Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that specifies the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) . The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder which is turned by inserting a setting key, and can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 etc. The setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as an initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape vertically extends). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. ing.

  The main control MPU 1310 a and the setting key switch 1311 a are mounted on different substrates and electrically connected to each other.

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards respectively, whereby the force accompanying the external operation to the setting key switch 1311a is the setting key switch. The main control MPU 1310 a can be mounted on the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310 a is mounted via the main control board 1310 on which the main control board 1310 is mounted. This can contribute to preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 22 is mounted as a win probability control circuit is a surface mounted component which is an SMD type electronic component. The setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 on which the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is mounted as a setting device is a lead type electronic part. It is an insertion mounting part mounting board which can mount only insertion mounting parts. In this way, the main control substrate 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a surface mountable component mountable substrate on which surface mount components (SMD type) can be mounted, and setting change in which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted The substrate 1311 can be an insertion mounting component mounting substrate on which only insertion mounting components (SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the peeling load of the wiring pattern or land pattern in the solder portion where the insertion mounting component (lead type) is soldered to the solder surface of the substrate can be reduced compared to the surface mounting component (SMD type). As a result, the solder part can be made more resistant to peeling.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control substrate 1310 of FIG. 22 as the surface mountable component mountable substrate and the setting change substrate 1311 of FIG. 22 as the insertion mount component mountable substrate are transparent substrates. Each case is accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 of FIG. 66 as a case. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by a crimped portion 1303 of FIG. 66 with the exterior as a sealing device. The main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided with a surface mount component mountable substrate, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected with the main control MPU 1310 a of FIG. In addition, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311 a of FIG. 22 as a setting device to the setting change board 1311 of FIG. . The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310 which is a surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 which is an insertion mount component mountable board can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the caulking portion 1303. As a result, it is possible to increase the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 which is the surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 which is the insertion mount component mountable board.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 as the connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 as a connector provided on the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 as a mounting board is electrically connected by a connector connection provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing a fitting axis deviation. It is done. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector provided with a floating mechanism. A special connector having this floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and when the socket is inserted into the plug and pushed in, the socket and the plug are fitted and when the socket is fitted with the plug, the socket is inserted. It is possible to absorb an error (displacement axis deviation) that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in a direction (for example, the vertical direction) perpendicular to the insertion and pushing direction.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a game control board, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is provided as a setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and can change setting values for which the probability of becoming advantageous to the player is set. The setting key switch 1311 a shown in FIG. 22 is provided as a lead type electronic component.

  The lead type setting key switch 1311 a is used to insert and remove a setting key capable of changing the setting value. As the setting key is inserted into and removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 may be bent while the main control board 1310 is not bent.

  As described above, since the lead type setting key switch 1311 a is provided on the setting change board 1311 separate from the main control board 1310, an operation (a setting key to be able to change the setting value is removed / inserted) Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent in accordance with the operation), the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent in response to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are pivotally supported openably and closably on the outer frame 2 of FIG. 2 and to which the game board 5 of FIG. It has a front frame that is configured. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 21 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311 a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder which is turned by inserting a setting key, and can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 etc. The setting key switch as an initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction) The setting key switch 1311 a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311 a as the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and is turned on for the first ON. It is possible to

  A setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotal support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 is a main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 that constitute the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. And the main frame 4 can be opened and closed forwardly centering on the left side in front view, so that the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the lower part of the main frame The front view left side of the main body frame 4 in which the hinge assembly 52 is disposed in the vertical direction is the pivotally supported side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main frame 4 in the vertical direction is the opposite side. It becomes the open side of the main body frame 4. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the pivoting side (closing side) of the main body frame 4 that constitutes the front face frame.

  As described above, since the setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotally supported side of the front frame configured by the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5 If you try to do some unauthorized alteration to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened, and the illegal action is taken in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed It will be a prominent presence. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of fraud.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is a cover body pivotally supported openably and closably on the open side opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame as shown in FIG. The setting key switch 1311a which is covered by the back cover 640 and provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivoting side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and covered by the back cover 640. If the back cover 640 is not opened after releasing the key, the setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 can not be operated. In this case, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 pivotally supported openably and closably on the open side opposite to the pivoting side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivoting side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5, covered by the back cover 640, and the back cover 640 is opened after the front frame is opened. If not opened, the setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 can not be operated.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 is a main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 that constitute the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. And the main frame 4 can be opened and closed forwardly centering on the left side in front view, so that the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the lower part of the main frame The front view left side of the main body frame 4 in which the hinge assembly 52 is disposed in the vertical direction is the pivotally supported side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main frame 4 in the vertical direction is the opposite side. It becomes the open side of the main body frame 4. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the pivoting side (closing side) of the main body frame 4 that constitutes the front face frame. In addition, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front face frame so as to open and close covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 It is a thing. That is, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640 in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front face frame. Further, the back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 i of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is dispensable The right side in the front view is the pivoting side (closing side) of the back cover 640 because it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601 a of the upper full tank passage unit 600. The front side left side which is the opposite side to this is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front face frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the pivoting side (closing side) of the back cover 640. The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the back cover opening side. In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311 is provided with a slot for inserting the setting key, and the slot of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311 a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a large size (approximately 90 degrees).

  As a result, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 can not be operated, and the front cover can be opened. I have to open the frame. For this reason, when attempting to make any unauthorized alteration to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change substrate 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. In the gaming hall where the machine 1 is installed, the fraud can be prominent.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 63A is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. In the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310, as the insertion mounting component (lead type electronic component), the capacitor MC30 in FIG. 63A and the surface mounting component (surface mounting type electronic component) are shown in FIG. The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of a) can be mounted, and the SMD type electronic component (surface mounting shown in FIG. 63A) with the area where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted as a circuit non-formed area In the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the electronic component (type)), wiring patterns and through holes for transmitting control signals are not disposed at all.

  As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control substrate 1310, the capacitor MC 30 which is an insertion mounting component and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 which is a surface mounting component can be mixed and mounted. The area in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 which is a component is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-forming area in which a circuit such as a wiring pattern or a through hole is not formed. Thereby, even if the surface mounted component Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, the circuit to the surface mounted component Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 excludes the non-circuit formation region. Since it is formed, it is possible to visually observe the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 which is a surface mounted component. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the surface mounted component.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and as a first operation unit capable of receiving a predetermined operation, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311 of FIG. After the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are operated as the second operation unit, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. A main control MPU 1310a of a main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as setting change means capable of changing the setting value to which the probability of becoming advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. The pachinko machine 1 further includes, as guidance means for guiding information on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a notation or the like as location information which can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  As described above, since information related to the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633 are different. Even if provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311 and the RWM clear button 633 z of the payout control substrate 633 does not get confused about the operation procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control substrate 633, the crime prevention can be enhanced. Therefore, the crime prevention can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game using a game ball as a game medium, and a setting control unit related to preparation setting for starting a game, and a game A main control board 1310 of FIG. 22, a setting change board 1311 and a payout control board 633 of FIG. The setting control unit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. It is comprised of the determination of step S14 in the input process and the process of step S16A. The progress control unit is composed of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22, the main control main process in the main control side power on process of FIG. 69, the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. . The main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633 as game control means are the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of FIG. A plurality of electronic components such as the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. Electronic components involved in setting control of the RWM clear button 633z and the like of the payout control substrate 633 are separately provided on a plurality of substrates such as the setting change substrate 1311 of FIG. 22 and the payout control substrate 633 of FIG.

  As described above, since the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components involved in setting control, are separately provided on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, the crime prevention It can be enhanced. Therefore, the crime prevention can be enhanced.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game using a game ball as a game medium, and it is shown as a game control unit that performs control of game preparation and game control. 22 main control boards 1310 are provided. The control of the game is composed of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 69 and the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. The control of game preparation is the first game preparation control, the determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 69, the process of step S16A, etc., and the step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. And the process of step S218. In the first game preparation control, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 as the first operation unit (above when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (instant power outage occurs momentarily)) At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery, the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311. Is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and is turned on by the first ON. As a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the RWM clear button is further set. On the condition that the pressing operation unit of 633z is operated and the operation signal is input, the RW of the payout control board 633 in FIG. Clear button 633z to include. Probability be advantageous for the player based on the operation) is what may be a configurable state capable of changing the setting value set. The second game preparation control is switched to any one of a plurality of setting values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3 as the second operation unit following the first game preparation control. It is possible to The RWM clear button 633z is disposed on the payout control board 633 which is another board different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is disposed.

  As described above, by arranging the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change substrate 1311 and the RWM clear button 633 z of the payout control substrate 633 on different substrates, the crime prevention can be enhanced. Therefore, the crime prevention can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change substrate 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is disposed and the payout control substrate 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is disposed are shown as separate substrate cases. The main control board box 1320 in which the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed is accommodated and the RWM clear, since they are accommodated in the 66 main control board box 1320 and the delivery control board box 632 in FIG. 3 respectively. The security can be further enhanced by separating the dispensing control board box 632 in which the dispensing control board 633 in which the button 633z is disposed is accommodated.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 66 and the delivery control board box 632 of FIG. 3 are respectively caulking cases as separate board cases. In order to modify the main control board 1310 accommodated in the board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 and the delivery control board 633 accommodated in the delivery control board box 632, this caulking part must be broken, and the trace of the alteration Can leave.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game disposed on the back side of the game board 5 of FIG. 21, and the setting key switch 1311 a The setting change board 1311 to be disposed is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z of FIG. The frame on the side of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 4 is controlled as the frame side, and the setting control board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed is accommodated as the caulking case is accommodated in the delivery control board box 632. Arranged on the back side of the game board 5 with the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case And the dispensing control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is disposed can be disposed on the main body frame 4 as the frame side in a state accommodated in the dispensing control board box 632 as a caulking case, so the setting key switch 1311a By separately arranging the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z on the main body frame 4 side with the RWM clear button 633z as the frame side, the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and the door frame 3 of FIG. 1 can be removed as a charge removing portion capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge. Of the various decorative parts provided, the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 can be set as a setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probability in a state in which decoration plating is applied to the entire front and back, or an electrostatic removal pad. And a setting key switch 1311 a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 housed together with the housing 1310. At least the setting key switch 1311 a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 among the decorative plating and the static electricity removal pad and the setting key switch 1311 a. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value, so only a limited person, including the game hall manager, is permitted to possess. Being limited to 2-3 people.

  In this manner, the person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only limited persons including the game manager of the game hall are permitted to possess possession and limited to two or three people) can touch the charge removal portion. Since the person who is charged by itself and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge is removed by the static elimination unit, the setting key can allow the person to set a plurality of types of winning probabilities. Even when the switch 1311a is operated, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering through the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented. Further, at least the setting key switch 1311a of the charge removal unit and the setting key switch 1311a is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and separated from each other, the influence of the noise removed by the charge removal unit is the setting key It does not extend to the switch 1311a. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  Also, a front frame composed of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 of FIG. 4 is provided as the front frame that is pivotally supported openably and closably on the outer frame 2 of FIG. Of the various decorative parts, those having a decorative plating on the entire front and back, an electrostatic elimination pad, are provided on the front frame. Thereby, a person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited person including the store manager of the game hall is permitted to possess possession is limited to two or three persons) is charged by itself and electrostatic discharge is caused. Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by the above can be removed by touching the static elimination portion provided on the front frame.

  Further, among the various decorative parts provided in the door frame 3 as the charge removal part, those whose decoration plating is applied to the entire front and back are N of AC 24 V supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 It is electrically connected to the ground side which is (neutral). As a result, the ground side of the various decorative parts provided in the door frame 3 having the decorative plating on the entire front and back is N (Neutral) of AC 24 V supplied to the frame ground of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 And the person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited person, including the store manager of the game hall, is permitted to have possession, and is limited to 2 to 3 persons. The frame ground of the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge to the ground side which is N (Neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1) It can be removed by escaping.

  The present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko machine has been illustrated as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a ball ball machine and arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (using game medals) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a reel or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main portion (box) 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge not shown. With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to place the front door (front frame) 6002 in the main body It can be released from the part (box) 6004.

  The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to form the main portion (box) 6004 and It is used for opening and closing locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is mounted on a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmitting member (not shown) which is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) open at the rear, and is opposed to the central axis between the rear end and the front It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (a key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device is in contact with the transmission cylinder of the locking unit in a state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, The lock device and the lock unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and the main body portion (not shown) through the door frame metal ground wire It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit is the frame ground on the door frame side. The earth substrate (not shown) can temporarily collect electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and ground it to the island facility of the game hall, and the island of the game hall can be connected via the island facility earth wire (not shown). Electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 There is. The opening switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body (box) 6004 independently of the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device, not the one. In addition, the release switch is not disposed near the vicinity of the metal locking device, and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is disposed in the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. As described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front face of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative parts do not have any decorative plating, but some have decorative plating on the entire surface. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may intrude. Of the various decorative parts, those whose decorative plating is applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via a wire not shown. (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), but the conductive members are directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. And some are electrically connected). Thus, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered into the various decorative parts can be transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various grounds of the decorative parts provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground. Also, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic wave noise that has penetrated to the front and back surfaces of which has been subjected to decorative plating is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown). It is transmitted to the ground substrate provided inside the main body (box) 6004 and transmitted from the ground substrate to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire and removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, as described above, the metal door frame reinforcing unit is the frame ground on the door frame side.

  Note that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge removal portion at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002 or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004 An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge removal portion in the part on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is disposed (close side). The static elimination pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  In addition, a front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts, and some of the various decorative parts have no decorative plating at all. There are decorative platings on the entire surface, and among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring (not shown). The ground board provided inside the main part (box) 6004 is connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply substrate are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply substrate of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground substrate. It may be electrically connected. The power supply substrate is supplied with 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall. The AC 24 V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the ungrounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply substrate is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply substrate. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly flows a current, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) intrudes, the resistance value instantaneously decreases and a current flows, and the excessive voltage disappears. , Has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply substrate by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the N terminal of the power supply substrate to the ground side (earth) and removed from the slot machine 6000 .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a projection projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020 and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this projection. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the stored payment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is done. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a not-shown board holder provided in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 also accommodates, along with the main control board 1310, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the setting value is mounted. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a not-shown board holder which is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004 Therefore, the setting key switch 1311 a is disposed inside the main body portion (box) 6004. The setting change substrate 1311 may be accommodated in a substrate box separate from the main control substrate box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a substrate holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a described above, a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called, with a dot) is displayed on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 The setting display 1310g configured by a single device, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

  The setting key switch 1311a has substantially the same configuration as that provided for the above-described pachinko machine 1, and the setting key is inserted into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and rotated. Setting key cylinder is housed. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the metal cylindrical ( Alternatively, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (rectangular shape) is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. In a state in which the setting key cylinder is housed in a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, a state in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected It has become.

  The configurations (including other configurations (modifications)) of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320 and the like are substantially the same as those provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. The effect is the same as that of the above-described configuration, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. An example will be described. Even if noise intrudes from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 or the front surface of the setting key cylinder, as described above, the surface of the setting change board 1311 ( Foil removal areas SINSx and SIN of the setting change substrate 1311 in the copper plane on the mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) By forming y, the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 which can be inserted through a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a. Electrically connected from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 with a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes along the Being in an insulated state, a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a charges electromagnetic waves due to electrostatic discharge by charging itself. The metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or It can be attenuated by the setting key cylinder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge caused by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the ground of the setting change substrate 1311 through the setting change substrate 1311. There is no influence on the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is an important control substrate for controlling the progress of the game, and there is no change in the ground line transmitting the substrate ground. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  Note that the space between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder is filled with a nonconductive resin (insulating resin) to make the setting key cylinder metallic (or rectangular) Even if the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of metal and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but are insulated by adopting a rotatable configuration with respect to the casing of Good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from a cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of metal, the electromagnetic wave noise can be applied to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Metal is prevented from entering solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed in It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. That is, the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. This makes it possible to block the penetration of electromagnetic wave noise from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the penetration of the electromagnetic wave noise is played via the setting change board 1311. Progression to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is an important control substrate for controlling the movement of the substrate, can be reliably stopped, and no fluctuation is given to the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground). Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotary bodies (not shown), a rendering device (not shown), etc. installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window. It is possible to see through. Three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  In these variable rotary bodies, a translucent design band on which plural types of designs (eg, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is attached to each cylindrical skeleton ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotary body are connected. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, plural kinds of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the display window described above It looks like

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of a effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310 The progress of the effect is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 of the main control board 1310, and variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  According to the slot machine 6000, the main control board 1310 is provided with the front door 6002 on the front side as an openable door and is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a first key (game hall The first operation (when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004) can be performed by the operation of a regular metal key possessed by a clerk or the like. As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second operation (setting value) by the operation of a second key (setting key) different from the first key When changing it, the main control board box can be used as a second device in which the current set value set can be checked and the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component 13 0 and a, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities in a settable state (when changing a set value), and may set a set current set value in a checkable state (set) (When confirming the current set value). The metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311 a is provided on the rear side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311 a is not electrically connected to the ground side but insulated.

  Specifically, a metal cylindrical cylinder main body, which is a case of the metal locking device of the front door 6002, is electrically connected to the ground on the door frame side or N (Neutral) of 24 V AC. Connected to. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, the metal cylindrical shape of the setting key switch 1311 a ( Or a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 having an elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the housing is rectangular. The SLH 2 can be electrically insulated from solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing which is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid ground (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. Electrically isolated from the ground).

  As described above, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is temporarily generated in the metal locking device. Even if it invades, this intruded noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side without causing a change in the ground line of the main control substrate 1310 which is a substrate on which the electronic component is mounted, and a front door (front frame) Since a metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing which is a casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side from 6002 is not electrically connected to the ground side but is insulated, a temporary metallic cylinder Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes into a rectangular (or rectangular) housing, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has penetrated is attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. Parts mounted It is possible to prevent giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310, that is a substrate. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and the destruction of the electronic component.

  In addition, a metal cylindrical cylinder main body, which is a housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002, is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the slot machine 6000. The frame ground of the slot machine 6000 on the side of the door frame of the slot machine 6000 is electrically connected to the ground side which is N (Neutral), while the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case which is the case of the setting key switch 1311 a And the N (neutral) N side of the AC 24 V supplied to the slot machine 6000 without being electrically connected and insulated. Thus, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is electrically connected to the ground side which is N (Neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of slot machine 6000 or to slot machine 6000, and And a ground side that is N (Neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the slot ground of the slot machine 6000. It can be in a state where it is not electrically connected but insulated.

  In addition, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is a main portion (box) 6004 After being released from the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control (If the set value is to be changed), and the set current set value can be checked (if the set current set value is to be confirmed). Thus, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is a main portion (box) If the setting key switch 1311a is to be operated to open the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (if the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be checked (setting (When the current setting value is checked), and the security of the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

  In the integrated gaming machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008 ', and a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball insertion slot 6008' as gaming media in the main control board 1310, and the operation of the start lever 6014 is performed. The variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame lower unit 120 bulging part 123 device arrangement part 130 upper tray (storage tray)
131 storage area 131a front area 131b side area 132 bottom wall 133 rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 front peripheral wall 135 supply port 136 delivery port 137 alignment portion 138 stored light emission decoration portion (light emission decoration portion)
138a LED
150 door frame effect device (effect device)
1000 front component 1100 game panel 1110 panel board 1120 panel holder 1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1500 peripheral control unit 1510 peripheral control board (effect control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)
1512 Effect display control unit (effect control means)
1600 effect display device (effect display means)
3000 back unit 3200 back second rendering unit (front decoration)
3210 Rotating decoration (front decoration)
3228 Back second exterior decoration (front decoration)
3229 Back second inner decoration (front decoration)
3230 Back second inner circumference decoration body (front decoration body)
3300 back third rendering unit 3310 upper unit 3311 upper vertical ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3312 first decoration 3313 second decoration 3320 back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 lower unit 3331 lower vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3332 first decoration 3333 second decoration 3340 back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 first decoration 3353 second decoration 3360 back third left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 first decoration 3373 second decoration 3380 back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that plays a game,
A static elimination unit capable of removing noise generated by electrostatic discharge;
A setting device capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities in a settable state;
Equipped with
At least the setting device of the charge removal unit and the setting device is disposed behind the gaming machine.
A game machine characterized by